Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 12th Textbook Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

1. (A) Select the correct options and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
In India, the Consumer Protection Act was initiated in the year ………………
(a) 1947
(b) 1989
(c) 1986
Answer:
(c) 1986

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
The President of District Commission is a ………………..
(a) District Judge
(b) High Court Judge
(c) Supreme Court Judge
Answer:
(a) District Judge

Question 3.
The main objective of the consumer organization is to protect the interest of the …………………
(a) consumer
(b) trader
(c) producer
Answer:
(a) consumer

Question 4.
……………… is the highest authority to settle the consumer dispute under Act.
(a) State Commission
(b) National Commission
(c) District Commission
Answer:
(b) National Commission

Question 5.
The Government has established ……………… to settle the consumer disputes by compromise.
(a) District Commission
(b) Lok Adalat
(c) Consumer organisation
Answer:
(b) Lok Adalat

Question 6.
National Commission has ……………… members.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 7.
District Commission entertains complaints of consumer for compensation which is less than ………………..
(a) one crore
(b) ten lacs
(c) ten crore
Answer:
(a) one crore

Question 8.
…………………. is celebrated as World Consumer Day.
(a) 24th December
(b) 26th January
(c) 15th March
Answer:
(c) 15th March

Question 9.
In modern competitive market, consumer is regarded as the ………………
(a) King
(b) Agency
(c) Owner
Answer:
(a) King

1. (B) Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) King of the market (1) 1930
(B) National Commission (2) Socialist
(C) Mumbai Grahak Panchayat (3) Exceeds Rs ten crore
(D) Sale of Goods Act (4) Non-Government Organisation
(E) Consumer Right (5) Consumer
(6) Legislative Measures
(7) Exceeds Rs one crore but does not exceed Rs ten crore.
(8) 1956
(9) Consumer Protection Act
(10) Right to Information

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) King of the market (5) Consumer
(B) National Commission (3) Exceeds Rs ten crore
(C) Mumbai Grahak Panchayat (4) Non-Government Organisation
(D) Sale of Goods Act (1) 1930
(E) Consumer Right (10) Right to Information

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term for the following statement

Question 1.
The commission which entertains case where the value of the goods or services paid as consideration does not exceed Rs one crore.
Answer:
District Commission

Question 2.
A legal action initiated in a court of law regarding a matter of general public interest.
Answer:
Public Interest Litigation

Question 3.
Organizations which aim at promoting the welfare of the people.
Answer:
Non-Government Organizations

Question 4.
The right of consumer which is about safety and protection to his life and health.
Answer:
Right to Safety

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 5.
One who consumes or uses any commodity or service.
Answer:
Consumer.

1. (D) State whether the following statements are True or False

Question 1.
The seller has to recognize the rights of Consumer.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Consumer Protection Act provides protection to the producer.
Answer:
False

Question 3.
Consumer Protection Act is not required in India.
Answer:
False

Question 4.
Lok Adalat cam righty be described as “People’s Court”.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Consumer, being the king of market, does not have any responsibility.
Answer:
False

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
District Commission, State Commission, NGO, National Commission.
Answer:
NGO

Question 2.
District Judge, High Court Judge, Commissioner, Supreme Court Judge.
Answer:
Commissioner

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
National Commission is to be established by ………………. Government.
Answer:
Centred

Question 2.
Any person who does not agree with the decision of District Commission can appeal to the ……………….
Answer:
State Commission

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 3.
State commission has ……………….. members.
Answer:
four

Question 4.
The President of National Commission is ………………. judge.
Answer:
Supreme Court

Question 5.
National Commission entertains complaints of consumer for compensation that exceeds Rs ………………
Answer:
ten crore

Question 6.
The Consumer Protection Act established ………………… tier quasi judicial system for consumer protection.
Answer:
three

1. (G) Select the correct option and complete the following table

(High Court Judge, Four, Consumer Organisations, does not exceeds Rs one crore, 2019)

Group A Group B
A. Amount of compensation in District Commission —————
B. ———————- State Commission
C. Consumer Protection Act ——————
D. ——————— Non-profit and non Political organisation
E. Members of National Commission ——————-

Answer:

Group A Group B
A. Amount of compensation in District Commission Does not exceed Rs one crore
B. High Court Judge State Commission
C. Consumer Protection Act 2019
D. Consumer Organisations Non-profit and non Political organisation
E. Members of National Commission 4

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
When do we observe a National Consumer Day?
Answer:
On 24th December every year we observe a National Consumer Day.

Question 2.
Who is a consumer?
Answer:
A consumer means any person who buys any goods, hires any service or services for a consideration which has been paid or promised to be paid in future or under any system of deferred payment.

Question 3.
What information should one check before buying a product?
Answer:
Before buying a product the consumer should enquire about the quality, quantity, price, utility of goods and services, etc.

Question 4.
Which forum is set up at the national level for redressal of consumer complaints?
Answer:
National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission or National Commission is set up at the national level for redressal of consumer complaints.

Question 5.
Who shall be appointed as President of National Commission?
Answer:
A person, who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court, shall be appointed by the Central Government as the President of National Commission in consultation with Chief Justice of India.

Question 6.
When do we observe World Consumer’s Rights Day?
Answer:
On 15th March every year we observe World Consumer’s Rights Day.

1. (I) Arrange in proper order

Question 1.
National Commission, District Commission, State Commission.
Answer:
District Commission, State Commission, National Commission.

Question 2.
District Judge, Supreme Court Judge, High Court Judge.
Answer:
District Judge, High Court Judge, Supreme Court Judge.

1. (J) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
An appeal can be filed against the order of the National Commission to the State forum.
Answer:
Supreme Court

Question 2.
National Commission is established by the State Government.
Answer:
Central Government

Question 3.
District Commission is also referred as People’s Court.
Answer:
Lok Adalat

Question 4.
In India, sellers are widely dispersed and are not united.
Answer:
consumers

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 5.
National Commission entertains complaints where the value of the goods or services paid as consideration does not exceed Rs one crore.
Answer:
District Commission.

2. Explain the following term/concept:

Question 1.
District Commission.
Answer:
(1) Meaning : A consumer redressal agency established by the State Government in each district to give relief or settle the disputes of consumers who complain against manufacturers or traders, is called District Commission.

(2) Territorial Jurisdiction : District Commission can exercise its jurisdiction within the limits of its district.

(3) Monetary jurisdiction : District Commission has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs 1 crore.

(4) Appeal : Any person not satisfied with the order of District Commission can appeal against it to the State Commission within 45 days from the date of the order in such form and manner may be prescribed.

Question 2.
National Commission.
Answer:
Meaning : A consumer disputes redressal agency at the national level established by the Central Government by notification is known as National Commission. It is also called as National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission.

Composition : The National Commission shall consist of:
(a) President: A person who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court to be appointed by the Central Government as President of National Commission. Such appointment shall be made after consultation with the Chief Justice of India.

(b) Tenure : Every member of the National Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age prescribed whichever is earlier.

Question 3.
State Commission.
Answer:
Meaning : A consumer disputes redressal agency at state level established by each State Government is known as State Commission.

Composition : Each State Commission shall consist of:
(a) President : A person who is or has been a Judge of a High Court, shall be appointed by the State Government as the president of the State Commission in consultation with the Chief Justice of the High Court.

(b) Members : The number of other members shall not be less than 4 or not more than such number of members as may be prescribed in consultation with the Central Government.

(c) Tenure : Every member of the state commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 67 years whichever is earlier.

Question 4.
Lok Adalat.
Answer:
Lok Adalat : Lok Adalat, i.e. People’s Court is established by the government to settle the disputes by compromise. It is the effective and economical system for quick redressal of public complaints and grievances. In this system the aggrieved party can directly approach the Lok Adalat with his complaint. In Lok Adalat, issues are discussed immediately and decisions are taken without delay.

The order passed by the Lok Adalat is given statutory recognition. In public sector, some organisations such as Railways, Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd (MSEDCL). Maharashtra State Road Transport Corporation (MSRTC), Insurance Companies, Banks, etc. regularly hold Lok Adalat to resolve consumer’s problems through compromise.

Question 5.
Janhit Yachika.
Answer:
Public Interest Litigation (Janahit Yachika) : As name indicates it is a legal action initiated in a court of law in regard to a matter of general public interest. Under this, any person can approach a court of law in the interest of the public and ask for justice. It does not involve individual interest but interest of unrepresented groups of the society. After studying and verifying the case, the court gives justice which will benefit the specific group of society or entire society. It can be filed by any party which may not be related to grievance. In some cases Janahit Yachika can be filed in the High Court as well as in Supreme Court directly.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion

Question 1.
Mr. Ashok visited a shop to buy a pair of shoes for Rs 700. The salesman forced him to buy a pair of bigger size shoes of ordinary company by claiming this size would be suitable to him. After reaching home, he discovered that shoes are still too big for him. He complained about the shoes to the shopkeeper. It was denied by the shopkeeper to replace the shoes despite of availability of stock. In above case-
(i) Which right has been violated?
(ii) Comment on the right which has been violated.
(iii) Where can Mr. Ashok file his complaint?
Answer:
(i) In the above case, Right to Choose has been violated.

(ii) In India, the choices are available to consumers to select goods and different services like telecommunications, travel and tourism, banking, electronics, consumer goods, etc. According to right to choose, consumer should be given full liberty j to select an article as per his requirements, liking and purchasing capacity. The seller cannot force or compel the customer to buy specific product or service In this manner monopoly is avoided and j prevented.

(iii) According to the Right to be Heard, Mr. Ashok can lodge complaint to the consumer forum. Mr Ashok can also file online complaint through portal or mobile applications to the trader as well as to the appropriate consumer commission or forum.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 2.
Mrs. Meera a resident of Nagpur District bought a washing machine worth Rs 50,000 without cash memo with a warranty period of 2 years. After 1.5 years she noticed some defect and asked the company to repair or replace it. The company did not accept her complaint despite of the defective product.
In the above case,
(i) Suggest suitable redressal machinery to protect her right.
(ii) If she is not satisfied with the decision given by redressal machinery, where should she appeal?
(iii) What was the negligence of Mrs. Meera while buying the washing machine?
Answer:
(i) According to Right to Redressal, Mrs. Meera should file complaint for fair settlement of claim. This right enables Mrs. Meera to demand repair or replacement or compensation for defective product i.e., in above case washing machine supplied. Three tier quasi-judicial consumer dispute redressal machinery is established for the settlement of claim. Mrs. Meera can file complaint in District Commission established in her district as the value of machinery does not exceed Rs 1 crore.

(ii) If Mrs. Meera is not satisfied with the order or judgement given by District Commission, then she can appeal against such order to State Commission within 45 days from the date of such order, in such form and manner as may be prescribed.

(iii) Mrs. Meera did not collect or ask for cash memo and guarantee/warranty card for a period of 2 years as soon as she purchased the washing machine worth Rs 50,000.

4. Distinguish between

Question 1.
District Commission and State Commission
Answer:

District Commission State Commission
1. Meaning A consumer disputes redressal agency at the district level established by the State Government is known as District Commission. A consumer disputes redressal agency at the state level established by the State Government is known as State Commission.
2. President A person who is or retired or qualified as a judge of a district court is appointed as president of the. District Commission. A person who is or retired as a judge of a High Court is appointed as president of State Commission
3. Membership tenure Every member of District Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65 years whichever is earlier. Every member of State Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 67 years whichever is earlier.
4. Area covered It has jurisdiction over a particular District. It has jurisdiction over a particular State.
5. Monetary jurisdiction It has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods or services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs 1 crore. It has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods or services, including compensation, if any, exceeds Rs 1 crore but does not exceed Rs 10 crore.
6. Appeal Any person not satisfied with the order of District Commission can appeal against such order to the State Commission within 30 days of the order. Any person not satisfied with the order of the State Commission can appeal against such order to the National Commission within 30 days of the order.

Question 2.
State Commission and National Commission
Answer:

State Commission National Commission
1. Meaning A consumer disputes redressal agency at the state level established by each State Government is known as State Commission. A consumer disputes redressal agency at the national level established by the Centred Government is known as National Commission.
2. President A person who is or retired or qualified as a judge of a High Court is appointed as president of State Commission. A person who is or retired as a judge of a Supreme Court is appointed as president of National Commission.
3. Membership Tenure Every member of District Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65 years whichever is earlier. Every member of State Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 67 years whichever is earlier.
4. Area covered It has jurisdiction over a particular State. It has jurisdiction over the entire nation
5. Monetary jurisdiction It has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods or services, including compensation, if any, exceeds Rs 1 crore, but does not exceed Rs 10 crore It has the monetary jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, exceeds Rs 10 crore.
6. Appeal Any person not satisfied with the order of District Forum can appeal against such order to the State Commission within 30 days of the order. Any person not satisfied with the order of the National Commission may appeal against such order to the Supreme Court within a period of 30 days from the date of the order.

Question 3.
District Commission and National Commission
Answer:

District Commission National Commission
1. Meaning A consumer disputes redressal agency at the district level established by the State Government is known as District Commission. A consumer disputes redressal agency at the national level established by Central Government is known as National Commission.
2. Nature of complaint It can entertain only original cases which are within the local limits of district. It can entertain original cases as well as appeals against the order of State Commission which are within the geographical limits of the entire nation.
3. Membership Tenure Every member of District Forum shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65 years whichever is earlier Every member of National Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age prescribed whichever is earlier.
4. Area covered It has jurisdiction over a particular district. It has jurisdiction over the entire nation.
5. Monetary jurisdiction It has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs 1 crore. It has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, exceeds Rs 10 crore.
6. Appeal Any person not satisfied with the order of District Commission can appeal against such order to the State Commission within 30 days of the order. Any person not satisfied with the order of National Commission can appeal against such order to the Supreme Court within a period of 30 days from the date of the order.

5. Answer in brief

Question 1.
Explain any four needs of consumer protection.
Answer:
The need of consumer protection is explained as follows:
(1) Need of participation of consumers : It is noticed that most of the organisations or manufacturing companies take certain decisions which directly or indirectly affect the consumers’ interest without consulting them or their organisations. This leads to consumer exploitation. Only a Strong consumers’ organisation can force business organisations to allow consumers to participate in the decision-making process.

(2) Lack of information : Today consumers live in a dynamic and complex world. Due to vast distance between manufacturer and consumer, it is very difficult to establish direct contact between them. Now market is fully flooded with domestic as well as foreign products due to globalisation and liberalisation. However, it is very difficult for the consumer to get correct and reliable information about the products before they are purchased. He has to rely on trial and error method or on advertisements. In both the cases chances of consumer exploitation cannot be denied.

(3) Ignorance : One of the important causes of consumer exploitation is ignorance of consumers. In India, consumers are mostly ignorant about their rights, market conditions, price levels, product details, etc. Many a time consumers are not aware that they are being cheated by the sellers. An appropriate system is required to protect consumers from business malpractices.

(4) Unorganised consumers : The consumers are widespread and unorganised. Moreover, they are not united. Hence, they are easily exploited by the producers and sellers. Sellers are in better position as compared to unorganised consumers. An individual consumer cannot fight against the powerful manufacturers or sellers.

Question 2.
State any four rights of the consumer.
Answer:
The rights of consumers are explained as follows:
(1) Right to Safety : The right to safety means the right to be protected against products, production processes and services which are hazardous to consumer’s lives or health and property. It includes consumer’s long term interest and immediate requirements. This right demands that consumer must get full safety and protection to his/her life and health in relation to medicines, food, electrical appliances, etc. AGMARK, ISI – Indian Standard Institute, BIS – Bureau of Indian standards, Hallmark, etc. are the safety standards prescribed by the Government of India (GOI).

(2) Right to Information : The consumer has a right to get correct and adequate information of all aspects of goods and services like price, name of manufacturer, contents used, batch number, date of manufacture and expiry date, use manual and safety instructions, etc. This information helps the consumers to make right choice of goods and services. This right is applicable to medicines, food products, spare parts and other consumer products or services.

(3) Right to Choose : According to this right, the consumer has full freedom to select or choose the product or service as per his/her liking, requirement and purchasing capacity. The seller cannot force a consumer to purchase a particular product. This right aims at removing monopoly. The choices available to consumers in India include goods and different services such as telecommunications, travel and tourism, banking, electronics, Fast Moving Consumer Goods (FMCG) etc.

(4) Right to Be Heard : It is the responsibility of every business organisation to listen and solve difficulties, complaints and grievances of the consumers. This right gives an opportunity to the consumers to express and voice their complaints to the consumer forum. The consumers also have rights to give suggestions to the manufacturer as well as to the trader on the quality, quantity, price, packaging, etc. of the products they use. Nowadays consumers can file online complaints through portal or mobile applications.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 3.
Explain any four responsibilities of the consumer.
Answer:
The responsibilities of the consumer are explained as follows:
(1) Consumer should use his rights : The consumers have many rights in respect to the goods and services they purchase. They must be aware of their rights while buying the products. They can use their rights if they are misled by advertisement or get faulty or defective articles.

(2) Cautious consumer : The consumers should be alert while dealing with the trader. They should be aware of their responsibilities while buying goods and services. Before buying any product or service, the consumer should make detail enquiry about the quality, quantity available, price, date of manufacture, expiry date, utility of goods and services, etc.

(3) Filing of complaint : If consumer has complaint about the products or services he has purchased, he should immediately approach the officer concerned and lodge complaints about the products or services. A delay in making complaints loses the rights and results in expiry of guarantee or warranty. If consumers ignore the dishonest acts of the traders, it may indirectly amount to encouragement to unethical business practices.

(4) Quality conscious : It is the responsibility of the consumers to buy quality goods. They should never compromise on the quality of goods. They should never buy inferior goods out of greed at lesser prices. For such behaviour of consumers, there is no protection. It is the responsibility of the consumer to ensure about the quality symbols like, ISI, AGMARK, Hallmark, Fruit Products Order (FPO), Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), etc. These are indicative of the good quality of the goods.

Question 4.
State the role of NGO in consumer protection.
Answer:
The role of Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) in consumer protection is explained as follows:
(1) NGOs organise campaigns and various programmes on consumer issues to create social awareness.

(2) They initiate and organise training i programmes for the consumers and make them : aware and conscious of their rights and various modes of redressal of their grievances.

(3) They publish journals and periodicals at regular interval to make the consumers understand and keep them informed about various consumer ) related developments.

(4) They provide legal advice free of charge to the members on the matters of consumer interest and help them to put up grievances before appropriate authority.

(5) NGO’s active members interact (communicate) with the businessmen and Chambers of Commerce and Industry for ensuring better deal for the consumers.

6. Justify the following statements

Question 1.
The Consumer Protection Act was passed in the interest of consumers.
Answer:
(1) The Consumer Protection Act came into force from 1986. Thereafter the Ministry of Law and Justice proposed new act in 2019. The Act has for the first time recognised six rights of the consumer:

  • the right to be protected against marketing of hazardous goods
  • the right to be informed about the price and features of goods
  • the right to make a choice out of a variety of goods
  • the right to make a complaint against unsatisfactory goods
  • the right to seek redressal against unfair trade practices
  • the right to consumer education. All the above rights are in the interest of the consumer and not the seller.

(2) The Act has made provision for the establishment of Consumer Protection Councils at the central and state levels for promoting and protecting these rights.

(3) The Act has created a quasi-judicial machinery consisting of the District Commission, State Commission and National Commission to entertain complaints and to give fair justice to the aggrieved consumers. The Act prescribes punishment of imprisonment not less than one month which may extend to 3 years and a fine which shall not be less than ? 25,000 which may extend to Rs 1 lakh or with both for guilty person.

(4) The strict enforcement of these rights creates a competition among the sellers. Consequently, the consumers get quality goods at fair prices. The government has also adopted various measures for creating public awareness about the rights of consumers. Various programmes are shown on television channels as well as programmes are broadcasted by All India to educate consumers.

Question 2.
Consumers have many responsibilities.
Answer:
The responsibilities of the consumer are explained as follows:
(1) Consumer should use his rights : The consumers have many rights in respect to the goods and services they purchase. They must be aware of their rights while buying the products. They can use their rights if they are misled by advertisement or get faulty or defective articles.

(2) Cautious consumer : The consumers should be alert while dealing with the trader. They should be aware of their responsibilities while buying goods and services. Before buying any product or service, the consumer should make detail enquiry about the quality, quantity available, price, date of manufacture, expiry date, utility of goods and services, etc.

(3) Filing of complaint : If consumer has complaint about the products or services he has purchased, he should immediately approach the officer concerned and lodge complaints about the products or services. A delay in making complaints loses the rights and results in expiry of guarantee or warranty. If consumers ignore the dishonest acts of the traders, it may indirectly amount to encouragement to unethical business practices.

(4) Quality conscious : It is the responsibility of the consumers to buy quality goods. They should never compromise on the quality of goods. They should never buy inferior goods out of greed at lesser prices. For such behaviour of consumers, there is no protection. It is the responsibility of the consumer to ensure about the quality symbols like, ISI, AGMARK, Hallmark, Fruit Products Order (FPO), Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), etc. These are indicative of the good quality of the goods.

(5) Beware from exaggerated advertisement: The sellers always provide various information of the products or services through advertisements to buyers. Many a time they exaggerate the facts in their advertisements. It is the responsibility of the consumers to find out or identify the truth of advertisement and then buy the products, or services.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 3.
Aim of consumer organization is to protect the rights of the consumers.
Answer:
The role of Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) in consumer protection is explained as follows:
(1) NGOs organise campaigns and various programmes on consumer issues to create social awareness.

(2) They initiate and organise training i programmes for the consumers and make them : aware and conscious of their rights and various modes of redressal of their grievances.

(3) They publish journals and periodicals at regular interval to make the consumers understand and keep them informed about various consumer ) related developments.

(4) They provide legal advice free of charge to the members on the matters of consumer interest and help them to put up grievances before appropriate authority.

(5) NGO’s active members interact (communicate) with the businessmen and Chambers of Commerce and Industry for ensuring better deal for the consumers.

(6) They file Public Interest Litigation (Janhit Yachika) on important consumer issues like ban on a product or medicine injurious to public health. They also file cases in the court of law to safeguard the rights and protect the interest of general public.

(7) Few examples of NGOs working for the consumers are : Consumer Guidance Society of India (CGSI), Voluntary Organisation in Interest of Consumer Education (VOICE), Consumer Education and Research Centre (CERC), Consumers Association of India (CAI), Mumbai Grahak Panchayat (MGP), Grahak Shakti (GS), etc.

7. Attempt the following

Question 1.
State rights of the consumer.
Answer:
The rights of consumers are explained as follows:
(1) Right to Safety : The right to safety means the right to be protected against products, production processes and services which are hazardous to consumer’s lives or health and property. It includes consumer’s long term interest and immediate requirements. This right demands that consumer must get full safety and protection to his/her life and health in relation to medicines, food, electrical appliances, etc. AGMARK, ISI – Indian Standard Institute, BIS – Bureau of Indian standards, Hallmark, etc. are the safety standards prescribed by the Government of India (GOI).

(2) Right to Information : The consumer has a right to get correct and adequate information of all aspects of goods and services like price, name of manufacturer, contents used, batch number, date of manufacture and expiry date, use manual and safety instructions, etc. This information helps the consumers to make right choice of goods and services. This right is applicable to medicines, food products, spare parts and other consumer products or services.

(3) Right to Choose : According to this right, the consumer has full freedom to select or choose the product or service as per his/her liking, requirement and purchasing capacity. The seller cannot force a consumer to purchase a particular product. This right aims at removing monopoly. The choices available to consumers in India include goods and different services such as telecommunications, travel and tourism, banking, electronics, Fast Moving Consumer Goods (FMCG) etc.

(4) Right to Be Heard : It is the responsibility of every business organisation to listen and solve difficulties, complaints and grievances of the consumers. This right gives an opportunity to the consumers to express and voice their complaints to the consumer forum. The consumers also have rights to give suggestions to the manufacturer as well as to the trader on the quality, quantity, price, packaging, etc. of the products they use. Nowadays consumers can file online complaints through portal or mobile applications.

(5) Right to Consumer Education : The consumers have right to know about consumer rights and solutions to their problems. This is to create awareness among the consumers to make rational choice of goods and services and to protect themselves from the exploitation of unscrupulous (dishonest) businessmen. In this regard, the government, media and various Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) can play an important role to create awareness among the consumers and to educate them, e.g. Jago Grahak Jago campaign.

(6) Right to Represent : The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 gave an opportunity to individual consumer as well as to consumer groups to be represented by a person who is not professional advocate for consumer’s interest or complaint before consumer forum. This provision made in the Act in recognition of consumers’ right to represent.

Question 2.
State responsibilities of the consumer.
Answer:
The responsibilities of the consumer are explained as follows:
(1) Consumer should use his rights : The consumers have many rights in respect to the goods and services they purchase. They must be aware of their rights while buying the products. They can use their rights if they are misled by advertisement or get faulty or defective articles.

(2) Cautious consumer : The consumers should be alert while dealing with the trader. They should be aware of their responsibilities while buying goods and services. Before buying any product or service, the consumer should make detail enquiry about the quality, quantity available, price, date of manufacture, expiry date, utility of goods and services, etc.

(3) Filing of complaint : If consumer has complaint about the products or services he has purchased, he should immediately approach the officer concerned and lodge complaints about the products or services. A delay in making complaints loses the rights and results in expiry of guarantee or warranty. If consumers ignore the dishonest acts of the traders, it may indirectly amount to encouragement to unethical business practices.

(4) Quality conscious : It is the responsibility of the consumers to buy quality goods. They should never compromise on the quality of goods. They should never buy inferior goods out of greed at lesser prices. For such behaviour of consumers, there is no protection. It is the responsibility of the consumer to ensure about the quality symbols like, ISI, AGMARK, Hallmark, Fruit Products Order (FPO), Food Safety and Standards Authority of India (FSSAI), etc. These are indicative of the good quality of the goods.

(5) Beware from exaggerated advertisement: The sellers always provide various information of the products or services through advertisements to buyers. Many a time they exaggerate the facts in their advertisements. It is the responsibility of the consumers to find out or identify the truth of advertisement and then buy the products, or services.

(6) Demand of Invoice and Guarantee, Warranty Card : After purchasing the products, the consumer should ask for cash memo, guarantee or warranty card. The consumer should read and understand the contents of guarantee or warranty card. He should preserve the cash memo and guarantee or warranty card. If the products purchased are of inferior quality or become defective these cards are useful to settle the disputes and claim compensation or replacement of articles.

(7) Pre-planned buying : It is the responsibility of the consumer to make proper planning before buying any product. He should make an estimate of products they want to buy and quantity required, money to spend, etc. He should also decide in advance from which place to buy the products. He should not buy any product in a hurry or without thought.

(8) Organised efforts : The consumer is expected to shoulder the responsibility to promote and protect the interests of his own and other consumers. He should join the group or organisation which is working for the welfare of consumers. It is the responsibility of every consumer to unite for the welfare of all the consumers.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 3.
State the need of consumer protection.
Answer:
The need of consumer protection is explained as follows:
(1) Need of participation of consumers : It is noticed that most of the organisations or manufacturing companies take certain decisions which directly or indirectly affect the consumers’ interest without consulting them or their organisations. This leads to consumer exploitation. Only a Strong consumers’ organisation can force business organisations to allow consumers to participate in the decision-making process.

(2) Lack of information : Today consumers live in a dynamic and complex world. Due to vast distance between manufacturer and consumer, it is very difficult to establish direct contact between them. Now market is fully flooded with domestic as well as foreign products due to globalisation and liberalisation. However, it is very difficult for the consumer to get correct and reliable information about the products before they are purchased. He has to rely on trial and error method or on advertisements. In both the cases chances of consumer exploitation cannot be denied.

(3) Ignorance : One of the important causes of consumer exploitation is ignorance of consumers. In India, consumers are mostly ignorant about their rights, market conditions, price levels, product details, etc. Many a time consumers are not aware that they are being cheated by the sellers. An appropriate system is required to protect consumers from business malpractices.

(4) Unorganised consumers : The consumers are widespread and unorganised. Moreover, they are not united. Hence, they are easily exploited by the producers and sellers. Sellers are in better position as compared to unorganised consumers. An individual consumer cannot fight against the powerful manufacturers or sellers.

(5) Spurious Goods : The consumers also face a major problem of duplicate goods. Some traders cheat the consumers by supplying them duplicate or defective goods of the popular brands. It is not possible for the consumers to find difference between genuine and duplicate product. It is therefore necessary to protect the consumers from such exploitation by fixing prescribed norms of quality and safety standards.

(6) Misleading advertising : Sometimes the advertisements of goods and services shown on television, in newspapers and magazines are misleading. They make tall claims about the benefits of the products but do not disclose the drawbacks. Most of the consumers are misled by the misleading advertisement and do not know the real and true quality of advertised products. Appropriate system or mechanism is required to prevent misleading advertisements.

(7) Malpractices of Businessmen : Many businessmen adopt fraudulent, unethical and monopolistic trade practices to earn more money. This leads to exploitation of consumers. Some times consumers get defective, inferior and substandard goods and services. Appropriate measures are necessary to protect the consumers against such malpractices.

(8) Trusteeship : The Gandhian philosophy states that businessmen are the trustees of the society’s wealth. So they should not misuse the society’s wealth for their own benefits. They should use the wealth of the society for the benefit of the people.

Question 4.
State the role of NGOs and consumer protection.
Answer:
The role of Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) in consumer protection is explained as follows:
(1) NGOs organise campaigns and various programmes on consumer issues to create social awareness.

(2) They initiate and organise training i programmes for the consumers and make them : aware and conscious of their rights and various modes of redressal of their grievances.

(3) They publish journals and periodicals at regular interval to make the consumers understand and keep them informed about various consumer ) related developments.

(4) They provide legal advice free of charge to the members on the matters of consumer interest and help them to put up grievances before appropriate authority.

(5) NGO’s active members interact (communicate) with the businessmen and Chambers of Commerce and Industry for ensuring better deal for the consumers.

(6) They file Public Interest Litigation (Janhit Yachika) on important consumer issues like ban on a product or medicine injurious to public health. They also file cases in the court of law to safeguard the rights and protect the interest of general public.

(7) Few examples of NGOs working for the consumers are : Consumer Guidance Society of India (CGSI), Voluntary Organisation in Interest of Consumer Education (VOICE), Consumer Education and Research Centre (CERC), Consumers Association of India (CAI), Mumbai Grahak Panchayat (MGP), Grahak Shakti (GS), etc.

Question 5.
State the composition and monetary jurisdiction of district commission.
Answer:
Composition : Each District Commission shall consist of-

  • President : A person who is or has been a .judge of a district court is appointed as president
    of the District Commission.
  • Members : The number of other members shall not be less than 2 and not more than such number of members as may be prescribed in consultation with the Central Government.
  • Tenure : President and every member of the District Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65 years whichever is earlier.

Monetary jurisdiction : District Commission has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs 1 crore.

Question 6.
State the composition and monetary jurisdiction of state commission.
Answer:
(2) Composition : Each State Commission shall consist of:

  • President : A person who is or has been a Judge of a High Court, shall be appointed by the State Government as the president of the State Commission in consultation with the Chief Justice of the High Court.
  • Members : The number of other members shall not be less than 4 or not more than such number of members as may be prescribed in consultation with the Central Government.
  • Tenure : Every member of the state commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 67 years whichever is earlier.

Monetary Jurisdiction : To entertain complaints where the value of the goods or services and compensation exceeds Rs 1 crore but is not more than Rs 10 crore.

Question 7.
State the composition and monetary jurisdiction of national commission.
Answer:
Composition : The National Commission shall consist of:
(a) President: A person who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court to be appointed by the Central Government as President of National Commission. Such appointment shall be made after consultation with the Chief Justice of India.
(b) Tenure : Every member of the National Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age prescribed whichever is earlier.

Monetary Jurisdiction : To entertain the complaints where the value of the goods or services and compensation exceeds Rs 10 crore.

8. Answer the following

Question 1.
Who is Consumer? Explain the rights of the consumers.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : The word ‘consumer’ is derived from the Latin word ‘consumere’ which means ‘to eat or drink’. Accordingly consumer is one who consumes or uses any product or service available to him either from nature or through market. In other words, a consumer means any person who buys any product, hires any service or services for certain consideration in exchange of money which has been paid or promised to be paid in future for consumption or use and not for resale. For instance, if a businessman purchases furniture for selling it to the buyers, he is not a consumer. But if he buys a sofa set for his own use in his house, he becomes a consumer. We are all consumers when we use or consume foodgrains or use services like railways, hospitals, banks, etc.

[B] Rights of the Consumers : The rights of the consumers are shown:
Consumer Rights:

  1. Right to Safety
  2. Right to Information
  3. Right to Choose
  4. Right to be Heard
  5. Right to Consumers Education
  6. Right to Represent
  7. Right to Redress
  8. Right to Healthy
  9. Environment
  10. Right to Protect from Unfair Business Practices
  11. Right against Spurious Goods

The rights of consumers are explained as follows:
1. Right to Safety : The right to safety means the right to be protected against products, production processes and services which are hazardous to consumer’s lives or health and property. It includes consumer’s long term interest and immediate requirements. This right demands that consumer must get full safety and protection to his/her life and health in relation to medicines, food, electrical appliances, etc. AGMARK, ISI – Indian Standard Institute, BIS – Bureau of Indian standards, Hallmark, etc. are the safety standards prescribed by the Government of India (GOI).

2. Right to Information : The consumer has a right to get correct and adequate information of all aspects of goods and services like price, name of manufacturer, contents used, batch number, date of manufacture and expiry date, use manual and safety instructions, etc. This information helps the consumers to make right choice of goods and services. This right is applicable to medicines, food products, spare parts and other consumer products or services.

3. Right to Choose : According to this right, the consumer has full freedom to select or choose the product or service as per his/her liking, requirement and purchasing capacity. The seller cannot force a consumer to purchase a particular product. This right aims at removing monopoly. The choices available to consumers in India include goods and different services such as telecommunications, travel and tourism, banking, electronics, Fast Moving Consumer Goods (FMCG) etc.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

4. Right to Be Heard : It is the responsibility of every business organisation to listen and solve difficulties, complaints and grievances of the consumers. This right gives an opportunity to the consumers to express and voice their complaints to the consumer forum. The consumers also have rights to give suggestions to the manufacturer as well as to the trader on the quality, quantity, price, packaging, etc. of the products they use. Nowadays consumers can file online complaints through portal or mobile applications.

5. Right to Consumer Education : The consumers have right to know about consumer rights and solutions to their problems. This is to create awareness among the consumers to make rational choice of goods and services and to protect themselves from the exploitation of unscrupulous (dishonest) businessmen. In this regard, the government, media and various Non-Government Organisations (NGOs) can play an important role to create awareness among the consumers and to educate them, e.g. Jago Grahak Jago campaign.

6. Right to Represent : The Consumer Protection Act, 2019 gave an opportunity to individual consumer as well as to consumer groups to be represented by a person who is not professional advocate for consumer’s interest or complaint before consumer forum. This provision made in the Act in recognition of consumers’ right to represent.

7. Right to Redress : Right to redress implies fair settlement, just and reasonable claims of the consumers. In other words, consumer has the right to receive a fair amount of compensation or get the articles replaced or repaired free of cost for defective products and for poor services received from the manufacturer or trader. It is done through the Consumer Protection Act, 1986 under which District Commission, State Commission and National Commission are established. Thus, consumers are protected from cheating and malpractices.

8. Right to Healthy Environment: A consumer has a right to have a clean and healthy physical environment which is badly affected by pollution of noise, air and water. This is the direct effect of speedy industrialisation. Certain industries like chemicals, fertilisers, etc., add considerably to the pollution. As per this right, consumer can demand actions against such business organi¬sations. Businessmen and companies must take suitable measures to control pollution. All consumers have right to clean and healthy environment in present as well as in the future.

9. Right to Protect against Unfair Business Practices : This right protects the consumers against any kind of unfair business practices. The consumers have right to reuse the voice against the unfair business practices adopted by any trader e.g. using false measurement (weights), hoarding or stocking products to create artificial scarcity, black marketing, profiteering, adulteration, charging exorbitant high prices, selling goods after their expiry dates, etc.

10. Right against Spurious Goods : This right is against the marketing of goods which are health hazards, spurious (false or not genuine) and pose a danger to life itself. This right protects public health and life.

Question 2.
Explain the ways and means of Consumer Protection.
Answer:
The ways and means of consumer protection are stated as follows:

  1. Lok Adalat (People’s Court)
  2. Public Interest Litigation (Janhit Yachika)
  3. Redresssl Forums
  4. Awareness Programmes
  5. Consumer Organisations
  6. Consumer Welfare Fund
  7. Legislative Measures

1. Lok Adalat : Lok Adalat, i.e. People’s Court is established by the government to settle the disputes by compromise. It is the effective and economical system for quick redressal of public complaints and grievances. In this system the aggrieved party can directly approach the Lok Adalat with his complaint. In Lok Adalat, issues are discussed immediately and decisions are taken without delay. The order passed by the Lok Adalat is given statutory recognition. In public sector, some organisations such as Railways, Maharashtra State Electricity Distribution Co. Ltd (MSEDCL). Maharashtra State Road Transport Corporation (MSRTC), Insurance Companies, Banks, etc. regularly hold Lok Adalat to resolve consumer’s problems through compromise.

2. Public Interest Litigation (Janahit Yachika) : As name indicates it is a legal action initiated in a court of law in regard to a matter of general public interest. Under this, any person can approach a court of law in the interest of the public and ask for justice. It does not involve individual interest but interest of unrepresented groups of the society. After studying and verifying the case, the court gives justice which will benefit the specific group of society or entire society. It can be filed by any party which may not be related to grievance. In some cases Janahit Yachika can be filed in the High Court as well as in Supreme Court directly.

3. Redressal Forums : Under the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, Consumer Dispute Redressal agencies have been established by the Government to protect the rights of consumers and to offer speedy and inexpensive redressal for their complaints. These agencies are District Commission at district level. State Commission at state level and National Commission at national level. Any aggrieved consumer or association of consumers can file a complaint with respective commission depending on the value of goods and amount of claim for compensation.

4. Awareness Programmes : The Government of India has initiated various publicity measures such as use of journals, brochures, booklets and various posters depicting the rights and responsibilities of consumers redressal machineries, i.e. consumer courts, observation of International (World) Consumer Rights Day on 15th March and National Consumer Day on 24th December every year to create awareness among the consumers about their rights and responsi¬bilities. Various consumer related programmes are also telecast on various TV channels and broadcasted on radio, FM channels and social media to create awareness among the consumers.

5. Consumer Organisations : Many consumer organisations such as Consumer Guidance Society of India, Grahak Panchayat, Grahak Shakti, Consumers’ Association, etc., are active throughout India to fight for consumers’ rights through protest, campaigning, lobbying, etc. Consumer movement is also well active in India and helps individuals to get quick and adequate compensation and justice for their grievances. It is also necessary to strengthen consumer movement throughout India.

6. Consumer Welfare Fund (CWF) : This fund is created by the Department of Consumer Affairs for providing financial help to voluntary consumer movement specially in rural areas. This financial assistance is used for training and research in consumer education, complaint handling, counselling and guidance mechanism, product testing labs, etc.

7. Legislative Measures : The Government of India has passed several acts such as Sale of Goods Act, 1930; Essential Commodities Act, 1955; the Standards of Weights and Measures Act, 1956; Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1969; Food Safety and Standards Act, 2006; National Food Security Act, 2013, etc. to protect the interest of consumers from unethical practices of businessmen.

However, these laws could not protect the consumers as such and therefore the Government of India has passed a powerful Act known as Consumer Protection Act, 2019 to protect the interest of consumers.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

Question 3.
Explain the three tier quasi-judicial machinery under the Act.
Answer:
The Consumer Protection Act, 2019
provides for three-tier quasi-judicial machinery as follows:

  1. District Commission
  2. State Commission
  3. National Commission

1. District Commission :
A. Meaning : A consumer redressal agency established by the State Government in each district to give relief or settle the disputes of consumers who complain against manufacturers or traders, is called District Commission.

B. Composition : Each District Commission shall consist of-

  • President : A person who is or has been a .judge of a district court is appointed as president
    of the District Commission.
  • Members : The number of other members shall not be less than 2 and not more than such number of members as may be prescribed in consultation with the Central Government.
  • Tenure : President and every member of the District Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 65 years whichever is earlier.

C. Qualifications : The members of a District Commission shall have the following qualifications :

  • Age : The age of each member should not be less than 35 years.
  • Education : They should possess a Bachelor’s Degree from a recognised University.
  • Experience : Members should have adequate knowledge and experience of at least 10 years in dealing with problems related to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industries, public affairs or administration.

D. Territorial Jurisdiction : District Commission can exercise its jurisdiction within the limits of its district.

E. Monetary jurisdiction : District Commission has the jurisdiction to entertain complaints where the value of goods and services, including compensation, if any, does not exceed Rs 1 crore.

F. Appeal : Any person not satisfied with the order of District Commission can appeal against it to the State Commission within 45 days from the date of the order in such form and manner may be prescribed.

2. State Commission:
A. Meaning : A consumer disputes redressal agency at state level established by each State Government is known as State Commission.

B. Composition : Each State Commission shall consist of:

  • President : A person who is or has been a Judge of a High Court, shall be appointed by the State Government as the president of the State Commission in consultation with the Chief Justice of the High Court.
  • Members : The number of other members shall not be less than 4 or not more than such number of members as may be prescribed in consultation with the Central Government.
  • Tenure : Every member of the state commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age of 67 years whichever is earlier.

C. Qualifications : The members shall have the following qualifications:

  • Age : The age of each member should not be less than 35 years.
  • Education : They should possess a Bachelor’s Degree from a recognised University.
  • Experience : Members should have adequate knowledge and experience of at least 10 years in dealing with problems related to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industries, public affairs or administration.

D. Territorial Jurisdiction : The State Commission entertains original cases as well as appeals against the order of District Commission within the geographical limits of the state.

E. Monetary Jurisdiction : To entertain complaints where the value of the goods or services and compensation exceeds Rs 1 crore but is not more than Rs 10 crore.

(6) Appeal : Any person aggrieved by an order passed by the State Commission may make an appeal against such order to the National Commission within a period of 30 days from the date of the order in such form and manner as may be prescribed.

3. National Commission
A. Meaning : A consumer disputes redressal agency at the national level established by the Central Government by notification is known as National Commission. It is also called as National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission.

B. Composition : The National Commission shall consist of:

  • President: A person who is or has been a Judge of the Supreme Court to be appointed by the Central Government as President of National Commission. Such appointment shall be made after consultation with the Chief Justice of India.
  • Tenure : Every member of the National Commission shall hold office for a term of 5 years or up to the age prescribed whichever is earlier.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 7 Consumer Protection

C. Qualifications : The members shall have the following qualifications :

  • Age : The age of each member should not be less than 35 years.
  • Education : They should possess a Bachelor’s Degree from a recognised University.
  • Experience : The members should have adequate knowledge and experience of at least 10 years in dealing with problems related to economics, law, commerce, accountancy, industries, public affairs or administration.

D. Territorial Jurisdiction : National Commission entertains original cases as well as appeals against the order passed by the State Commission which are within the geographical limits of the state.

E. Monetary Jurisdiction : To entertain the complaints where the value of the goods or services and compensation exceeds Rs 10 crore.

F. Appeal : Any person who does not agree with the order of the National Commission can appeal to the Supreme Court within 30 days from the date of such order.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 1.
Name the various theories of the nature of light.
Answer:
The various theories of the nature of light from the 17th century to the modern times are

  1. Descartes’ corpuscular theory of light (1637)
  2. Newton’s corpuscular theory (1666)
  3. Huygens’ wave theory of light propagation (1678), modified, verified and put on a firm mathematical base by Young, Fraunhofer, Fresnel and Kirchhoff (in the 1800s)
  4. Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory (1865)
  5. the light quantum, i.e., the photon model of the modern quantum theory by Planck (1900) and Einstein (1905).

Question 2.
State the postulates of Newton’s corpuscular theory of light.
Answer:
Sir Isaac Newton developed the corpuscular theory of light proposed by Rene’ Descartes (1596-1650), French philosopher and mathematician. The theory assumed that light consists of a stream of corpuscles emitted by a luminous source.
Postulates of Newton’s corpuscular theory of light:

  1. Light corpuscles are minute, light and perfectly elastic particles.
  2. A luminous source emits light corpuscles in all directions which then travel at high speed in straight lines in a given medium.
  3. The constituent colours of white light are due to different sizes of the corpuscles.
  4. The light corpuscles stimulate the sense of sight on their impact on the retina of the eye.
  5. A reflective surface exerts a force of repulsion normal to the surface on the light corpuscles when they strike the surface.
  6. A transparent medium exerts a force of attraction normal to the surface on the light corpuscles striking the surface. This force is different for different mediums.

Notes :

  1. A consequence of the assumption (6) is that, according to the corpuscular theory, the speed of light in a denser medium is greater than that in air and has different values for different mediums.
  2. It was known from earliest recorded times that when light is incident on the surface of glass or water, it is partly reflected and partly transmitted, simultaneously. To explain this, Newton postulated that the corpuscles must have fits of easy reflection and fits of easy transmission and must pass periodically from one state to the other.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 3.
State the drawbacks of Newton’s corpuscular theory of light.
Answer:
Drawbacks of Newton’s corpuscular theory of light:

  1. The theory predicted that the speed of light in a
    denser medium should be greater than that in air. This was disproved when experiment showed that the speed of light in water is less than that in air (carried out in 1850 by French physicist Jean Bernard Leon Foucault). ,
  2. The theory could not satisfactorily explain the phenomenon of polarization and the simultaneousness of reflection and refraction.
  3. The corpuscular theory failed to explain the phenomena of diffraction and interference.
  4. There was no basis for the hypothesis that the constituent colours of white light are due to different sized corpuscles.

Question 4.
What is a ray of light?
Answer:
A ray of light is the path along which light energy is transmitted from one point to another in an optical system.

Question 5.
What is meant by ray optics or geometrical optics?
Answer:
The formation of

  1. shadows, and
  2. images by mirrors and lenses can be explained by assuming that light propagates in a straight line in terms of rays. The study of optical phenomena under this assumption is called ray optics. It is also called geometrical optics as geometry is used in this study.

Question 6.
Give a brief account of Huygens’ wave theory of light. State its merits and demerits.
Answer:
Huygens’ wave theory of light [Christiaan Huygens (1629-95), Dutch physicist] :

  1. Light emitted by a source propagates in the form of waves. Huygens’ original theory assumed them to be longitudinal waves.
  2. In a homogeneous isotropic medium, light from a point source spreads by spherical waves.
  3. It was presumed that a wave motion needed a medium for its propagation. Hence, the theory postulated a medium called luminiferous ether that exists everywhere, in vacuum as well as in transparent bodies. Ether had to be assigned some extraordinary properties, a high modulus of elasticity (to account for the high speed of light), zero density (so that it offers no resistance to planetary motion) and perfect transparency.
  4. The different colours of light are due to different wavelengths.

Merits :

  1. Huygens’ wave theory satisfactorily explains reflection and refraction as well as their simultaneity.
  2. In explaining refraction, the theory concludes that the speed of light in a denser medium is less than that in a rarer medium, in agreement with experimental findings.
  3. The theory was later used by Young in 1800-04, Fraunhofer and Fresnel in 1814 to satisfactorily explain interference, diffraction and rectilinear propagation of light. The phenomenon of polarization could also be explained considering the light waves to be transverse.

Demerits :

  1. It was found much later that the hypothetical medium, luminiferous ether, has no experimental basis. Einstein discarded the idea of ether completely in 1905.
  2. Phenomena like absorption and emission of light, photoelectric effect and Compton effect, cannot be explained on the basis of the wave theory.

[Note: To decide between the particle and wave theories of light, Dominique Francois Jean Arago (1786-1853), French physicist, suggested the measurement of the speed of light in air and water. The experiment was performed in 1850 by Leon Foucault (1819-68), French physicist, using Arago’s experimental equipment. He found that the speed of light in water is less than that in air.]

Question 7.
What is meant by wave optics?
Answer:
It is not possible to explain certain phenomena of light, such as interference, diffraction and polarization, with the help of ray optics (geometrical optics). The branch of optics which uses wave nature of light to explain these optical phenomena is called wave optics.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 8.
What was Maxwell’s concept of light?
Answer:
In 1865, James Clerk Maxwell developed a mathematical theory on the intimate relationship between electricity and magnetism. His theory predicted light to be a high-frequency transverse electromagnetic wave in ether. Electric and magnetic fields in the wave vary periodically in space and time at right angles to each other and to the direction of propagation of the wave.

The speed of the electromagnetic waves in a medium, as calculated on the basis of Maxwell’s theory, was experimentally found to be equal to the measured speed of light in that medium. Maxwell’s electromagnetic theory of light, with addition by others till 1896, could account for all the known phenomena regarding the propagation (or transmission) of light through space and through matter.

Question 9.
What is the photon model or quantum hypothesis of light ?
Answer:
To explain the interaction of light and matter (as in the emission or absorption of radiation), Max Planck, in 1900, and Einstein, in 1905, hypothesized light as concentrated or localized packets of energy. Such an energy packet is called a quantum of energy, which was given the name photon much later, in 1926, by Frithiof Wolfers and Gilbert Newton Lewis. For a radiation of frequency v, a quantum of energy is hv, where h is a universal constant, now called Planck’s constant.

[Note : ‘Localisation’ of energy in a region gives light its particle nature while frequency is a wave characteristic. The complementary properties of particle and wave of light quanta are reconciled as follows : light propagates as wave but interacts with matter as particle.]

Question 10.
Give a brief account of the wave nature of light.
Answer:

  1. Light is a transverse, electromagnetic wave.
  2. A light wave consists of oscillating electric and magnetic fields that are perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave.
  3. Like all other electromagnetic waves, light waves do not require any material medium as they can travel even through vacuum.
  4. In a material medium, the speed of light depends on the refractive index of the medium, which, in turn depends on the permeability and permittivity of the medium.

Question 11.
Define absolute refractive index of a medium.
Answer:
The absolute refractive index of a medium is defined as the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum to the speed of light in the medium.
[Note : Absolute refractive index of a medium (n) =
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 1
The absolute refractive index of vacuum is 1 (by definition) and that of air is greater than 1, but very nearly equal to 1.]

Question 12.
State the characteristics of the electromagnetic waves.
Answer:

  1. The electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature as they propagate by oscillating electric and magnetic fields that are perpendicular to each other and also perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the wave.
  2. These waves do not require any material medium for their propagation, i.e., they can travel even through vacuum.
  3. The wavelength of the electromagnetic waves ranges from very small (< 1 fm) to very large (> 1 km). The waves are classified in the order of increasing wavelength as γ-rays, X rays, ultraviolet, visible, infrared, microwave and radio waves.
  4. In vacuum, the speed of electromagnetic waves does not depend on the frequency of the wave. But, in a material medium, it depends on the frequency. For a given frequency, the speed is different in different mediums.
    [Note : 1 fm (femtometre) = 10-15 m]

Question 13.
Define and explain :
(a) a wave normal
(b) a ray of light.
Answer:
(a) Wavenormal: A wave normal at a point on a wavefront is defined as a line drawn perpendicular to the wavefront in the direction of propagation of the wavefront.

In a homogeneous isotropic medium, a wavefront moves parallel to itself. Thus, at any point in the medium, the direction in which the wavefront moves is always perpendicular to the wavefront at that point. This direction is given by the wave normal at that point.

(b) Ray of light: The direction in which light is propagated is called a ray of light.

This term (ray of light) is also used to mean a narrow beam of light waves. Only in a homogeneous isotropic medium is a ray of light the same as a wave normal. For spherical wavefronts spreading out from a point source, the rays are radially divergent. The rays corresponding to a plane’ wavefront form a parallel beam.

Question 14.
What is a cylindrical wavefront? Draw the corresponding diagram.
Answer:
Cylindrical wavefront: An extended linear source, such as an aperture in the form of a narrow slit, gives rise to cylindrical wavefronts. All the points equidistant from the source lie on the curved surface of a cylinder. Thus, the shape of the wavefront is cylindrical.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 2

Question 15.
What is a plane wavefront? Draw the corresponding diagram.
Answer:
Plane wavefront: It may be treated as a part of a spherical or cylindrical wavefront at a very great distance from the source, such that the wavefront has a negligible curvature.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 3

Question 16.
Draw a neat labelled diagram illustrating spherical wavefronts corresponding to a diverging beam of light.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 4
Note : Lenses can be used to obtain

  1. a converging beam of light
  2. a diverging beam of light.

Question 17.
State Huygens’ principle.
Answer:
Huygens’ principle : Every point on a wavefront acts as a secondary source of light and sends out secondary wavelets in all directions. The secondary wavelets travel with the speed of light in the medium. These wavelets are effective only in the forward direction and not in the backward direction. At any instant, the forward-going envelope or the surface of tangency to these wavelets gives the position of the new wavefront at that instant.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 18.
Explain the construction and propagation of a plane wavefront using Huygens’ principle.
Answer:
Huygens’ construction nf a plane wavefront: A plane wavefront may be treated as a part of a spherical or cylindrical wave at a very great distance from a point source or an extended source, such that the wavefront has a negligible curvature. Let A, B, C, D, …, be points on a plane wavefront in a homogeneous isotropic medium in which the speed of light, taken to be monochromatic, is v.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 5
In a time, t = T, secondary wavelets with points A, B, C, D,…, as secondary sources travel a distance vT. To find the position of the wavefront after a time t = T, we draw spheres of radii vT with A, B, C,…, as centres. The envelope or the surface of tangency to these spheres is a plane A’B’C’. This plane, the new wavefront, is at a perpendicular distance vT from the original wavefront in the direction of propagation of the wave. Thus, in an isotropic medium, plane wavefronts are propagated as planes.

Question 19.
Explain the construction and propagation of a spherical wavefront using Huygens’ principle.
Answer:
Huygens’ construction of a spherical wavefront: Consider a point source of monochromatic light S in a homogeneous isotropic medium. The light waves travel with the same speed v in all directions. After time f, the wave will reach all the points which are at a distance vt from S. This is spherical wavefront XY. Let, A, B, C, …,, be points on this wavefront.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 6
To find the new wavefront after time T, we draw spheres of radius vT with A, B, C,…, as centres. The envelope or the surface of tangency of these spheres is the surface A’B’C’. This is the new spherical wavefront X’Y’. Thus, in an isotropic medium, spherical wavefronts are propagated as concentric spheres.

Question 20.
Suppose a parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident normally at a boundary separating two media. Explain what happens to the wavelength and frequency of the light as it propagates from medium 1 to medium 2. What happens when the medium 1 is vacuum ?
Answer:
Consider a parallel beam of monochromatic light incident normally on interface PQ separating a rarer medium (medium 1) and a denser medium (medium 2).

The three successive wavefronts AB, CD and EF are separated by a distance λ1, the wavelength of light in first medium. The corresponding three wavefronts after refraction, are A’B’, C’D’ and E’F’. Due to the denser medium, the speed of light reduces and hence the wavefronts cover a less distance than that covered in the same time in the first medium. Thus, the wavefronts are comparitively more closely spaced than in the first medium. This distance between successive wavefronts is λ2, the wavelength of light in the second medium. Thus, λ2 is less than λ1,. To find the relation between λ1 and λ2, let us consider the wavefront AB reaching
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 7
PQ at time t = 0. The next wavefront CD, separated from AB by distance λ1, will reach PQ at time t = T. Let v1 and v2 be the speeds of light in medium 1 and medium 2 respectively. T is the time during which light covers distance λ1 in medium 1 and λ2 in medium 2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 8
This shows how the wavelength of light changes in refraction.

If the first medium is vacuum where the wavelength of light is λ0 and n is the absolute refractive index of medium 2, then
λ2 = λ0\(\left(\frac{v_{2}}{c}\right)\) = \(\frac{\lambda_{0}}{n}\) (as v1 = c) …(3)
Now, speed = frequency × wavelength.
Hence, the ratio of the frequencies v1 and v2, of the wave in the two mediums can be written using
EQ. (2) as, \(\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\) = \(\frac{v_{1} / \lambda_{1}}{v_{2} / \lambda_{2}}\) = 1 …(4)

Thus, the frequency of a wave remains unchanged while going from one medium to another. Thus, v0 = v1 = v2, where v0 is the frequency of light in vacuum.

Question 21.
The refractive indices of diamond and water with respect to air are 2.4 and 4/3 respectively. What is the refractive index of diamond with respect to water ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 9
is the refractive index of diamond with respect to water.

Question 22.
What is the refractive index of water with respect to diamond ? For data, see Question 21. above.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 10
is the refractive index of water with respect to diamond.

Question 23.
What happens to the frequency, wavelength and speed of light as it passes from one medium to another?
Answer:
The wavelength and speed of light change, but the frequency remains the same.

Question 24.
The refractive index of water with respect to air, for light of wavelength Aa in air, is 4/3. What is the wavelength of the light in water?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 11
as the wavelength of the light in water.

Question 25.
If the frequency of certain light is 6 × 1014 Hz, what is its wavelength in free space ? [c = 3 × 108 m/s]
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 12
is the required wavelength.

Question 26.
If the wavelength of certain light in air is 5000 Å and that in a certain medium is 4000 Å, what is the refractive index of the medium with respect to air ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 13
is the refractive index of the medium with respect to air.

Data : c = 3 × 108 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 27.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
If the refractive index of glass is 3/2 and that of water is 4/3 respectively, find the speed of light in glass and in water.
Solution:
Let ng and nw be the refractive indices of glass and water respectively. Also let va, vg and vw be the speeds of light in air, glass and water, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 14

Question 2.
The refractive indices of water and diamond are 4/3 and 2.42 respectively. Find the speed of light in water and diamond.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 15
This is the speed of light in diamond.

Question 3.
The refractive indices of glass and water with respect to air are \(\frac{3}{2}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\), respectively. Determine the refractive index of glass with respect to water.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 16
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 25
This is the refractive index of glass with respect to water.

Question 4.
A diamond (refractive index = 2.42) is dipped into a liquid of refractive index 1.4. Find the refractive index of diamond with respect to the liquid.
Solution :
Data : nd = 2.42, n1 = 1.4
The refractive index of diamond with respect to liquid,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 26

Question 5.
The refractive index of glycerine is 1.46. What is the speed of light in glycerine ? [Speed of light in vacuum = 3 × 108 m/s]
Solution :
Data : ng = 1.46, c = 3 × 108 m/s c
ng = \(\frac{c}{v}\)
v = \(\frac{c}{n}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{1.46}\) = 2.055 × 108 m/s
This is the speed of light in glycerine.

Question 6.
The refractive indices of glycerine and diamond with respect to air are 1.46 and 2.42 respectively. Calculate the speed of light in glycerine and in diamond. From these calculate the refractive index of diamond with respect to glycerine.
Solution:
Let ng and nd be the refractive indices of glycerine and diamond respectively. Also, let va, vg and vd be the speeds of light in air, glycerine and diamond respectively.
Data : va = 3 × 108 m/s, ng = 1.46, nd = 2.42
(i) Refractive index of glycerine with respect to air,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 27

(ii) Refractive index of diamond with respect to air,
nd = \(\frac{v_{\mathrm{a}}}{v_{\mathrm{d}}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 28

(iii) Refractive index of diamond with respect to glycerine,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 29

Question 7.
The wavelengths of a certain light in air and in a medium are 4560 Å and 3648 Å, respectively. Compare the speed of light in air with its speed in the medium.
Solution:
Let va and vm be the speeds of light in air and in the medium respectively and let λa and λm be the wavelengths of light in air and in the medium respectively. Let v be the frequency of light in air.
When light passes from one medium to another, its frequency remains unchanged.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 30

Question 8.
Monochromatic light of wavelength 632.8 nm is incident from air on a water surface. What are the wavelength, frequency and speed of (a) reflected and (b) refracted light ? [Given : Refractive index of water = 1.33]
Solution:
Let v be the frequency of the light, and λ1 and λ2 the wavelengths of reflected and refracted light respectively.
Data : λ1 = 632.8 nm = 632.8 × 10-9 m,
c = 3 × 108 m/s, anw = 1.33
(a) For reflected light:
When the wave travels in air, its speed v1 = c
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 31

(b) For refracted light:
Frequency does not change while going from one medium to other.
∴ V = 4.741 × 1014 Hz
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 32
This is the speed of the light in water.

Question 9.
The refractive indices of water for red and violet colours are 1.325 and 1.334, respectively. Find the difference between the speeds of the rays of these two colours in water. [c = 3 × 108 m/s]
Solution :
Data : nr = 1.325, nv = 1.334, c = 3 × 108 m/s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 33

Question 10.
If the difference in speeds of light in glass and water is 2.505 × 107 m/s, find the speed of light in air. [Refractive index of glass = 1.5, refractive index of water = 1.333]
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 34
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 35
This is the speed of light in air.

Question 11.
If the difference in speeds of light in glass and water is 0.25 × 108 m/s, find the speed of light in air. [ng = 1.5 and nw = \(\frac{4}{3}\)]
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 36
∴ The speed of light in air, c = 12 (nw – vg)
= 12 × 0.25 × 108
= 3 × 108 m/s

Question 12.
Red light of wavelength 6400 Å in air has wavelength 4000 Å in glass. If the wavelength of violet light in air is 4400 Å, what is its wavelength in glass? Assume that the glass has the same refractive index for red and violet colours.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 37
[ Note : This problem was asked in Board examination in October 2014. The assumption nr(glass) = nv(glass) is manifestly gross. No glass can have the same refractive index for red and violet colours.]

Question 13.
A ray of light passes from air to glass. If the angle of incidence is 74° and the angle of refraction is 37°, find the refractive index of the glass.
Solution :
Data : i = 74°, r = 37°
n = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = \(\frac{\sin 74^{\circ}}{\sin 37^{\circ}}\) = \(\frac{0.9613}{0.6018}\)
∴ n = 1.597
This is the refractive index of the glass.

Question 14.
A ray of light is incident on a glass slab making an angle of 30° with the surface. Calculate the angle of refraction in glass and the speed of light in glass. The refractive index of glass and speed of light in air are 1.5 and 3 × 108 m/s, respectively. Solution :
Data : vair = 3 × 108 m/s; n = 1.5
The angle of incidence (i) is the angle made by the incident ray with the normal drawn to the refracting surface.
∴ i = 90° – 30° = 60°
(a) Angle of refraction (r) in glass :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 38

(b) Speed of light (vglass) in glass :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 39

Question 15.
A ray of light is incident on a water surface of refractive index \(\frac{4}{3}\) making an angle of 40° with the surface. Find the angle of refraction.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 40
∴ The angle of refraction, r = sin-1(0.5745) = 35°4′

Question 16.
A ray of light travelling in air is incident on a glass slab making an angle of 30° with the surface. Calculate the angle by which the refracted ray in glass is deviated from its original path and the speed of light in glass [Refractive index of glass = 1.5].
Solution:
Solve for the speed (ug) of light in glass and the angle of refraction (r) in glass as in Solved Problem (14). ug = 2 × 108 m/s and r = 35°16′
The angle of incidence (z), i.e., the angle between the incident ray and the normal to the glass surface, is i = 90° – 30° = 60°.
Hence, the angle by which the refracted ray is deviated from the original path is δ = i – r = 60° – 35°16′ = 24°44′

Question 17.
The wavelength of blue light in air is 4500 A. What is its frequency? If the refractive index of glass for blue light is 1.55, what will be the wavelength of blue light in glass ?
Solution :
Data : λa = 4500 Å = 4.5 × 10-7 m, ng = 1.55, va = 3 × 108 m/s
va = vaλa
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 41
This is the wavelength of blue light in glass.

Question 18.
White light consists of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm. What will be the wavelength range seen when white light is passed through glass of refractive index 1.55 ?
Solution:
Let λ1 and λ2 be the wavelengths of light in water for 400 nm and 700 nm (wavelengths in vacuum) respectively. Let λa be the wavelength of light in vacuum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 42
The wavelength range seen when white light is passed through the glass would be 258.06 nm to 451.61 nm.

Question 19.
Determine the change in wavelength of electro-magnetic radiation as it passes from air to glass, if the refractive index of glass with respect to air for the radiation under consideration is 1.5 and the frequency of the radiation is 3.5 × 1014 Hz. [Speed of the radiation in air (c) = 3 × 108 m/s]
Solution:
Let v be the frequency of the electromagnetic radiation and c its speed in air. Let λa and λb be the wavelengths of the radiation in air and glass, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 43

Question 20.
Determine the change in wavelength of light during its passage from air to glass, if the refractive index of glass with respect to air is 1.5 and the frequency of light is 5 × 1014 Hz. [Speed of light in air = (c) = 3 × 108 m/s] Solution:
Let v be the frequency of the electromagnetic radiation and c its speed in air. Let λa and λb be the wavelengths of the radiation in air and glass, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 43
λa = 6000 Å, λg = 4000 Å ∴ λa – λg = 2000 Å

Question 21.
A light beam of wavelength 6400 Å is incident normally on the surface of a glass slab of thickness 5 cm. Its wavelength in glass is 4000 A. The beam of light takes the same time to travel from the source to the surface as it takes to travel through the glass slab. Calculate the distance of the source from the surface.
Solution :
Data : λa = 6400 Å, sg = thickness of the glass slab = 5 cm, λg = 4000 Å
The speeds of light in glass and air are, respectively, vg = λgv and va = λav
where the frequency of the light v remains un-changed with the change of medium.
The time taken to travel through the glass slab,
tg = \(\frac{\mathrm{Sg}}{v_{\mathrm{g}}}\) = \(\frac{S_{g}}{\lambda_{g} v}\)
The time taken to travel through air,
ta = \(\frac{S_{a}}{v_{a}}\) = \(\frac{d}{\lambda_{\mathrm{a}} v}\)
where sa = d is the distance of the glass surface from the source.
Since ta = tg
\(\frac{d}{\lambda_{\mathrm{a}} v}\) = \(\frac{s_{\mathrm{g}}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{g}} v}\)
∴ d = \(\frac{\lambda_{\mathrm{a}}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{g}}} \mathrm{s}_{\mathrm{g}}\)Sg = \(\frac{6400}{4000}\) × 5 = 1.6 × 5 = 8 cm

Question 22.
A parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident on a glass slab at an angle of incidence 60°. Find the ratio of the width of the beam in glass to that in air if the refractive index of glass is \(\frac{3}{2}\).
Data: i = 60, ang = 1.5
By Snell’s law, ang = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) ∴ sin r = \(\frac{\sin i}{\mathrm{a} n_{\mathrm{g}}}\)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 44

Question 23.
The width of a plane incident wavefront is found to be doubled in a denser medium if it makes an angle of 70° with the surface. Calculate the refractive index for the denser medium.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 44
Data : i = 70°, \(\frac{\mathrm{CD}}{\mathrm{AB}}\) = 2
\(\frac{\cos r}{\cos i}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{CD}}{\mathrm{AB}}\) = 2
∴ cos r = 2 cos 70° = 2 × 0.3420 = 0.6840
∴ r = cos-10.6840 = 46°51′
The refractive index of the denser medium relative to the rarer medium
= \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = \(\frac{\sin 70^{\circ}}{\sin 46^{\circ} 51^{\prime}}\) = \(\frac{0.9397}{0.7296}\) = 1.288

Question 24.
A ray of light travelling through air falls on the surface of a glass slab at an angle i. It is found that the angle between the reflected and the refracted rays is 90°. If the speed of light in glass is 2 × 108 m/s, find the angle of incidence.
Solution :
Data : c = 3 × 108 m/s, vg = 2 × 108 m/s, angle between the reflected ray and the refracted ray = 90°
ng = \(\frac{c}{v_{g}}\) = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{2 \times 10^{8}}\) = 1.5
The angle between the reflected and refracted rays = (90° – i) + (90° – r) = 180° – (i + r) = 90° (by the data)
i + r = 90° ∴ r = 90° – i
∴ sin r = sin(90° – i) = cos i
ng = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = \(\frac{\sin i}{\cos i}\) = tan i
∴ The angle of incidence,
i = tan-1 ng = tan-1 1.5 = 56°19′

Question 28.
What is meant by polarized light ? How does it differ from unpolarized light?
Answer:
According to the electromagnetic theory of light, a light wave consists of electric and magnetic fields vibrating at right angles to each other and to the direction of propagation of the wave. If the vibrations of the electric field \(\vec{E}\) in a light wave are confined to a single plane containing the direction of propagation of the wave so that its electric field is restricted along one particular direction at right angles to the direction of propagation of the wave, the wave is said to be plane-polarized or linearly polarized.

If the vibrations of \(\vec{E}\) in a light wave are in all directions perpendicular to the direction of propagation of the light wave, the light wave is said to be unpolarized. Ordinary light, e.g. that emitted by a bulb, is unpolarized.

According to Biot, unpolarized light may be considered as a superposition of many linearly polarized waves, with random orientations. Also, these component waves are noncoherent, that is, irregular in their phase relationships.

[Note : Ordinary light consists of wave trains, each coming from a separate atom in the source. A beam of ordinary light in a single direction consists of millions of such wave trains from the very large number of atoms in the source radiating in that direction. Hence, the vibrations of \(\vec{E}\) are in all transverse directions with equal probability. Thus, light from an ordinary source is.un-polarized.]

Question 29.
How are polarized light and unpolarized light represented in a ray diagram ?
OR
How will you distinguish between polarized and unpolarized light in a ray diagram?
Answer:
Linearly polarized light is represented in a ray diagram by double-headed arrows or short lines drawn perpendicular to the direction of propagation of light, as shown in below figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 45
An unpolarized light beam is represented by both dots and arrows, as shown in above figure. The dots are the ‘end views’ of arrows that are oriented normal to the plane of the diagram.

[Note : The length of an arrow or line represents the amplitude of the electric field (\(\vec{E}\)) in the plane of the diagram and the direction indicates the polarization axis of the beam, i.e., the direction of vibration of \(\vec{E}\). According to Jean Biot (1774-1862), French physicist, unpolarized light may be considered as a superposition of many linearly polarized waves, with random orientations in planes perpendicular to the direction of propagation. In an analytical treatment, the electric vectors may be resolved along two mutually perpendicular directions so that the multiplicity of vectors in can be replaced by the two mutually perpendicular vectors as in, both perpendicular to the direction of
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 46
propagation of light. Sir David Brewster (1781-1868), British physicist, conceived the ordinary unpolarized light to consist of two perpendicular, polarized components of equal intensity.]

Question 30.
What is a polarizer?
Answer:
When a beam of unpolarized light is passed through certain types of materials (or devices), these materials (or devices) allow only those light waves to pass through which have their electric field along a particular direction. All the other waves with the electric field in other directions are blocked. A material (or a device) which exhibits this special property is called a polarizer.

Question 31.
Explain the terms :

  1. polarizing axis of a polarizer
  2. plane of vibration
  3. plane of polarization.

Answer:

  1. Polarizing axis of a polarizer : When unpolarized light is incident on a polarizer, the particular direction along which the electric field of the emergent wave is oriented is called the polarizing axis of the polarizer.
  2. Plane of vibration : The plane of vibration of an electromagnetic wave is the plane of vibration of the electric field vector containing the direction of propagation of the wave. Experiment shows that it is the electric field vector E which produces the optical polarization effects.
  3. Plane of polarization : The plane of polarization of an electromagnetic wave is defined as the plane perpendicular to the plane of vibration. It is the plane containing the magnetic field vector and the direction of propagation of the wave.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 47

Note :
For vision, photography, action of light on electrons and many other observed effects of light, it is the electric vector that is more important than the magnetic one. Hence, nowadays the plane of polarization is taken to be the plane of vibration. Most authoritative; modern books on Optics do not, therefore, explicitly define the plane of vibration. The above convention is obsolete and redundant.

Question 32.
What is a Polaroid? Explain its construction.
Answer:
A Polaroid is a synthetic dichroic sheet polarizer packed with tiny dichroic crystals oriented parallel to each other such that the transmitted light is plane polarized.

Construction : The first large polarizing sheet filter was made by US inventor Edwin H. Land (1909-91). He used the microscopic needlelike crystals of iodoquinine sulphate (known as herapathite) made into a thick colloidal dispersion in nitrocellulose. This material was squeezed through a long narrow slit which forced the needles to orient parallel to one another. The material was then dried to form a solid plastic sheet.

[Note : The modern version of Polaroid is made from long-chain polymer, polyvinyl alcohol. The transmission axis of a Polaroid is the plane of vibration of a plane polarized light which passes through with minimum absorption.]

If the vibrations of the electric field \(\vec{E}\) in a light wave are confined to a single plane containing the direction of propagation of the wave so that its electric field is restricted along one particular direction at right angles to the direction of propagation of the wave, the wave is said to be plane-polarized or linearly polarized.

This phenomenon of restricting the vibrations of light, i.e., of the electric field vector in a particular direction, which is perpendicular to the direction of the propagation of the wave is called polarization of light.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 48

Consider an unpolarized light wave travelling along the x-direction. Let c, v and λ be the speed, frequency and wavelength, respectively, of the wave. The magnitude of its electric field (\(\vec{E}\)) is,
E = E0 sin (kx – ωt), where E0 = Emax = amplitude of the wave, ω = 2πv = angular frequency of the wave and k = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) = magnitude of the wave vector or propagation vector.
The intensity of the wave is proportional to |E0|2. The direction of the electric field can be anywhere in the y-z plane. This wave is passed through two identical polarizers as shown.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 49

When a wave with its electric field inclined at an angle φ to the axis of the first polarizer is passed through the polarizer, the component E0 cos φ will pass through it. The other component E0 sin φ which is perpendicular to it will be blocked.

Now, after passing through this polarizer, the intensity of this wave will be proportional to the square of its amplitude, i.e., proportional to |E0 cos φ|2.

The intensity of the plane-polarized wave emerging from the first polarizer can be obtained by averaging E0 cos φ|2 over all values of φ between 0 and 180°. The intensity of the wave will be
proportional to \(\frac{1}{2}\) |E0|2 as the average value of cos2 φ over this range is \(\frac{1}{2}\). Thus the intensity of an unpolarized wave reduces by half after passing through a polarizer.

When the plane-polarized wave emerges from the first polarizer, let us assume that its electric field (\(\overrightarrow{E_{1}}\)) is along the y-direction. Thus, this electric field is,
\(\overrightarrow{E_{1}}\) = \(\hat{i}\)E10 sin (kx – ωt) … (1)
where, E10 is the amplitude of this polarized wave. The intensity of the polarized wave,
I1 ∝|E10|2 …(2)

Now this wave passes through the second polarizer whose polarization axis (transmission axis) makes an angle θ with the y-direction. This allows only the component E10 cos θ to pass through it. Thus, the amplitude of the wave which passes through the second polarizer is E20 = E10 cos θ and its intensity,
I2 ∝|E20|2
∴ I2 ∝ | E10|2 cos2 θ
∴ I2 = I1 cos2 θ … (3)

Thus, when plane-polarized light of intensity I1 is incident on the second identical polarizer, the intensity of light transmitted by the second polarizer varies as cos2 θ, i.e., I2 = I1 cos2 θ, where θ is the angle between the transmission axes of the two polarizers. This is known as Malus’ law.

[Note : Etienne Louis Malus (1775-1812), French military engineer and physicist, discovered in 1809 that light can be polarized by reflection. He was the first to use the word polarization, but his arguments were based on Newton’s corpuscular theory.]

Question 33.
Unpolarized light is passed through two polarizers. Under what condition is the intensity of the emergent light
(i) maximum
(ii) zero?
Answer:
If the angle θ between the axes of polarization of the two polarizers, is 0°, i.e., the polarization axes of the two polarizers are parallel, the intensity of emergent light is maximum. If θ = 90°, i.e., the polarization axes of the two polarizers are perpendicular, no light emerges from the second polarizer, thus the intensity of emergent light is minimum.
[Note: θ = 0° and 90° are known as parallel and cross settings of the two polarizers.]

Question 34.
With a neat labelled diagram, explain the use of a pair of polarizers to vary the intensity of light. What are crossed polarizers?
Answer:
Consider an unpolarized light beam incident perpendicularly on the first polarizing sheet, called the polarizer, whose transmission axis is vertical, say. The light emerging from this sheet is polarized vertically, and the transmitted electric field is \(\overrightarrow{E_{0}}\).

The polarized light beam then passes through a second polarizing sheet, called the analyser, which is placed parallel to the polarizer with its transmission axis at an angle θ to the transmission axis of the polarizer. The component of \(\overrightarrow{E_{0}}\) which is perpendicular to the axis of the analyser is completely absorbed, and the component parallel to that axis is E0 cos θ.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 50
Since intensity varies as the square of the amplitude, the transmitted intensity varies as I = I0 cos2 θ

where I0 is the incident light intensity on the analyser. This expression (known as Malus’s law) shows that the transmitted intensity is maximum when the transmission axes are parallel and zero when the transmission axes are perpendicular to each other.

Crossed polarizers are a pair of polarizers with their transmission axes perpendicular to each other so that the transmitted light intensity is zero.

Question 35.
If the angle made by the axis of polarization of the second polarizer to that of the first polarizer is 60°, what can you say about the intensity of the light transmitted by the second polarizer?
Answer:
If I1 is the intensity of the light incident on the second polarizer and I2 is the intensity of the light transmitted by the second polarizer,
I2 = I1 cos2 θ = I1 cos2 60°
= I1\(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{2}\)
= \(\frac{\boldsymbol{I}_{1}}{4}\)

Question 36.
If 75% of incident light is transmitted by the second polarizer, what is the angle made by the transmission axis of the second polarizer to the transmission axis of the first polarizer?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 51

Question 37.
Explain the phenomenon of polarization of light by reflection.
Answer:
Consider a ray of unpolarized monochromatic light incident at an angle θB on a boundary between two transparent media as shown. Medium 1 is a rarer medium with refractive index n1 and medium 2 is a denser medium with refractive index n2. Part of incident light gets refracted and the rest
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 52
gets reflected. The degree of polarization of the reflected ray varies with the angle of incidence.

The electric field of the incident wave is in the plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation of incident light. This electric field can be resolved into a component parallel to the plane of the paper, shown by double arrows, and a component perpendicular to the plane of the paper shown by dots, both having equal magnitude. Generally, the reflected and refracted rays are partially polarized, i.e., the two components do not have equal magnitude.

In 1812, Sir David Brewster discovered that for a particular angle of incidence. θB, the reflected wave is completely plane-polarized with its electric field perpendicular to the plane of the paper while the refracted wave is partially polarized. This particular angle of incidence (θB) is called the Brewster angle.

For this angle of incidence, the refracted and reflected rays are perpendicular to each other. For angle of refraction θr,
θB + θr = 90° …… (1)
From Snell’s law of refraction,
∴ n1 sin θB = n2 sin θr … (2)
From Eqs. (1) and (2), we have,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 53
This is called Brewster’s law.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 38.
Define polarizing angle. At the polarizing angle, what is the plane of polarization of the reflected ray ?
Answer:
Polarizing angle : The polarizing angle for an interface is the angle of incidence for a ray of unpolarized light at which the reflected ray is completely polarized.

At the polarizing angle, the reflected ray is completely plane polarized in the plane of incidence.

Question 39.
Give one example in which polarization by reflection is used.
Answer:
Polarization by reflection is used to cut out glare from nonmetallic surfaces. Special sunglasses are used for this purpose. Sunglasses fitted with Polaroids reduce the intensity of partially or completely polarized / reflected light incident on the eyes from reflecting surfaces.

Question 40.
State any four uses of a Polaroid.
Answer:

  1. A Polaroid lens filter makes use of polarization by reflection. This filter is used in photography to reduce or eliminate glare from reflective nonmetallic surfaces like glass, rock faces, water and foliage. It can also deepen the colour of the skies.
  2. Polaroid sunglasses reduce the transmitted intensity by a factor of one half and also reduce or eliminate glare from nonmetallic surfaces such as asphalt roadways and snow fields.
  3. Polaroid filters are used in liquid crystal display (LCD) screens.
  4. Polaroids are used to produce and show 3-D movies to give the viewer a perception of depth.

[Note :Three-dimensional movies are filmed from two slightly different camera locations and shown at the same time through two projectors fitted with polarizers having different transmission axes. The audience wear glasses which have two Polaroid filters whose transmission axes are the same as those on the projectors.]

Question 41.
Explain the phenomenon of polarization by scattering.
Answer:
When a beam of sunlight strikes air molecules or dust particles whose size is of the order of wavelength of light, the beam gets scattered. The scattered light observed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of incidence, is plane polarized. This phenomenon is called polarization by scattering.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 54
As shown in above figure, a beam of an un-polarized light is incident along the Z-axis on a molecule. Light waves being transverse in nature, all the possible directions of vibration of electric field vector in the unpolarized light are confined to the XY plane. The light incident on the molecule is scattered by the electromagnetic field of the molecule.

When observed along the X-axis, only the vibrations of electric field vector which are parallel to Y-axis can be seen. In the similar manner, when observed along the Y-axis, only the vibrations of electric field vector which are parallel to the X-axis can be seen. Thus, the light scattered in a direction perpendicular to the incident light is plane polarized.

Question 42.
Solve the following.

Question 1.
The angle between the transmission axes of two polarizers is 45°. What will be the ratio of the intensities of the original light and the transmitted light after passing through the second polarizer?
Solution :
Data : θ = 45°
According to Malus’ law,
I2 = I2 cos2 θ
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 55
= 2
This is the required ratio.

Question 2.
Two polarizers are so oriented that the maximum amount of light is transmitted. To what fraction of its maximum value is the intensity of the transmitted light reduced when the second polarizer is rotated through
(a) 300
(b) 600?
Solution:
Data : θ = 30°, 60°,
I2 = I2 cos2θ
where I1 is the intensity of the incident light and I2 is that of the transmitted light.
(i) For θ = 30°
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 56
I2 = 0.75 I1
= 75% of I1

(ii) For θ = 60°
I2 = I1 (cos 60°)2
= I1\(\left(\frac{1}{2}\right)^{2}\) = \(\frac{1}{4}\)I1
= 0.25 I1 = 25% of I1

Question 3.
For a glass plate as a polarizer with refractive index 1.633, calculate the angle of incidence at which reflected light is completely polarized.
Solution :
Data : n = 1.633
tan θB = n = 1.633
∴ The polarizing angle,
θB = tan-1 1.633 = 58°31′

Question 4.
Find the refractive index of glass if the angle of incidence at which the light reflected from the surface of the glass is completely polarized is 58°.
Solution :
Data : θB = 58°
ng = tan θB = tan 58° .
= 1.6003
This is the refractive index of the glass.

Question 5.
The critical angle for a glass-air interface is sin-1\(\frac{5}{8}\). A ray of unpolarized monochromatic light in air is incident on the glass. What is the polarizing angle?
Solution :
Data : θc = sin-1 \(\frac{5}{8}\)
∴ sin θc = \(\frac{5}{8}\)
∴ n = \(\frac{1}{\sin \theta_{\mathrm{c}}}\) = \(\frac{8}{5}\) = 1.6
Also, n = tan θB
∴ θB = tan-1 n
∴ The polarizing angle, θB = tan-1 1.6 = 58°

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 6.
The refractive index of a medium is \(\sqrt{3}\). What is the angle of refraction, if the unpolarized light is incident on it at the polarizing angle of the medium?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 57
This is the angle of refraction.

Question 7.
For a given medium, the polarizing angle is 60°. What is the critical angle for this medium ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 58
This is the critical angle for the medium.

Question 8.
Unpolarized light is incident on a plane glass surface. What should be the angle of incidence so that the reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other? [Given n = 1.5]
Solution :
Data : Refractive index, n = 1.5
The reflected and refracted rays will be perpendicular to each other, when the angle of incidence = the polarizing angle θB,
tan θB = n = 1.5
∴ θB = tan-1 (1.5) = 56°19′

Question 9.
If a glass plate of refractive index 1.732 is to be used as a polarizer, what would be the
(i) polarizing angle and
(ii) angle of refraction?
Solution :
Data : ng = 1.732
ng = tan θB
0B = tan-1 (1.732) = 60°
This is the polarizing angle,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 59
∴ θr = sin-1\(\left(\frac{0.8660}{1.732}\right)\)
= sin-1 (0.5) = 30°
This is the angle of refraction.

Question 10.
For a certain unpolarized monochromatic light incident on glass and water, the polarizing angles are 59°32′ and 53°4′, respectively. What would be the polarizing angle for the light if it is incident from water on to the glass?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 60

Question 11.
The wavelengths of a certain blue light in air and in water are 4800 Å and 3600 Å, respectively. Find the corresponding Brewster angle.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 61
This is the Brewster angle for the given light incident on water surface.

Question 12.
A ray of light is incident on a glass slab at the polarizing angle of 58°. Calculate the change in the wavelength of light in glass.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 62
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 63
∴ The change in the wavelength of the light in glass, λa – λb = 0.37514λa, i.e., 37.51% of its wavelength in air.

Question 13.
For what angle of incidence will light incident on a bucket filled with liquid having refractive index 1.3 be completely polarized after reflection ?
Solution:
The reflected light will be completely polarized when the angle of incidence is equal to the Brewster’s angle which is given by θB = tan-1 \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\), where n1 and n2 are refractive indices of the first and the second medium respectively. In this case, n1 = 1 and n2 = 1.3.
Thus, the required angle of incidence = Brewster’s angle = tan-1\(\frac{1.3}{1}\) = 52.26°

Question 43.
State and explain the principle of superposition of waves.
Answer:
Principle of superposition of waves : The dis-placement at a point due to the combined effect of a number of waves arriving simultaneously at the point is the vector sum of the displacements due to the individual waves arriving at the point.

Explanation : This is a general principle of linear systems applied to wave phenomena. When two or more wave trains arrive at a point simultaneously, they interpenetrate without disturbing each other. The resultant displacement at that point is the vector sum of the displacements due to the individual waves arriving at the point. The amplitude and phase angle of the resulting disturbance are functions of the individual amplitudes and phases.

Notes :

  1. In the case of mechanical waves, e.g., sound, the displacement is that of a vibrating particle of the medium.
  2. When we consider superposition of electromagnetic waves, light in this chapter, the term displacement refers to the electric field component of the electromagnetic wave.

Question 44.
Explain what you understand by interference of light.
Answer:
The phenomenon in which the superposition of two or more light waves produces a resultant disturbance of redistributed light intensity or energy is called the interference of light.

Light waves are transverse in nature. If two monochromatic light waves of the same frequency arrive in phase at a point, the crest of one wave coincides with the crest of the other and the trough of one wave coincides with the trough of the other. Therefore, the resultant amplitude and hence the resultant intensity of light at that point is maximum and the point is bright. This phenomenon is called constructive interference. If two light waves having the same amplitude are in opposite phase, the crest of one wave coincides with the trough of the other. Therefore, the resultant amplitude, and hence the intensity, at that point is minimum (zero) and the point is dark. This phenomenon is called destructive interference. If the amplitudes are unequal, the resultant amplitude is minimum, but not zero. At other points, the intensity of light lies between the maximum and zero.

Question 45.
Explain how the phenomenon of interference can be demonstrated in a ripple tank.
Answer:

  1. ‘Two pins, a small distance d apart, are attached to the electrical vibrator or an electrically maintained tuning fork of a ripple tank. The pins are kept vertical with their tips in contact with the surface of water in the ripple tank.
  2. When the vibrator is switched on, the two pins vibrate together in phase with the same frequency and the same amplitude. Their tips form the sources S1 and S2 of circular waves which spread outward along the water surface.
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 64
  3. The waves from the two sources interfere constructively at points where they meet in phase. Thus, where the crest of a wave from S1 is superposed on the crest of a wave from S2 (such as point A), and where the trough of a wave from S1 is superposed on the trough of a wave from S2 (such as point B), the water molecules have maximum amplitude of vibration.
  4. The waves from the two sources interfere destructively at points where they meet in opposite phase. Thus, where the crest of a wave from S1 is superposed on the trough of a wave from S2 (such as point C), and where the trough of a wave from S1 is superposed on the crest of a wave from S2 (such as point D), the water molecules have minimum amplitude of vibration.

Question 46.
What are coherent sources? Is it possible to observe interference pattern with light from any two different sources ? Why ?
Answer:
Coherent sources : Two sources of light are said to be coherent if the phase difference between the emitted waves remains constant.

It is not possible to observe interference pattern with light from any two different sources. This is because, no observable interference phenomenon occurs by superposing light from two different sources. This happens due to the fact that different sources emit waves of different frequencies. Even if the two sources emit light of the same frequency, the phase difference between the wave trains from them fluctuates randomly and rapidly, i.e., they are not coherent.

Consequently, the interference pattern will change randomly and rapidly, and steady interference pattern would not be observed.

Question 47.
State the conditions for constructive and destructive interference of light.
Answer:
(1) Constructive interference (brightness) : There is constructive interference at a point and the brightness or intensity is maximum there, if the two waves of light of the same frequency arrive at the point in phase, i.e., with a phase difference of zero or an integral multiple of 2π radians.
A phase difference of 2π radians corresponds to a path difference λ, where λ is the wavelength of light. Since

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 65
for constructive interference with maximum intensity of light, phase difference = 0, 2π, 4π, 6π, … rad
= n(2π) rad
or path difference = 0, λ, 2λ, 3λ, …, etc.
= nλ
where n = 0, 1, 2, 3, …, etc.

(2) Destructive interference (darkness) : There is destructive interference at a point and the point is the darkest, i.e., the intensity of light is minimum, if the two waves of light of the same frequency and intensity arrive at the point in opposite phase, i.e., with a phase difference of an odd-integral multiple of π radians. A phase difference 2π radians corresponds to a path difference λ, where λ is the wavelength of light.
∴ For destructive interference with minimum intensity of light, phase difference = π, 3π, 5π, … rad
= (2m – 1)π rad
or path difference = λ/2, 3λ/2, 5λ/2, …, etc.
= (2m – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
where m = 1, 2, 3, …, etc.

Question 48.
In Young’s double-slit experiment using light of wavelength 5000Å, what phase difference corresponds to the 11th dark fringe from the centre of the interference pattern?
Answer:
The required phase difference is (2m – 1)π rad = (2 × 11 – 1)π rad = 21π rad.

Question 49.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, if the path difference at a certain point on the screen is 2.999 λ, what can you say about the intensity of light at that point ?
Answer:
The intensity of light at that point will be close to the maximum intensity and the point will be nearly bright as the path difference = 2.999 λ \(\approx\) 3λ (integral multiple of λ).

Question 50.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, if the path difference at a certain point on the screen is 7.4999 λ, what can you say about the nature of the illumination at that point ?
Answer:
The point will be nearly dark as the path difference = 7.4999 λ \(\approx\) (8 – 0.5) λ, which is of the form
(m – \(\frac{1}{2}\))λ, where m = 1, 2, … …. 8

Question 51.
How is Young’s interference experiment performed using a single source of light?
Answer:
When a narrow slit is placed in front of an intense source of monochromatic light, cylindrical wave-fronts propagate from the slit. In Young’s experiment, two coherent sources are then obtained by wavefront splitting by placing a second screen with two narrow slits at a small distance from the first slit.

Question 52.
State any two points of importance of Young’s experiment to observe the interference of light.
Answer:
Importance of Young’s experiment observe the interference of light:

  1. It was the first experiment (1800-04) in which the interference of light was observed.
  2. This experiment showed that light is propagated in the form of waves.
  3. From this experiment, the wavelength of monochromatic light can be determined.

Question 53.
What is the nature of the interference pattern obtained using white light?
Answer:
With white light, one gets a white central fringe at the point of zero path difference along with a few coloured fringes on both the sides, the colours soon fade off to white.

The central fringe is white because waves of all wavelengths constructively interfere here. For a path difference of \(\frac{1}{2}\)λviolet, complete destructive interference occurs only for the violet colour; for waves of other wavelengths, there is only partial destructive interference. Consequently, we have a line devoid of violet colour and thus reddish in appearance. A point for which the path difference = \(\frac{1}{2}\)λred is similarly devoid of red colour, and appears violettish. Thus, following the white central fringe we have coloured fringes, from reddish to violettish. Beyond this, the fringes disappear because there are so many wavelengths in the visible region which constructively interfere that we observe practically uniform white illumination.

Question 54.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the second minimum in the interference pattern is exactly in front of one slit. The distance between the two slits is d and that between the source and screen is D. What is the wavelength of the light used ?
Answer:
The distance of the mth minimum from the central fringe is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 66
This is the wavelength of the light used.

Question 55.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, a glass slide of refractive index ng and thickness b is placed in front of one of the slits. What happens to the interference pattern and fringe width ? Derive an expression for the positions of the bright fringes in the interference pattern.
Answer:
Suppose, in Young’s double-slit experiment, a glass slide of refractive index ng and thickness b is placed in front of the slit S1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 67

If the experiment is set up in free space, this introduces an additional optical path length (ng – 1)b in the path S1P.
Then, the optical path difference to the point P from S1 and S2 is,
∆l = S2P – [S1P + (ng – 1)b] = (S2P – S1P) – (ng – 1)b = y\(\frac{d}{D}\) – (ng – 1)b … (1)
where y = PO’, d is the distance between S1 and S2, and D is the distance of the screen from S1 and S2. Thus, point P will be bright (maximum intensity) if ∆l = nλ, where n = 0, 1, 2, … . The central bright fringe, corresponding to n = 0, will be obtained at a distance y0 from O’ such that,
∆l = yo\(\frac{d}{D}\) – (ng – 1)b = 0
∴ yo\(\frac{d}{D}\) = (ng – 1)b ∴ y0 = \(\frac{D}{d}\)(ng-l) b …(2)
Therefore, the central bright fringe and the interference pattern will shift up (towards P) by a distance y0 given by EQ. (2).
The distance of the nth bright fringe from O’ towards P is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 68
The distance of the (n + l)th bright fringe from O’ towards P is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 69
Therefore, the fringe width,
w = yn+1 – yn = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\) ….(5)
Thus, the fringe width remains unchanged.

Question 56.
What happens to the interference pattern when the phase difference between the two sources of light changes with time ?
Answer:
If the two sources do not maintain their phase relation during the time required for observation, the intensity of light at any point on the screen and consequently the interference pattern changes rapidly, and hence steady interference pattern is not observed.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 57.
Obtain expressions in terms of electric field, for the resultant amplitude and the intensity for the interference pattern produced by monochromatic light waves from two coherent sources.
Answer:
Consider a two-source interference pattern produced by superposition of monochromatic light waves of angular frequency ω, wavelength λ and constant phase difference, φ. At the centre of a bright fringe, there is constructive interference. Here, the amplitude of the resultant wave is double the amplitude of the wave incident on AB. Now, the intensity is proportional to the square of the amplitude of the wave. Hence, the resultant intensity is, I = 4I0, where I0 is the intensity of the incident wave. At the centre of a dark fringe, there is destructive interference. Here, the amplitude of the resultant wave and hence the intensity is zero. At other points the intensity is between 4I0 and zero, depending on the phase difference.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 70
Let the equations of the two waves coming from S1 and S2 at some point in the interference pattern be, E1 = E2 sin ωt and E2 = E0 sin (ωt + φ) respectively, where E0 is the amplitude of the electric field vector.

By the principle of superposition of waves, the resultant electric field at that point is the algebraic sum, E = E1 + E2
∴ E = E0 sin ωt + E0 sin (ωt + φ)
= E0 [sin ωt + sin (ωt + φ)]
= 2E0 sin (ωt + φ/ 2) cos (φ/2)
The amplitude of the resultant wave is 2 E0 cos (φ/2).
Therefore, the intensity at that point is I ∝ |2 E0 cos (φ/2) |2
∴ I = 4I0 cos2 (φ/2)
as I0 ∝ |E0|2.

Question 58.
Monochromatic light waves of amplitudes E10 and E20 and a constant phase difference φ produce an interference pattern. State an expression for the resultant amplitude at a point in the pattern. Hence, deduce the conditions for
(i) constructive interference with maximum intensity
(ii) destructive interference with minimum intensity. Also show that the ratio of the maximum and minimum intensities is
\(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}\) = \(\left(\frac{\boldsymbol{E}_{10}+\boldsymbol{E}_{20}}{\boldsymbol{E}_{10}-\boldsymbol{E}_{20}}\right)^{2}\)
Answer:
Consider a two-source interference pattern produced by monochromatic light waves of angular frequency ω, wavelength λ, amplitudes E10 and E20 and a constant phase difference φ.

Let the individual electric fields along the same line due to the waves at some point in the interference pattern be
E1 = E10 sin ωt and E2 = E20 sin (ωt + φ)
By the principle of superposition of waves, the resultant electric field (displacement) at that point is the algebraic sum
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 71
Since, the intensity of a wave is proportional to the square of its amplitude, the resultant intensity at P,
I ∝ |R|2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 72
Thus, the intensity depends on cos φ.
The condition for constructive interference with maximum intensity is cos φ is maximum, equal to 1, i.e., φ = 2nπ (n = 0, 1, 2, 3…) … (3)
The condition for destructive interference with minimum intensity is cos φ is minimum equal to
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 73

Question 59.
If the amplitude ratio (E20/E10) of two interfering coherent waves producing an interference pattern is 0.5, what is the ratio of the minimum intensity to maximum intensity?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 74

Question 60.
If the amplitude ratio (E20/E10) of two interfering coherent waves producing an interference pattern is 0.8, what is the ratio of the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 75

Question 61.
Two slits in Young’s experiment have widths in the ratio 2 : 3. What is the ratio of the intensities of light waves coming from them?
Answer:
The required ratio is \(\frac{I_{1}}{I_{2}}\) = \(\frac{w_{1}}{w_{2}}\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Question 62.
Monochromatic light waves of intensities I1 and I2, and a constant phase difference φ produce an interference pattern. State an expression for the resultant intensity at a point in the pattern. Hence deduce the expressions for the resultant intensity, maximum intensity and minimum intensity if I1 = I2 = I0.
Answer:
Consider a two-source interference pattern produced by monochromatic light waves of intensities I1 and I2, and a constant phase difference φ. The resultant intensity at a point in the pattern is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 76
At a point of constructive interference with maximum intensity, cos φ = 1.
∴ Imax = 2I0(1 + 1) = 4I0 …(3)
At point of destructive interference, with minimum intensity, cos φ = – 1.
∴ Imin = 2I0(1 – 1) = 0… (4)
Notes :

(1) Since 1 + cos φ = 2 cos2φ, EQ. (2) above can be expressed as I = 4I0 cos2\(\frac{\phi}{2}\) = Imax cos2\(\frac{\phi}{2}\).

(2) The average of cos2 \(\frac{\phi}{2}\), averaged over one cycle, is \(\frac{1}{2}\).
Therefore, the average intensity of a bright and dark fringe in an interference pattern is Iav = 4I0 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = 2I0. The graph of l versus φ is shown, in which the dotted line shows Iav.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 77
In the absence of interference phenomenon, the intensity at a point due to two waves each of intensity I0 is 2I0, which is the same as the average intensity in an interference pattern. Thus, interference of light is consistent with the law of conservation of energy. Interference produces a redistribution of energy out of regions where it is destructive into the regions where it is constructive.

Question 63.
At a point in an interference pattern, the two interfering coherent waves of equal intensity I0 have phase difference 60°. What will be the resultant intensity at that point ?
Answer:
Resultant intensity, I0 = 2I0 (1 + cos φ)
= 2I0(1 + cos 60°) = 2I0(1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)) = 3I0.

Question 64.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Find the ratio of intensities at two points X and Y on a screen in Young’s double-slit experiment where waves from the slits S1, and S2 have path difference of 0 and \(\frac{\lambda}{4}\) respectively.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 78

Question 2.
Two coherent sources, whose intensity ratio is 81 : 1, produce interference fringes. Calculate the ratio of the intensities of maxima and minima in the fringe system.
Solution :
Data : I1 : I2 = 81 : 1
If E10 and E20 are the amplitudes of the interfering waves, the ratio of the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in the fringe system is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 79
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 80

Question 3.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the ratio of the intensities at the maxima and minima in the interference pattern is 36 : 16. What is the ratio of the widths of the two slits?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 81

Question 4.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the ratio of the intensities of the maxima and minima in an interference pattern is 36 : 9. What is the ratio of the intensities of the two interfering waves?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 82
∴ The ratio of the intensities of the two interfering waves is 9 : 1.

Question 5.
Two slits in Young’s double-slit experiment have widths in the ratio 81 : 1. What is the ratio of the amplitudes of light waves coming from them?
Solution:
Data : w1 : w2 = 81 : 1
Since the intensity of a wave is directly proportional to the square of its amplitude,
\(\frac{I_{1}}{I_{2}}\) = \(\left(\frac{E_{10}}{E_{20}}\right)\) …. (1)
Also, the intensity of a wave coming out of a slit is directly propotional to the slit width.
∴ \(\frac{I_{1}}{I_{2}}\) = \(\frac{w_{1}}{w_{2}}\) …. (2)
From Eqs. (1) and (2),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 83
The ratio of the amplitudes of light waves from the slits is 9: 1.

Question 6.
Two monochromatic light waves of equal intensities produce an interference pattern. At a point in the pattern, the phase difference between the interfering waves is π/3 rad. Express the intensity at this point as a fraction of the maximum intensity in the pattern.
Solution :
Data : I1 = I2 = I0, φ = π/3 rad
The resultant intensity at the point in the pattern is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 84

Question 7.
In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the intensity of light at a point on the screen where the path difference is λ is I. What is the intensity of light at a point where the path difference is λ/3 ?
Solution :
Data : ∆l1 = λ, I1 = I, ∆l2 = λ/3
We assume that light waves coming out of the two slits are of equal intensity I0.
Then, at a point in the interference pattern where the phase difference between the interfering waves is φ, the resultant intensity is,
I = 2I0 (1 + cos φ)
Phase difference (φ) = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) × path difference (∆l)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 85
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 86
∴ A The intensity of light at a point where the path difference is λ/3 is λ/4.

Question 8.
The optical path difference between identical waves from two coherent sources and arriving at a point is 87λ. What can you say about the resultant intensity at the point? If the path difference is 49.19 μm, calculate the wavelength of light.
Solution :
Data : Path difference = 87λ = 49.19 /rm.
(i) Path difference = 87λ = nλ, where n = 87. As the path difference is an integral multiple of the wavelength λ, the point where the waves interfere is a bright point with maximum intensity.

(ii) 87 λ = 49.19 μn = 49.19 × 10-6 m .
∴ λ = \(\frac{49.19 \times 10^{-6}}{87}\) = 5.654 × 10-7 m = 5654 Å

Question 9.
The optical path difference between identical waves from two coherent sources and arriving at a point is 172. What can you say about the resultant intensity at the point? If the path difference is 9.18 μm, calculate the wavelength of light.
Solution :
Data : Path difference = 17λ = 9.18 μm
(i) Path difference = 17λ = nλ, where n = 17
As the path difference is an integral multiple of the wavelength λ, the point where the waves interfere is a bright point with maximum intensity.

(ii) 17λ = 9.18 μm = 9.18 × 10-6 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 87

Question 10.
At a point on the two-slit interference pattern obtained using a source of green light of wavelength 5500 Å, the path difference is 4.125 pm. Is the point at the centre of a bright or dark fringe ? Hence, find the order of the fringe.
Solution :
Data : Path difference, ∆l = 4.125 × 10-6 λ = 5500 Å = 5.5 × 10-7 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 88
As the path difference is an odd integral multiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) the point is at the centre of a dark fringe.
∴ p = 2m – 1 (m = 1, 2, 3…)
∴ 2m – 1 = 15 ∴ m = 8
∴ The order of the fringe is 8 (i.e., the point lies at the centre of the 8th dark fringe.)

Question 11.
The two slits in an interference experiment are illuminated by light of wavelength 5600 A. Deter-mine the path difference and phase difference between the waves arriving at the centre of the eighth dark fringe on the screen.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5600 A = 5.6 × 10-7 m
Order of the dark fringe is 8, ∴ m = 8
For the fringe to be dark, path difference
= (2m – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
∴ Path difference, ∆l = (2 × 8 – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = 7.5λ
= 7.5 × 5.6 × 10-7 m
= 4.2 × 10-6 m
Phase difference, φ = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) × ∆l
= \(\frac{2 \pi}{5.6 \times 10^{-7}}\) × 4.2 × 10-6 = 15π

Question 12.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, interference fringes are observed on a screen 1 m away from the two slits which are 2 mm apart. A point P on the screen is 1.8 mm from the central bright fringe,
(i) Find the path difference at P.
(ii) If the wavelength of the light used in 4800 Å, what can you say about the illumination at P?
Solution :
Data : D = 1 m, d = 2 mm = 2 × 10-3 m, y = 1.8 mm = 1.8 × 10-3 m, λ = 4800 Å = 4.8 × 10-7 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 89
∴ Path difference = 15\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
As the path difference is an odd integral multiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\), point P is a dark point with minimum intensity.

Question 13.
Two slits 1.25 mm apart are illuminated by light of wavelength 4500 Å. The screen is 1 m away from the plane of the slits. Find the separation between the 2nd bright fringe on one side and the 2nd bright fringe on the other side of the central maximum.
Solution :
Data : D = 1 m, d = 1.25 mm = 1.25 × 10-3 m,
λ = 4500 Å = 4500 × 10-10 m = 4.5 × 10-7 m
Since, it is a second bright fringe, n = 2. If s is the distance between the 2nd bright fringe on one side and the 2nd bright fringe on the other side of the central maximum, then
s = 2y = 2nλ\(\frac{D}{d}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 90
= 14.4 × 10-4 m
W = 1.44 mm

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 14.
A plane wavefront of light of wavelength 5000 Å is incident on two slits in a screen perpendicular to the direction of light rays. If the total separation of 10 bright fringes on a screen 2 m away is 4 mm, find the distance between the slits.
Solution:
Given : λ = 5000 Å = 5 × 10-7 m,
D = 2 m and the total separation of 10 fringes = 4 mm = 4 × 10-3 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 91

Question 15.
In Young’s double-slit experiment with slits of equal width, a point P on the screen is at a distance equal to one-fourth of the fringe width from the central maximum. If the intensity at the central maximum is Ic, find the intensity at P.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 92
Since, the slits have equal width, the intensities of the two interfering waves are equal, say I0. Then the intensity at a point on the screen is
I = 4I0 cos2 \(\frac{\phi}{2}\)
At the central maximum, φ = 0.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 93
The intensity at P is half that at the central maximum.

Question 16.
In a double-slit experiment, the optical path difference between the waves coming from two coherent sources at a point P on one side of the central bright band is 7.5 × 10-6 m and that at a point Q on the other side of the central bright band is 1.8 × 10-6 m. How many bright and dark bands are observed between points P and Q if the wavelength of light used is 6 × 10-7 m ?
Solution :
Data : ∆l1 = 7.5 × 10-6 m, ∆l2 = 1.8 × 10-6 m λ = 6 × 10-7 m
For point P : Let p\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = ∆l1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 94
The path difference ∆l1 is an odd integral multiple of λ/2 : ∆l1 = (2m – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\), where m is an integer,
∴ 2m – 1 = 25 ∴ m = 13
∴ Point P is at the centre of the 13th dark band.
For point Q :
Let q\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = ∆l2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 95
The path difference ∆l2 is an even integral multiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) : ∆l2 = (2n)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\), where n is an integer
∴ 2n = 6 ∴ n = 3
∴ Point Q is at the centre of the 3rd bright band. Between points P and Q, excluding the respective bands at P and Q, the number of dark bands = 12 + 3 = 15 and the number of bright bands (including the central bright band) = 12 + 2 + 1 = 15

Question 17.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, light waves of wavelength 5.2 × 10-7 m and 6.5 × 10-7 m are used in turn keeping the same geometry. Compare the fringe widths in the two cases.
Solution :
Data : λ1 = 5.2 × 10-7 m, λ2 = 6.5 × 10-7 m
As, W = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\) and the geometry is the same, i.e., D and d remain the same,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 96

Question 18.
Two coherent sources are 1.8 mm apart and the fringes are observed on a screen 80 cm away from them. It is found that with a certain source of light, the fourth bright fringe is situated at a distance of 1.08 mm from the central fringe. Calculate the wavelength of light.
Solution :
Data : d = 1.8 mm = 1.8 × 10-3 m
D = 80 cm = 0.8 m
For fourth bright fringe, n = 4
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 97
This is the wavelength of light.

Question 19.
Green light of wavelength 5100 Å from a narrow slit is incident on a double-slit. If the overall separation of 10 fringes on a screen 200 cm away from it is 2 cm, find the slit-separation.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5100 Å = 5.1 × 10-7 m,
W = \(\frac{2}{10}\) cm = 2 × 10-3 m,
D = 200 cm = 2 m
W = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)
∴ d = \(\frac{\lambda D}{W}\) = \(\frac{5.1 \times 10^{-7} \times 2}{2 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 5.1 × 10-4 m
This is the slit-separation.

Question 20.
Sodium light of wavelength 5.896 × 10-7 m is passed through two pinholes 0.5 mm apart, and an interference pattern is formed on a screen kept parallel to the plane of the pinholes and 1.2 m from them. Find the distance between
(i) the second and the fifth bright fringes
(ii) the third and the seventh dark fringes on the same side of the central bright point.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5.896 × 10-7 m, d = 0.5 mm= 0.5 × 10-3 m, D = 1.2 m
(i) The distance of the nth bright fringe from the central bright point is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 98
The distance between the second and the fifth bright fringes on the same side of the central bright point is 4.245 × 10-3 m.

(ii) The distance of the mth dark fringe from the central bright point is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 99
= 5.66 × 10-3 m
The distance between the third and the seventh dark fringes on the same side of the central bright point is 5.66 × 10-3 m.

Question 21.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the two slits are 2 mm apart. The interference fringes for light of wavelength 6000Å are formed on a screen 80 cm away from them.
(i) How far is the second bright fringe from the central bright point?
(ii) How far is the second dark fringe from the central bright point?
Solution:
Data: D = 80 cm = 0.8 m,
d = 2 mm = 2 × 10-3 m, λ = 6000Å = 6 × 10-7 m
(i) For the second bright fringe from the central bright point, n = 2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 100
This is the required distance.

(ii) For the second dark fringe from the central bright point, m = 2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 101
This is the required distance.

Question 21.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the distance between two consecutive bright fringes on a screen placed at 1.5 m from the two slits is 0.6 mm. What would be the fringe width, if the screen is brought towards the slits by 50 cm, keeping rest of the setting the same?
Solution:
Let λ be the wavelengths of light used and d the distance between the two sources (i.e., slits), if D is the distance between the sources and the screen, the fringe width is
w = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)
For the same λ and d, W ∝ D.
∴ \(\frac{W_{2}}{W_{1}}\) = \(\frac{D_{2}}{D_{1}}\)
Data:
W1 = 0.6 mm = 6 × 10-4 m,
D1 = 1.5 m, D2 = 1 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 102
This is the required fringe width.

Question 22.
On passing light of wavelength 5000 Å through two pinholes 2 mm apart, an interference pattern is formed on a screen kept parallel to the plane of the pinholes and 100 cm from them. Find the distance between the fifth bright band on one side of the central bright band and the sixth dark band on the other side.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5000 Å = 5 × 10-7 m, d = 2 mm = 2 × 10-3 m, D = 100 cm = 1 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 103
∴ y6d = (6 – \(\frac{1}{2}\)) × 2.5 × 10-4m = 1.375 × 10-3 m
∴ y5b + y6d = 1.25 × 10-3m + 1.375 × 10-3m
= 2.625 × 10-3 m = 2.625 mm
This is the required distance.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 23.
Monochromatic light from a narrow slit illuminates two narrow slits 3 mm apart, producing an interference pattern with bright fringes 0.15 mm apart on a screen 75 cm away from the slits. Find the wavelength of the light. How will the fringe width be altered if
(a) the distance of the screen from the slits is doubled
(b) the separation between the slits is doubled ?
Solution :
Data : d = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m,
W = 0.15 mm = 1.5 × 10-4 m, D = 75 cm = 0.75 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 104

Question 24.
In Young’s double-slit experiment the slits are 2 mm apart and interference is observed on a screen placed at a distance of 100 cm from the slits. It is found that the ninth bright fringe is at a distance of 2.208 mm from the second dark fringe from the centre of the fringe pattern. Find the wavelength of light used.
Solution :
Data : d = 2 mm = 2 × 10-3 m,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 105

Question 25.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the two slits separated by 4 mm are illuminated by light of wavelength 6400 Å. Interference fringes are obtained on a screen placed at a distance of 60 cm from the slits. Find the change in the fringe width if the separation between the slits is
(i) increased by 1 mm
(ii) decreased by 1 mm.
Solution :
Data : d = 4 mm = 4 × 10-3 m, λ = 6.4 × 10-7m, D = 0.6 m, d’ = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3 m, d” = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3m
Fringe width, W = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\) ∴ W ∝ \(\frac{1}{d}\)
(i) Since d’ > d, W’ < W, i.e., the fringe width decreases.
Decrease in the fringe width = W – W
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 106

(ii) Since d” < d, W” > W, i.e., the fringe width increases.
Increase in the fringe width = W” – W
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 107

Question 26.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the separation between the slits is 3 mm and the distance between the slits and the screen is 1 m. If the wavelength of light used is 6000 Å, calculate the fringe width. What will be the change in the fringe width if the entire apparatus is immersed in a liquid of refractive index \(\frac{4}{3}\)?
Solution :
Data : d = 3 × 10-3 m, D = 1 m, λ = 6 × 10-7 m, n = \(\frac{4}{3}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 108

Question 27.
In Young’s double-slit experiment using monochromatic light, the fringe pattern shifts by certain distance on the screen when a mica sheet of refractive index 1.6 and thickness 1.964 microns is introduced in the path of one of the interfering waves. The mica sheet is then removed and the slits-to-screen distance is doubled. It is found that the distance between successive maxima now is the same as the observed fringe shift with the mica sheet. Calculate the wavelength of the monochromatic light used.
Solution :
Data : nm = 1.6, b = 1.964 microns
= 1.964 × 10-6 m,
D2 = 2D1, W2 = y0
The fringe shift with the mica sheet,
y0 = \(\frac{D_{1}}{d}\)(nm – 1)b
Subsequent to the removal of the mica sheet and doubling the slits-to-screen distance, the new fringe width is,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 109

Question 28.
What must be the thickness of a thin film which, when kept near one of the slits shifts the central fringe by 5 mm for incident light of wavelength 5890 Å in Young’s double-slit interference experiment ? The refractive index of the material of the film is 1.1 and the distance between the slits is 0.5 mm.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5890 Å, nm = 1.1, the shift of the central bright fringe = 5 mm

Let t be the thickness of the film and P the point on the screen where the central fringe has shifted. Suppose the film is kept in front of slit S1. Due to the film, the optical path travelled by the light passing through it increases by (1.1 – 1)f = 0.1t. Thus, the optical paths between the two beams passing through the two slits are not equal at the midpoint of the screen but are equal at P, 5 mm away from the centre. At this point the distance travelled by light from the other slit S2 to the screen is larger than that travelled by light from S1 by 0.1t.

The difference in distances, S2P – S1P = yλ/d, where y is the distance along the screen = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3m and d = 0.5 mm = 5 × 10-4 m.

This has to be equal to the difference in optical paths introduced by the film.
Thus, 0.1t = 5 × 10-3 × 5890 × 10-10/5 × 10-4.
∴ t = 5890 × 10-8m = 5.89 × 10-5 m = 0.0589 mm

Question 29.
In a biprism experiment, the eyepiece is placed at a distance of 1.2 metres from the source. The distance between the virtual sources was found to be 7.5 × 10-4 m. Find the wavelength of light if the eyepiece is to be moved transversely through a distance of 1.888 cm for 20 fringes.
Solution :
Data : D = 1.2 m, d = 7.5 × 10-4 m,
20 W = 1.888 cm = 1.888 × 10-2 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 110

Question 30.
A biprism is placed 5 cm from the slit illuminated by sodium light of wavelength 5890 Å. The width of the fringes obtained on a screen 75 cm from the biprism is 9.424 × 10-2 cm. What is the distance between the two coherent sources?
Solution :
Data : D = 5 cm + 75 cm = 80 cm = 0.8 m,
λ = 5890 Å = 5.890 × 10-7 m,
W = 9.424 × 10-2 cm = 9.424 × 10-4 m
Fringe width, W = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)
∴ The distance between the two coherent sources,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 111
= 5 × 10-4 m = 0.5 mm

Question 31.
In a biprism experiment, the distance of the 20th bright band from the centre of the interference pattern is 8 mm. Calculate the distance of the 30th bright band from the centre.
Solution :
Data : y20 = 8 mm (bright band)
The distance of the nth bright band from the centre of the interference pattern,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 112
The distance of the 30th bright band from the centre of the interference pattern is 12 mm.

Question 32.
In a biprism experiment, a source of light having wavelength 6500 Å is replaced by a source of light having wavelength 5500 Å. Calculate the change in the fringe width, if the screen is at a distance of 1 m from the sources which are 1 mm apart.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 113
The fringe width decreases by 1 × 10-4 m = 0.1 mm.

Question 33.
In a biprism experiment, light of wavelength 5200 Å is used to get an interference pattern on the screen. The fringe width changes by 1.3 mm when the screen is moved towards the biprism by 50 cm. Find the distance between the two virtual images of the slit.
Solution :
Data : λ = 5200 Å = 5.2 × 10-7 m,
W1 – W2 = 1.3 mm = 1.3 × 10-3 m,
D1 – D2 = 50 cm = 0.5 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 114
This is the distance between the two virtual sources.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 34.
In a biprism experiment, the 10th dark band is observed at 2.09 mm from the central bright point on the screen with red light of wavelength 6400 Å. By how much will the fringe width change if blue light of wavelength 4800 A is used with the same setting?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 115

Question 35.
In a biprism experiment, the slit is illuminated by red light of wavelength 6400 Å, and the cross wire of the eyepiece is adjusted at the centre of the 3rd bright band. On using blue light, it is found that the 4th bright band is on the cross wire. Find the wavelength of blue light.
Solution :
Data : λr = 6400 Å, y3 (red, bright)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 116
This is the wavelength of blue light.

Question 36.
In a biprism experiment, the wavelength of red light used is 6000 Å and the nth bright band is obtained at a point P on the screen. Keeping the same setting, the source is replaced by a source of green light of wavelength 5000 Å and the (n + 1)th bright band of green light coincides with point P. Find n.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 117

Question 37.
In a biprism experiment, the slit is illuminated by light of wavelength 4800 Å. The distance between the slit and the biprism is 15 cm and that between the biprism and the eyepiece is 85 cm. If the distance between the virtual sources is 3 mm, determine the distance between the 4th bright band on one side and the 4th dark band on the other side of the central band.
Solution :
Data : λ = 4800 Å = 4.8 × 10-7 m,
d = 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m,
D = distance between the slit and the biprism + distance between the biprism and the eyepiece = 15 + 85 = 100 cm = 1 m The distance of the nth bright band from the central band is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 118
This is the required distance.

Question 38.
An isosceles prism of refracting angle 179° and refractive index 1.6 is used as a biprism by keeping it 10 cm away from a slit, the edge of the biprism being parallel to the slit. The slit is illuminated by a light of wavelength 600 nm and the screen is 90 cm away from the biprism. Calculate the location of the centre of the 10th dark band from the centre of the interference pattern and the path difference at this location.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 119
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 120

Question 39.
In a biprism experiment, the distance between the second and tenth dark bands on the same side of the central bright band is 0.12 cm, that between the slit and the biprism is 20 cm and that between the biprism and the eyepiece is 80 cm. If the slit images given by the lens in the two positions are 4.5 mm and 2 mm apart, find the wavelength of light used.
Solution :
The distance between the second and tenth dark bands on the same side of the central band is equal to 8 times the fringe width (W).
∴ 8 W = 0.12 cm (by the data)
∴ W = \(\frac{0.12}{8}\) cm = 0.015 cm = 0.015 × 10-2 m
The distance (D) between the slit and the eyepiece is equal to the sum of the distance between the slit and the biprism and the distance between the biprism and the eyepiece.
∴ D = 20 + 80 = 100 cm = 1 m (by the data)
Also, d1 = 4.5 mm and d2 = 2 mm
∴ The distance (d) between the virtual images of the slit is
d = \(\sqrt{d_{1} d_{2}}\) = \(\) mm = 3 mm
= 3 × 10-3 m
∴ The wavelength of light,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 121

Question 40.
In a biprism experiment, the slit and the eyepiece. are 10 cm and 80 cm away from the biprism. When a convex lens was interposed at 30 cm from the slit, the separation of the two magnified images of the slit was found to be 4.5 mm. If the wavelength of the source is 4500 Å, calculate the fringe width.
Solution:
Data : d1 = 4.5 mm = 4.5 × 10-3 m,
λ = 4500 Å = 4.5 × 10-7 m,
distance between the slit and the eyepiece (D) = distance between the slit and the biprism + distance between the biprism and the eyepiece = 10 cm + 80 cm = 90 cm = 0.9 m, u1 = 30 cm = 0.3 m v1 = D – u1 = 0.9m – 0.3m = 0.6 m
Linear magnification of a lens,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 122

Question 65.
Describe with a neat labelled ray diagram the Fraunhofer diffraction pattern due to a single slit. Obtain the expressions for the positions of the intensity minima and maxima. Also obtain the expression for the width of the central maximum.
Answer:
When a parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength λ illuminates a single slit of finite width a, we observe on a screen some distance from the slit, a broad pattern of alternate dark and bright fringes. The pattern consists of a central bright fringe, with successive dark and bright fringes of diminishing intensity on both sides. This is called ‘ the diffraction pattern of a single slit.

Consider a single slit illuminated with a parallel beam of monochromatic light perpendicular to the plane of the slit. The diffraction pattern is obtained on a screen at a distance D (» a) from the slit and at the focal plane of the convex lens.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 123

We can imagine the single slit as being made up of a large number of Huygens’ sources evenly distributed over the width of the slit. Then the maxima and minima of the pattern arise from the interference of the various Huygens’ wavelets.
Now, imagine the single slit as made up of two adjacent slits, each of width a/2. Since, the incident plane wavefronts are parallel to the plane of the slit, all the Huygens sources at the slit will be in phase. They will therefore also in phase at the point P0 on the screen, where P0 is equidistant from all the Huygens sources. At P0, then, we get the central maximum.

For the first minimum of intensity on the screen, the path difference between the waves from the Huygens sources A and O (or O and B) is λ/2, which is the condition for destructive interference. Suppose, the nodal line OP for the first minimum subtends an angle θ at the slit; θ is very small. With P as the centre and PA as radius, strike an arc intersecting PB at C. Since, D » a, the arc AC can be considered a straight line at right angles to PB. Then, ∆ ABC is a right-angled triangle similar to A OP0P.
This means that, ∠BAC = θ
∴ BC = a sin θ
∴ Difference in path length,
BC = PB – PA = (PB – PO) + (PO – PA)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 124
(∵ θ is very small and in radian)
The other nodal lines of intensity minima can be understood in a similar way. In general, then, for the with minimum (wi = +1, ±2, ±3, …).
θm = \(\frac{m \lambda}{a}\) (with minimum) … (2)
as θm is very small and in radian.
Between the successive minima, the intensity rises to secondary maxima when the path difference is an odd-integral multiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 125
(mth secondary maximum) … (3)
Width of the central maximum :
Equation (1) gives the angular half width of the central maximum. Therefore, the angular width of the central maximum is,
2θ = \(\frac{2 \lambda}{a}\) … (4)
From ∆OP0P, P0P = D tan θ \(\simeq\) D sin θ
(∵ θ is very small and in radian)
∴ y1 = P0P = \(\frac{D \lambda}{a}\) [from Eq. (1)] … (5)
This is the distance of the first minimum from the centre of the central maximum.
∴ Width of the central bright fringe :
Wc = 2y1d = 2W = 2\(\left(\frac{\lambda D}{a}\right)\) …(6)

The central bright fringe is spread between the first dark fringes on either side. Thus, the width of the central bright fringe is the distance between the centres of the first dark fringe on either side.

If the lens is very close to the slit, D is very nearly equal to f, where f is the focal length of the lens. Then Wc = 2\(\left(\frac{\lambda D}{a}\right)\) = 2\(\left(\frac{\lambda f}{a}\right)\) … (7)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 126

Question 66.
Represent graphically intensity distribution in
(a) Young’s double-slit interference
(b) single- slit diffraction and
(c) double-slit diffraction
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 127
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 128

Question 67.
State the characteristics of a single-slit diffraction pattern.
Answer:
Characteristics of a single-slit diffraction pattern :

  1. The image cast by a single-slit is not the expected purely geometrical image.
  2. For a given wavelength, the width of the diffraction pattern is inversely proportional to the slit width.
  3. For a given slit width a, the width of the diffraction pattern is proportional to the wavelength.
  4. The intensities of the non-central, i.e., secondary, maxima are much less than the intensity of the central maximum.
  5. The minima and the non-central maxima are of the same width, Dλ/a.
  6. The width of the central maximum is 2Dλ/a. It is twice the width of the non-central maxima or minima.

Question 68.
Explain briefly the double-slit diffraction pattern.
Answer:
The double-slit diffraction pattern is determined by the diffraction patterns due to the individual slits, and by the interference between them.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 129

We can see narrow interference fringes similar to those obtained in Young’s double-slit experiment. These fringes vary in brightness and the shape of their envelope as that of the single-slit diffraction pattern.

Question 69.
What should be the order of the size of an obstacle or aperture to produce diffraction of light?
Answer:
For pronounced diffraction, the size of an obstacle or aperture should be of the order of the wavelength of light or greater.
[Note : For diffraction from a single slit of width a with monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the condition for first minimum (dark fringe) is
sin θ1 = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
When a = λ, θ1 = 90° and the central maximum spreads over 180°; then, while the diffraction is maximum, no fringe pattern is seen at all.

When a » X (say, a is of the order of a centimetre or more), θ1 is so small that there is practically no diffraction and the illuminated region on the screen is almost as given by geometrical optics. However, diffraction pattern due to a straight-edge will always be seen at the edge of the illuminated region. Hence, for an observable fringe pattern due to a single slit, a should be of the order of X with a > λ..]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 70.
Solve the following.

Question 1.
Plane waves of light from a sodium lamp are incident on a slit of width 2 μm. A screen is located 2 m from the slit. Find the spacing between the first secondary maxima of two sodium lines as measured on the screen.
(Given : λ1 = 5890 Å and 2 = 5896 Å)
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 130
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 131
This is the required spacing.

Question 2.
The diffraction pattern of a single slit of width 0. 5 cm is formed by a lens of focal length 40 cm. Calculate the distance between the first dark and the next bright fringe from the axis. The wavelength of light used is 4890 Å.
Solution :
Data : a = 0.5 cm = 0.5 × 10-2 m,
D \(\simeq\) f = 40 cm = 0.4 m, λ = 4890 Å = 4.890 × 10-7 m
The distance between the first dark fringe and the next bright fringe = \(\frac{\lambda D}{2 a}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 132

Question 3.
Light of wavelength 6000 Å is incident on a slit of width 0.3 mm. A screen is placed parallel to the slit 2 m away from the slit. Find the position of the first dark fringe from the centre of the central maximum. Also, find the width of the central maximum.
Solution :
Data : λ = 6 × 10-7 m, a = 0.3 mm = 3 × 10-4 m,
D = 2 m
The distance ym of the m th minimum from the centre of the central maximum is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 133
The first dark fringe is 4 mm from the centre of the central fringe.
∴ Half-width of the central maximum = 4 mm
∴ The width of the central maximum = 2 × 4 mm = 8 mm

Question 4.
In a single-slit diffraction pattern, the distance between the first minimum on the right and the first minimum on the left is 5.2 mm. The screen on which the pattern is displayed is 80 cm from the slit and the wavelength of light is 5460 Å. Calculate the slit width.
Solution :
Data : y1 (minimum, right) + y1 (minimum, left)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 134

Question 5.
In a single-slit diffraction pattern, the distance between the first minimum on the right and the first minimum on the left of the central maximum is 4 mm. The screen is 2 m from the slit and the wavelength of light used is 6000 Å. Calculate the width of the slit and the width of the central maximum.
Solution :
Data : y1 (minimum, right) + y1 (minimum, left)
= 4 mm = 4 × 10-3 m, D = 2 m, λ = 6 × 10-7 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 135

Question 6.
Determine the angular spread between the central maximum and first order maximum of the diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width 0.25 mm, when light of 6650 Å is incident on it normally.
Solution:
Data : λ = 6650 Å = 6650 × 10-10m, a = 0.25 mm
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 136
This is the required angular spread.

Question 71.
Explain and define the resolving power of an optical instrument.
Answer:
Resolving power of an optical instrument:
The primary aim of using an optical instrument is to see fine details, whether observing a star system through a telescope or a living cell through a microscope. After passing through an optical system, light from two adjacent parts of the object should produce sharp, distinct (separate) images of those parts. The objective lens or mirror of a telescope or microscope acts like a circular aperture. The diffraction pattern of a circular aperture consists of a central bright spot (called the Airy disc and corresponds to the central maximum) and concentric dark and bright rings.

Light from two close objects or parts of an object after passing through the aperture of an optical system produces overlapping diffraction patterns that tend to obscure the image. If these diffraction patterns are so broad that their central maxima overlap substantially, it is difficult to decide if the intensity distribution is produced by two separate objects or by one.

The resolving power of an optical instrument, e.g., a telescope or microscope, is a measure of its ability to produce detectably separate images of objects that are close together.

Definition : The smallest linear or angular separation between two point objects which appear just resolved when viewed through an optical instrument is called the limit of resolution of the instrument and its reciprocal is called the resolving power of the instrument.

Question 72.
State and explain Rayleigh’s criterion for minimum resolution.
Answer:
Rayleigh’s criterion for minimum resolution : Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are acceptably or just resolved if the centre of the central peak of one diffraction pattern is as far as the first minimum of the other pattern.

The ‘sharpness’ of the central maximum of a diffraction pattern is measured by the angular separation between the centre of the peak and the first minimum. It gives the limit of resolution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 137

Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are not resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is less than the limit of resolution. They are said to be just separate, or resolved, if the angular separation between the central peaks is equal to the limit of resolution. They are said to be well resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is more than the limit of resolution.

Question 73.
Explain the Rayleigh criterion for the limit of resolution for
(i) two linear objects
(ii) a pair of point objects.
Answer:
(i) The Rayleigh criterion for the limit of resolution for two linear objects : Consider, two self luminous objects or slits separated by some distance. Let λ be the wavelength of the light and a the width of the slits. As per the Rayleigh criterion, the first minimum of the diffraction pattern of one of the sources should coincide with the central maximum of the other. Thus, it is at the just resolved condition.
The angular separation dθ (position) of the first principal minimum is,
dθ = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\) …(1)
This angular separation between the two objects must be minimum as this minimum coincides with the central maximum of the other. This is called the limit of resolution of that instrument. It is written as,
limit of resolution, dθ = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
Minimum separation between the two linear objects that are just resolved, at distance D from the instrument is, ni
y = D(dθ) = \(\frac{D \lambda}{a}\) …(2)
It is the distance of the first minimum from the centre.

(ii) The Rayleigh criterion for the limit of resolution for a pair of point objects : The objects to be viewed through a microscope are often of the point-size. The diffraction pattern of such objects consists of a central bright spot called the Airy disc and corresponds to the central maximum surrounded by concentric dark and bright rings called Airy rings.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 138
If a red laser beam passes through a 90 µm pinhole aperture, the Airy disc and several orders (rings) of diffraction are as shown.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 143

According to Lord Rayleigh, for such objects to be just resolved, the first dark ring of the diffraction pattern of the first object should be formed at the centre of the diffraction pattern of the second object and vice versa. Thus, the minimum separation between the images on the screen should be equal to the radius of the first dark ring.
This is applicable to the eye, microscope, telescope, etc.

Question 74.
Define and explain the resolving power of a microscope. State the expressions for the resolving power of
(i) a microscope with a pair of non-luminous objects
(ii) a microscope with self luminous point objects.
OR
What is meant by the limit of resolution and the resolving power of a microscope?
Answer:
Definition : The limit of resolution of a microscope is the least separation between two-closely spaced points on an object which are just resolved when viewed through the microscope.

Definition : The resolving power of a microscope is defined to be the reciprocal of its limit of resolution.

In a compound microscope, the objective lens forms a real, magnified image of an object placed just beyond the focal length of the lens. The objective has a short focal length (for greater magnification) and is held close to the object so that it gathers as much of the light scattered by the object as possible.

Let a be the least separation between two point objects O and O’ viewed through an objective AB of a compound microscope. The medium between the object and the objective has a refractive index n. The images of the objects O and O’ are I and I’ respectively. In this case, the angular separation between the objects, at the objective is 2α. D is the diameter of the objective AB.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 144

According to the Rayleigh criterion, the first dark ring due to O’ should coincide with I and that of O should coincide with I’. The nature of illumination at a point on the screen is determined by the effective path difference at that point. Let us consider point I to be symmetric with respect to O. Paths of the extreme rays reaching I from O’ are O’AI and O’BI. The paths AI and BI are equal. Thus, the actual path difference is O’B – O’A.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 145
The enlarged view of the region around O and O’ is as shown.
From this,
path difference = DO’ + O’C
= 2a sin α

(i) Microscope with a pair of non-luminous objects (dark objects):
In actual practice, the objects O and O’ viewed through a microscope are illuminated by the same source. Often the eyepiece of the microscope is filled with some transparent material of refractive index n. Then the wavelength of light in this material is
λn = \(\frac{\lambda}{n}\) where λ is the wavelength of light in air.

In such a set up the path difference at the first dark ring in λn. Thus, from eq (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 146
The factor n sin a is called numerical aperture (NA). The resolving power of the microscope is
R = \(\frac{1}{a}\) = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{NA}}{\lambda}\) …. (3)

(ii) Microscope with self luminous point objects : Applying Abbe’s theory of Airy discs and rings to Fraunhofer diffraction due to a pair of self luminous point objects, the path difference between the extreme rays, at the first dark ring is 1.22 λ, thus, for the requirement of just resolution,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 147
The resolving power of the microscope is,
R = \(\frac{1}{a}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{NA}}{0.61 \lambda}\) …. (5)
When the value of a is minimum, the quality of resolution is high.
Notes:

  1. If f and D are the focal length and the diameter of the microscope objective.
    sin imax \(\simeq \frac{D / 2}{f}\) so that Eq. (3) can be written as resolving power = \(\frac{n D}{f \lambda}\)
  2. Ernst Abbe(1840 -1905), German physicist and developer of optical instruments.

Question 75.
Explain why microscopes of high magnifying power have oil filled (oil-immersion) objectives.
Answer:
Higher angular magnification of a high magnifying power microscope is of little use if the finer details in a tiny object are obscured by diffraction effects. Hence, a microscope of high magnifying power must also have a high resolving power.
Resolving power ot a microscope = \(\frac{2 n \sin \alpha}{\lambda}\)
Where α ≡ the half angle of the angular separation between the objects, at the objective lens. n ≡ the refractive index of the medium between the object and the objective, λ ≡ the wavelength of the light used to illuminate the object.

The factor n sin α is called the numerical aperture of the objective and the resolving power increases with increase in the numerical aperture. To increase α the diameter of the objective would have to be increased. But this increase in aperture would degrade the image by decreasing the resolving power. Hence, in microscopes of high magnifying power, the object is immersed in oil that is in contact with the objective. Usually cedarwood oil having a refractive index 1.5 (close to that of the objective glass) is used. Closeness of the refractive indices also reduces loss of light by reflection at the objective lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 76.
On what factors does the resolving power of a microscope depend? How can it be increased?
Answer:
Resolving power of a microscope
= \(\frac{2 n \sin \alpha}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{NA}}{\lambda}\)

where, α ≡ the half angle of the angular separation between the objects at the objective lens. n ≡ the refractive index of the medium between the object and the objective, λ ≡ the wavelength of the light used to illuminate the object, NA = n sin α = the numerical aperture of the objective.

Thus, the resolving power of a microscope depends directly on the NA and inversely on λ.
The resolving power is increased by,

  1. increasing the numerical aperture using oil-immersion objective.
  2. illuminating the object with smaller wavelength radiation. But our eyes are not very sensitive to the shorter wavelength blue end of the visible spectrum. Hence, ultraviolet radiation is used for illumination with quartz lenses, but then photographs must be taken to examine the image.

Question 77.
With a neat ray diagram, explain the resolving power of a telescope. On what factors does it depend ?
OR
What is meant by the angular limit of resolution and resolving power of a telescope?
Answer:
The resolving power of a telescope is defined as the reciprocal of the angular limit of resolution between two closely-spaced distant objects so that they are just resolved when seen through the telescope.

Consider two stars seen through a telescope. The diameter (D) of the objective lens or mirror corresponds to the diffracting aperture. For a distant point source, the first diffraction minimum is at an angle θ away from the centre such that
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 148

Dsin θ = 1.22 λ
where λ is the wavelength of light. The angle 9 is usually so small that we can substitute sin θ \(\approx\) θ (θ in radian). Thus, the Airy disc for each star will be spread out over an angular half-width θ = 1.22 λ/D about its geometrical image point. The radius of the Airy disc at the focal plane of the objective lens is r = fθ = 1.22fλ/D, where f is the focal length of the objective.

When observing two closely-spaced stars, the Rayleigh criterion for just resolving the images as that of two point sources (instead of one) is met when the centre of one Airy disc falls on the first minimum of the other pattern. Thus, the angular limit (or angular separation) of resolution is
θ = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\) … (1)

and the linear separation between the images at the focal plane of the objective lens is
y = fθ … (2)
∴ Resolving power of a telescope.
R = \(\frac{1}{\theta}\) = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\) … (3)

It depends

  1. directly on the diameter of the objective lens or mirror,
  2. inversely on the wavelength of the radiation.

Question 78.
How can the resolving power of a telescope be increased?
Answer:
The resolving power of an astronomical telescope depends directly on the diameter of the objective lens or mirror, and inversely on the wavelength of radiation. Hence, the resolving power can be increased by

  1. using an objective lens/mirror of larger diameter
  2. observing a celestial object at smaller wavelengths.

Question 79.
Define the resolving power of a telescope and state its formula. What are the advantages of using a large objective lens in an astronomical telescope:
Answer:
Definition: The resolving power of a telescope is defined as the reciprocal of the angular limit of resolution between two closely-spaced distant objects so that they are just resolved when seen through the telescope.
Formula : Resolving power of a telescope
R = \(\frac{1}{\theta}\) = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\)
where θ ≡ the minimum angular separation of two closely-spaced celestial objects or the angular limit of resolution, D ≡ the diameter of the objective lens of the telescope, λ ≡ the wavelengh of light.

Advantages of a large objective lens in an astronomical telescope :

  1. The resolving power is directly proportional to the diameter of the objective lens. Hence, a large objective lens results in a smaller Airy disc and a sharper image.
  2. It collects more of the incident radiation from a distant object which results in a brighter image.

Question 80.
What is the resolving power of a telescope if the diameter of the objective of the telescope is 1.22 m and the wavelength of light is 5000 Å ?
Answer:
Resolving power of the telescope = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\)
= \(\frac{1.22}{1.22 \times 5 \times 10^{-7}}\)
= \(\frac{10 \times 10^{6}}{5}\) = 2 × 106 rad-1

Question 81.
Briefly explain about radio telescope.
Answer:
A radio telescope is an astronomical instrument consisting of a radio receiver and an antenna system used to detect radio-frequency radiation emitted by extraterrestrial sources. The wavelength of radio-frequency radiation is very long. Hence, it is expressed in metre. In order to attain the resolution of an optical telescope, the radio telescope should be very large. A single disc of such large diameters is impracticable. In such cases arrays of antennae spread over several kilometres are used. Giant Metrewave Radio Telescope (GMRT) located at Narayangaon, Pune, Maharashtra uses such an array consisting of 30 dishes of diameter 45 m each. It spreads over 25 km. It is the largest distance between two of its antennae. The highest angular resolution achievable ranges from about 60 arcsec at the lowest frequency of 50 MHz to about 2 arcsec at 1.4 GHz.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 149

Question 82.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Light of wavelength 650 nm falls on the objective of a microscope having total angle of angular w separation as 60°. Calculate the resolving power of the microscope. [Refractive index of air = 1]
Solution :
Data : λ = 650 nm = 6.5 × 10-7m, n = 1,
2α = 60°
∴ α = 30°
Resolving power of the microscope = \(\frac{2 n \sin \alpha}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 1 \times \sin 30^{\circ}}{6.5 \times 10^{-7}}\) = \(\frac{10}{6.5}\) × 106

Question 2.
The semi vertical angle of the cone of the rays incident on the objective of a microscope is 20°. If the wavelength of incident light is 6600 Å, calculate the smallest distance between two points which can be just resolved.
Solution :
Data : α = 20°, λ = 6600 Å = 6.6 × 10-7 m, n = 1 (air) resolution between two closely-spaced distant objects so that they are just resolved when seen through the telescope.
Formula : Resolving power of a telescope
R = \(\frac{1}{\theta}\) = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\)
where θ ≡ the minimum angular separation of two closely-spaced celestial objects or the angular limit of resolution, D ≡ the diameter of the objective lens of the telescope, λ ≡ the wavelengh of light.

Advantages of a large objective lens in an astronomical telescope :

  1. The resolving power is directly proportional to the diameter of the objective lens. Hence, a large objective lens results in a smaller Airy disc and a sharper image.
  2. It collects more of the incident radiation from a distant object which results in a brighter image.

Question 83.
What is the resolving power of a telescope if the diameter of the objective of the telescope is 1.22 m and the wavelength of light is 5000 Å ?.
Answer:
Resolving power of the telescope = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 150

Question 84.
Briefly explain about radio telescope.
Answer:
A radio telescope is an astronomical instrument consisting of a radio receiver and an antenna system used to detect radio-frequency radiation emitted by extraterrestrial sources. The wavelength of radio-frequency radiation is very long. Hence, it is expressed in metre. In order to attain the resolution of an optical telescope, the radio telescope should be very large. A single disc of such large diameters is impracticable. In such cases arrays of antennae spread over several kilometres are used. Giant Metrewave Radio Telescope (GMRT) located at Narayangaon, Pune, Maharashtra uses such an array consisting of 30 dishes of diameter 45 m each. It spreads over 25 km. It is the largest distance between two of its antennae. The highest angular resolution achievable ranges from about 60 arcsec at the lowest frequency of 50 MHz to about 2 arcsec at 1.4 GHz.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 151

Question 85.
Solve the following :

Question 1.
Light of wavelength 650 nm falls on the objective of a microscope having total angle of angular separation as 60°. Calculate the resolving power of the microscope. [Refractive index of air = 1]
Solution :
Data : λ = 650 nm = 6.5 × 10-7m, n = 1, 2α = 60°
∴ α = 30°
Resolving power of the microscope = \(\frac{2 n \sin \alpha}{\lambda}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 152
= 1.538 × 106 m-1

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 2.
The semi vertical angle of the cone of the rays incident on the objective of a microscope is 20°. If the wavelength of incident light is 6600 Å, calculate the smallest distance between two points which can be just resolved.
Solution :
Data : α = 20°, λ = 6600 Å = 6.6 × 10-7 m, n = 1 (air)
The numerical aperture, NA = n sin α
= 1 × sin 20° = 0.3420
The limit of resolution for an illuminated object,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 153

Question 3.
What is the minimum distance between two objects which can be resolved by a microscope having the visual angle of 30° when light of wavelength 600 nm is used ?
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 154

Question 4.
The two headlights of an approaching automobile are 1.22 m apart. At what maximum distance will eye resolve them? Assume a pupil diameter of 5.0 mm and λ = 5500 Å. Assume also that this distance is determined only by the diffraction effect at the circular aperture.
Solution:
Data : y = 1.22 m, diameter D = 5 × 10-3 m,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 155
This is the required distance.

Question 5.
What is the minimum angular separation between two stars if a telescope is used to observe them with an objective of aperture 20 cm? The wavelength of light is 5900 Å.
Solution :
Data : D = 20 cm = 0.2 m,
λ = 5900 Å = 5.9 × 10-7 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 156
This is the required angular separation.

Question 6.
The diameter of the objective of a telescope is 10 cm. Find the resolving power of the telescope is 10 cm. Find the resolving power of the telescope if the wavelength of light is 5000 Å.
Solution :
Data : D = 10 cm = 0.1 m, λ = 5000 Å = 5 × 10-7 m
The resolving power of the telescope D 0.1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 157

Question 7.
A telescope has an objective of diameter 2.44 m. What is its angular resolution when it observes at 5500 A?
Solution :
Data : λ = 5500A = 5.5 × 10-7 m,
D = 2.44 m
Angular resolution. ∆θ = 1.22λ/D, D being the diameter of the aperture.
∴ ∆θ = 1.22 × 5.5 × \(\frac{10^{-7}}{2.44}\)= 2.75 × 10-7 rad
= 0.0567 arcsec

Question 8.
The minimum angular separation between two stars is 4 × 10-6 rad when a telescope is used to observe them with an objective of aperture 16 cm. Find the wavelength of the light.
Solution :
Data : θ = 4 × 10-6 rad, D = 16 cm = 0.16 m
θ = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\)
∴ The wavelength of the light used,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 158

Question 9.
Estimate the smallest angular separation of two stars which can be just resolved by the telescope having objective of diameter 25 cm. The mean wavelength of light is 555 nm.
Solution :
Data : λ = 555 nm 555 × 10-9 m
D = 25 cm = 25 × 10-2 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 159
= 2.708 × 10-6 rad
This is the required angular separation.

Question 86.
Huygens’ wave theory could not explain
(A) interference
(B) reflection
(C) photoelectric effect
(D) refraction.
Answer:
(C) photoelectric effect

Question 87.
The wavefront originating from a point source of light at finite distance is a wavefront.
(A) circular
(B) spherical
(C) plane
(D) cylindrical
Answer:
(B) spherical

Question 88.
In an isotropic medium, the secondary wavelets centred on every point of a given wavefront are all
(A) spherical
(B) cylindrical
(C) oval
(D) of arbitrary shape.
Answer:
(A) spherical

Question 89.
Consider a medium through which light is propagating with a speed v. Given a wavefront, in order to determine the wavefront after a time interval ∆t, the secondary wavelets are drawn with
a radius.
(A) of unit length
(B) v ∆ t
(C) \(\frac{\Delta t}{v}\)
(D) \(\frac{v}{\Delta t}\)
Answer:
(B) v ∆ t

Question 90.
Two points, equidistant from a point source of light, are situated at diametrically opposite positions in an isotropic medium. The phase difference between the light waves passing through the two points is
(A) zero
(B) π/2 rad
(C) π rad
(D) finite, but not these.
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 91.
Wavenormals to spherical wavefronts can be
(A) only diverging
(B) only converging
(C) parallel to each other
(D) diverging or converging.
Answer:
(D) diverging or converging.

Question 92.
Huygens’ principle is used to
(A) obtain the new position of wavefront geometrically
(B) explain the principle of superposition of waves
(C) explain the phenomenon of interference
(D) explain the phenomenon of polarization.
Answer:
(A) obtain the new position of wavefront geometrically

Question 93.
When a ray of light enters into water from air,
(A) its wavelength decreases
(B) its wavelength increases
(C) its frequency increases
(D) its frequency decreases.
Answer:
(A) its wavelength decreases

Question 94.
A parallel beam of light travelling in water is incident obliquely on a glass surface. After refraction, its width
(A) decreases
(B) increases
(C) remains the same
(D) becomes zero.
Answer:
(B) increases

Question 95.
Light of a certain colour has 1800 waves to the millimetre in air. What is its frequency in water?
[n = \(\frac{4}{3}\) for water]
(A) 1.67 × 106 Hz
(B) 4.05 × 1014 Hz
(C) 5.4 × 1014 Hz
(D) 7.2 × 1014 Hz.
Answer:
(C) 5.4 × 1014 Hz

Question 96.
A ray of light, in passing from vacuum into a medium of refractive index n, suffers a deviation d equal to half the angle of incidence. Then, the refractive index is
(A) sin δ
(B) 2 sin δ
(C) cos δ
(D) 2 cos δ.
Answer:
(D) 2 cos δ.

Question 97.
A ray of light passes from vacuum to a medium of refractive index n. The angle of incidence is found to be twice the angle of refraction. The angle of incidence is
(A) cos-1 \(\left(\frac{n}{2}\right)\)
(B) cos-1 (n)
(C) 2cos-1 \(\left(\frac{n}{2}\right)\)
(D) 2sin-1 \(\left(\frac{n}{2}\right)\).
Answer:
(C) 2cos-1 \(\left(\frac{n}{2}\right)\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 98.
If the polarizing angle for a given medium is 60°, then the refractive index of the medium is
(A) \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{3}}\)
(B) \(\frac{\sqrt{3}}{2}\)
(C) 1
(D) \(\sqrt{3}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\sqrt{3}\)

Question 99.
A narrow beam of light in air is incident on glass at an angle of incidence of 58°. If the reflected beam is completely plane polarized, the refractive index of the glass is
(A) 1.9
(B) 1.8
(C) 1.7
(D) 1.6.
Answer:
(D) 1.6.

Question 100.
Polarization of light CANNOT be produced by
(A) reflection
(B) double refraction
(C) dichroism
(D) diffraction.
Answer:
(D) diffraction.

Question 101.
A glass plate of refractive index 1.732 is to be used as a polarizer. Its polarizing angle is
(A) 30°
(B) 45°
(C) 60°
(D) 90°.
Answer:
(C) 60°

Question 102.
Light transmitted through a Polaroid P1 has an intensity I and is incident on a crossed Polaroid P2. The intensity of the light transmitted by P2 is
(A) zero
(B) \(\frac{1}{2}\)I
(C) I
(D) 2I.
Answer:
(A) zero

Question 103.
At points of constructive interference with maximum intensity of two coherent monochromatic waves (wavelength λ), the path difference between them is
(A) zero or an integral multiple of λ
(B) zero or an integral multiple of λ/2
(C) zero or an even integral multiple of λ/2
(D) an odd integral multiple of λ/2.
Answer:
(A) zero or an integral multiple of λ

Question 104.
Two sources of light are said to be coherent if light from them have
(A) the same speed and the same phase
(B) the same phase and the same or nearly the same amplitude
(C) constant phase difference and nearly the same frequency
(D) zero, or some constant, phase difference.
Answer:
(D) zero, or some constant, phase difference.

Question 105.
In a two-source interference pattern, the phase difference between the waves reaching a dark point in radian is (m = 1, 2, 3, …)
(A) 0
(B) mπ
(C) (2m – 1)\(\frac{\pi}{2}\)
(D) (2m – 1)π
Answer:
(D) (2m – 1)π

Question 106.
For destructive interference, the phase difference (in radian) between the two waves should be
(A) 0, 2π, π, …
(B) 0, 2π, 4π, …
(C) π, 3π, 5π, …
(D) \(\frac{\pi}{2}\), \(\frac{3 \pi}{2}\), \(\frac{5 \pi}{2}\), …..
Answer:
(C) π, 3π, 5π, …

Question 107.
For constructive interference, the phase difference (in radian) between the two waves should be
(A) 0, \(\frac{\pi}{2}\), π, …
(B) 0, 2π, 4π, …
(C) π, 3π, 5π, …
(D) \(\frac{\pi}{4}\), \(\frac{\pi}{2}\), \(\frac{3 \pi}{4}\), …..
Answer:
(B) 0, 2π, 4π, …

Question 108.
If λ is the wavelength of light used in Young’s double-slit experiment, the path difference for a phase difference of 11π rad is
(A) 23 λ
(B) 11 λ
(C) 11\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
(D) 23\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
Answer:
(C) 11\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)

Question 109.
The fringe width in an interference pattern is W. The distance between the 6th dark fringe and the 4th bright fringe on the same side of the central bright fringe is
(A) 1.5 W
(B) 2 W
(C) 2.5 W
(D) 10.5 W.
Answer:
(A) 1.5 W

Question 110.
Which of the following graphs shows the variation of the fringe width with the frequency of light in a two-source interference pattern ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 160
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 161

Question 111.
In an interference pattern using two coherent sources of light, the fringe width is
(A) directly proportional to the wavelength
(B) inversely proportional to the square of the wavelength
(C) inversely proportional to the wavelength
(D) directly proportional to the square of the wavelength.
Answer:
(A) directly proportional to the wavelength

Question 112.
Two slits, 2 mm apart, are placed 300 cm from a screen. When light of wavelength 6000 Å is used, the separation (in mm) between the successive bright lines of the interference pattern is
(A) 0.9
(B) 4.5
(C) 6
(D) 9.
Answer:
(A) 0.9

Question 113.
In two separate setups of Young’s double-slit experiment, the wavelengths of the lights used are in the ratio 1 : 2 while the separation between the slits are in the ratio 2 : 1. If the fringe widths are equal, the ratio of the distances between the slit and the screen is
(A) 1 : 4
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 2 : 1
(D) 4 : 1.
Answer:
(D) 4 : 1.

Question 114.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the slit separation is reduced to half while the distance of the screen from the slits is increased by 50%. In terms of the initial fringe width, W, the new fringe width is,
(A) \(\frac{1}{4}\) W
(B) \(\frac{3}{4}\) W
(C) \(\frac{3}{2}\) W
(D) 3 W.
Answer:
(D) 3 W.

Question 115.
A pair of slits 1.5 mm apart is illuminated with monochromatic light of wavelength 5500 Å and the interference pattern is obtained on a screen 1.5 m from the slits. The least distance of a point from the central maximum where the intensity is minimum is
(A) 0.275 mm
(B) 0.55 mm
(C) 2.75 mm
(D) 5.5 mm.
Answer:
(A) 0.275 mm

Question 116.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, if a thin transparent sheet covers one of the slits, the optical path of the wave from that slit
(A) increases
(B) decreases
(C) changes by \(\frac{D}{d}\) (nm – 1)t
(D) is not affected.
Answer:
(A) increases

Question 117.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, if a thin mica sheet of thickness t and refractive index nm covers one of the slits, the optical path of the wave from that slit
(A) increases by (nm – 1 )t
(B) decreases by (nm – 1) t
(C) changes by \(\frac{D}{d}\) (nm – 1) t
(D) is not affected.
Answer:
(A) increases by (nm – 1 )t

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 118.
In a two-slit intereference experiment, if a thin transparent sheet of thickness f and refractive index nm covers both the slits, the optical path difference between the two interfering waves
(A) increases by (nm – 1)t
(B) decreases by (nm – 1)t
(C) changes by \(\frac{D}{d}\)(nm – 1)t
(D) is not affected.
Answer:
(D) is not affected.

Question 119.
In a biprism experiment two interfering waves are produced by division of
(A) amplitude
(B) wavefront
(C) amplitude and wavefront
(D) neither wavefront nor amplitude.
Answer:
(B) wavefront

Question 120.
In Fresnel’s biprism experiment, with the eyepiece 1 m from the two coherent sources, the fringe width obtained is 0.4 mm. If just the eyepiece is moved towards the biprism by 25 cm, then the fringe width
(A) decreases by 0.01 mm
(B) decreases by 0.1 mm
(C) increases by 0.01 mm
(D) increases by 0.1 mm.
Answer:
(B) decreases by 0.1 mm

Question 121.
In a biprism experiment, keeping the experimental setup unchanged, the fringe width
(A) increases with increase in wavelength
(B) decreases with increase in wavelength
(C) increases with decrease in wavelength
(D) remains unchanged with change in wavelength.
Answer:
(A) increases with increase in wavelength

Question 122.
In finding the distance between the two coherent sources in Fresnel’s biprism experiment by the conjugate foci method, one uses
(A) a long focus convex lens that forms real images of the virtual sources
(B) a short focus concave lens that forms real images of the virtual sources
(C) a short focus convex lens that forms virtual images of the virtual sources
(D) a short focus convex lens that forms real images of the virtual sources.
Answer:
(D) a short focus convex lens that forms real images of the virtual sources.

Question 123.
Using a light of wavelength 4800 Å in Fresnel’s biprism experiment, 21 fringes are obtained in a given region. If light of wavelength 5600 Å is used, the number of fringes in the same region will be
(A) 14
(B) 18
(C) 21
(D) 24.
Answer:
(B) 18

Question 124.
To obtain pronounced diffraction with a single slit illuminated by light of wavelength λ, the slit width should be
(A) of the same order as λ
(B) considerably larger than λ
(C) considerably smaller than λ
(D) exactly equal to λ/2.
Answer:
(B) considerably larger than λ

Question 125.
In single-slit diffraction, which of the following are equal ?
(A) Widths of all bright and dark fringes
(B) Intensities of non-central bright fringes
(C) Widths of non-central bright fringes
(D) Both widths and intensities of noncentral bright fringes.
Answer:
(C) Widths of non-central bright fringes

Question 126.
In single slit diffraction (at a narrow slit of width a), the intensity of the central maximum is
(A) independent of a
(B) proportional to a
(C) proportional to a2
(D) inversely proportional to a.
Answer:
(D) inversely proportional to a.

Question 127.
For a single slit of width a, the diffraction pattern minima are located at angles θm, where m is a positive, non-zero integer. Which of the following expressions is most correct ?
(A) a sin θm = mλ
(B) a sin θm = \(\frac{m \lambda}{2}\)
(C) a sin θm = (2m + 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
(D) a sin θm = (2m – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
Answer:
(A) a sin θm = mλ

Question 128.
In a diffraction pattern due to a single slit of width a with incident light of wavelength λ, at an angle of diffraction θ, the condition for the first minimum is
(A) λ sin θ = a
(B) a cos θ = λ
(C) a sin θ = λ
(D) λ cos θ = a.
Answer:
(C) a sin θ = λ

Question 129.
The fringes produced in a diffraction pattern are of
(A) equal width with the same intensity
(B) unequal width with varying intensity
(C) equal intensity
(D) equal width with varying intensity.
Answer:
(B) unequal width with varying intensity

Question 130.
For a single slit of width a, the first diffraction maximum with light of wavelength λ subtends an angle θ such that sin θ is equal to
(A) \(\frac{\lambda}{2 a}\)
(B) \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
(C) \(\frac{1.5 \lambda}{a}\)
(D) \(\frac{2 \lambda}{a} .\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{1.5 \lambda}{a}\)

Question 131.
Fraunhofer diffraction pattern of a parallel beam of light (wavelength λ) passing through a narrow slit (width a) is observed on a screen using a convex lens (focal length f). The angular half-width of the central fringe is
(A) \(\frac{2 \lambda f}{a}\)
(B) \(\frac{\lambda f}{a}\)
(C) \(\frac{2 \lambda}{a}\)
(D) \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)

Question 132.
A parallel beam of light (λ = 5000 Å) is incident normally on a narrow slit of width 0.2 mm. The angular separation between the first two minima is
(A) 2.5 × 10-3 degree
(B) 2.5 × 10-3 rad
(C) 5 × 10-3 degree
(D) 5 × 10-3 rad.
Answer:
(B) 2.5 × 10-3 rad

Question 133.
A parallel beam of light (λ = 5000 Å) is incident normally on a narrow slit of width 0.2 mm. The Fraunhofer diffraction pattern is observed on a screen placed at the focal plane of a convex lens (f = 20 cm). The first two minima are separated by
(A) 0.005 cm
(B) 0.05 cm
(C) 2.5 mm
(D) 5 mm.
Answer:
(B) 0.05 cm

Question 134.
A plane wave of wavelength 5500 Å is incident normally on a slit of width 2 × 10-2 cm. The width of the central maximum on a screen 50 cm away is
(A) 2.50 × 10-3 cm
(B) 2.75 × 10-3 cm
(C) 2.75 × 10-3 m
(D) 5.50 × 10-3 m.
Answer:
(D) 5.50 × 10-3 m.

Question 135.
If NA is the numerical aperture of a microscope objective, then its resolving power with an illumination of wavelength λ is
(A) \(\frac{0.5 \lambda}{\mathrm{NA}}\)
(B) \(\frac{0.61 \lambda}{\mathrm{NA}}\)
(C) \(\frac{1.22 \mathrm{NA}}{\lambda}\)
(D) \(\frac{2 \mathrm{NA}}{\lambda}\)
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{0.5 \lambda}{\mathrm{NA}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 136.
A microscope with numerical aperture 0.122 is used with light of wavelength 6000 A. The limit of resolution is
(A) 3.33 × 106 m
(B) 3.33 mm
(C) 3 × 10-6 m
(D) 3 × 10-7 m.
Answer:
(C) 3 × 10-6 m

Question 137.
The objective lens of a telescope has a diameter D. The angular limit of resolution of the telescope for light of wavelength λ is
(A) \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\)
(B) \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\)
(C) \(\frac{D}{0.61 \lambda}\)
(D) \(\frac{0.61 \lambda}{D} .\)
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\)

Question 138.
Two closely-spaced distant stars are just resolved when seen through a telescope with an objective lens of diameter D and focal length f. The separation between their images is given by.
(A) \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda f}\)
(B) \(\frac{f \mathcal{D}}{1.22 \lambda}\)
(C) \(\frac{1.22 \lambda f}{D}\)
(D) \(\frac{1.22 D \lambda}{f}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{1.22 \lambda f}{D}\)

Question 139.
High magnifying power microscopes have oil-immersion objectives
(A) to increase the fringe width
(B) to increase the numerical aperture of the objective
(C) to decrease the wavelength of light
(D) because oil does not damage the observed sample.
Answer:
(B) to increase the numerical aperture of the objective

Question 140.
If the numerical aperture of a microscope is increased, then its
(A) resolving power decreases
(B) limit of resolution decreases
(C) resolving power remains constant
(D) limit of resolution increases
Answer:
(B) limit of resolution decreases

Question 141.
The numerical aperture of the objective of a microscope is 0.12. The limit of resolution, when light of wavelength 6000 A is used to view an object, is
(A) 0.25 × 10-7 m
(B) 2.5 × 10-7m
(C) 25 × 10-7 m
(D) 250 × 10-7 m.
Answer:
(C) 25 × 10-7 m

Question 142.
The resolving power of a refracting telescope is increased by
(A) using oil-immersion objective
(B) increasing the diameter D of the objective lens
(C) resorting to short-wavelength radiation
(D) increasing D and using smaller λ.
Answer:
(D) increasing D and using smaller λ.

Question 143.
The resolving power of a telescope of aperture 100 cm, for light of wavelength 5.5 × 10-7 m, is
(A) 0.149 × 107
(B) 1.49 × 107
(C) 14.9 × 107
(D) 149 × 107
Answer:
(A) 0.149 × 107

Question 144.
The resolving power of a telescope depends upon the
(A) length of the telescope
(B) focal length of the objective
(C) diameter of the objective
(D) focal length of the eyepiece.
Answer:
(C) diameter of the objective

Question 145.
If a is the aperture of a telescope and 2 is the wavelength of light then the resolving power of the telescope is
(A) \(\frac{\lambda}{1.22 a}\)
(B) \(\frac{1.22 a}{\lambda}\)
(C) \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{a}\)
(D) \(\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{a}{1.22 \lambda}\)

Question 146.
Using a monochromatic light of wavelength 2 in Young’s double-slit experiment, the eleventh dark fringe is obtained on the screen for a phase difference of
(A) \(\frac{11}{2}\) π rad
(B) \(\frac{21}{2}\) π rad
(C) 13 π rad
(D) 21 π rad
Answer:
(D) 21 π rad

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 1.
What was Dalton’s atomic theory of chemistry?
Answer:
John Dalton (1766-1844), British meteorologist, in his atomic theory of chemistry (1808-1810) proposed the following postulates :
(1) Matter consists of very small indivisible particles called atoms.
(2) Each element consists of a characteristic kind of identical atoms. There are consequently as many different kinds of atoms as there are elements.
(3) When different elements combine to form a compound, the smallest unit of the compound consists of a definite number of atoms of each element. These ‘compound atoms’ are now called molecules.
(4) In chemical reactions, atoms are neither created nor destroyed, but only rearranged.

Question 2.
Explain Thomson’s model of the atom. What are its drawbacks?
Answer:
The first model of the atom with a sub-structure was put forward in 1898 by Sir J.J. Thomson (1856-1940), a British physicist. According to this model, an atom consists of a sphere with a uniform distribution of positive charge and electrons embedded in it such that the atom is electrically neutral and stable.

Drawbacks : This model, known as the plumpudding model, failed to account for the observed scattering of α-particles and spectra of various elements.
[Note : It can be shown that the Thomson atom cannot be stable.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 3.
Who suggested the famous a-particle scattering experiment? Why?
Answer:
Sir Ernest Rutherford (1871-1937), New Zealand- British physicist, following his pioneering work on radioactivity and properties of a-particles, had noted that a narrow stream of α-particles gets somewhat broadened or scattered on passing through a thin metal foil or mica sheet. Since most of the α-particles remained undeviated, this suggested that atoms could not be solid spheres as proposed in Thomson’s model and kinetic theory of gases. To probe into the effects of the distribution of an atom’s mass and charge on the a-particles, he suggested his collaborator Geiger and the latter’s student Marsden to see if any α-particles are scattered through a large angle.

Question 4.
With the help of a neat labelled diagram, describe the Geiger-Marsden experiment.
Answer:
The Geiger-Marsden a-scattering (or gold foil) experiment (1908) : Geiger and Marsden made a stream of a-particles strike a very thin gold foil about 40 jum thick. Their apparatus is shown schematically in figure.

Apparatus: A radium compound, an intense source of a-particles, was placed in the lead enclosure B, provided with a small hole. The stream of α-particles was collimated by lead bricks. The number of particles scattered through each angle θ were counted by a rotatable detector. The detector consisted of a small zinc sulphide screen S at the focus of a low power microscope M. Each incidence produced a scintillation-a momentary pinpoint of fluorescence. These scintillations were observed and counted using the microscope.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 1
Geiger-Marsden experiment of scattering of a-particles by a gold foil

Observations: Most of the α-particles passed through the foil almost undeviated, with less than 0.2% deflected by more than 1°. Still smaller fractions were found to be deflected by 90° or more, sometimes almost straight back towards the source.

Rutherford quantitatively accounted for the distribution of small and large angle scattering by considering each scattering to be a single collision of an a-particle with a positive ‘central charge’ Ne concentrated at a point. Since the probability of an a-particle coming very close to such a point charge was small, this explained the very small number of a-particles deflecting through large angles.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 2
Scattering of a-particles by a gold foil

[Notes : (1) Hans Wilhelm Geiger (1882-1945), German physicist and Sir Ernest Marsden (1889-1970), English-New Zealand physicist. (2) In 1908 and 1909, they conducted a series of a-scattering experiments with gold and silver foils of different thicknesses and a thick platinum plate. Rutherford reported (in 1911) that “about 1 in 20000 were turned through 90° on passing through a gold foil about 40 nm thick.” The number ‘1 in 8000’ was reported (in 1909) by Geiger and Marsden for reflection off a thick platinum plate ‘at large angle.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 5.
Explain Rutherford’s model of the atom.
Answer:
Rutherford’s model of the nuclear atom (1911) :
(1) An atom has a very small nucleus which contains all the positive charge and almost all the mass of the atom.
(2) The nuclear size (radius about 10-14 m) is very small compared to the atomic size (radius about 10-10m), about 10000 times smaller.
(3) Electrons revolve in circular orbits around the nucleus. The electrostatic force (Coulomb force) of attraction between the positively charged nucleus and the negatively charged electron is the centripetal force required for the orbital motion of the electron.
(4) Since an atom as a whole is electrically neutral, the positive charge on the nucleus must be equal to the total negative charge of all the orbiting electrons.
As this model resembles the solar system, it is known as the planetary atom model.

Question 6.
Solve the following :
(1) An a-particle having a kinetic energy of 8 MeV is projected directly toward the nucleus of an atom of \(\begin{gathered}
208 \\
82
\end{gathered}\)Pb. Find the distance of closest approach.
(e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2)
Solution :
Data : e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, Z(Pb) = 82, ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2, (KE)α = 8 MeV
If d is the distance of closest approach, we must have, by the principle of conservation of energy, initial kinetic energy of the a-particle = potential energy of the a-particle when it is at the distance d from the centre of the nucleus of
\(\begin{gathered}
208 \\
82
\end{gathered}\) Pb.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 3

(2) An α-particle projected directly toward the nucleus of an atom of \(\begin{gathered}
208 \\
82
\end{gathered}\)Pb comes to rest momentarily at the surface of the nucleus. Find the initial kinetic energy and speed of the α-particle.
[m(α) = 6.68 × 10-27 kg, r1(α) = 1.8 × 10-15 m, r2(Pb) = 7.11 × -15 m, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}}\) = 9 × 109 N-m2/C2]
Solution:
For reference, see the solved problem (1) above.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 4
This is the initial speed of the α-particle.
[Note : 3.564 × 107 m/s is about 12% of the speed of light in vacuum.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 7.
What is the emission spectrum of a substance? Explain in brief.
Answer:
The emission spectrum of a substance is the distribution of electromagnetic radiations emitted by the substance when it is heated, or bombarded by electrons, or ions or photons. The distribution is arranged in order of increasing (or decreasing) frequency (or wavelength) and is characteristic of the substance unless the temperature of the substance is very high when the distribution is continuous. The spectrum may be a line spectrum or band spectrum. The intensities corresponding to different frequencies are different.
[Note : The absorption spectrum is formed by absorption of electromagnetic radiation when the substance is exposed to radiation of all frequencies.]

Question 8.
State and explain the formula that gives wavelengths of lines in the hydrogen spectrum.
Answer:
Formula : \(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left[\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right]\), where λ is the wavelength of a line in the hydrogen spectrum, R is a constant, now called the Rydberg constant, and n and m are integers with n = 1,2,3,… and m = n + 1, n + 2, n + 3,
For a fixed value of n, λ decreases as m increases and has minimum value as m → ∞ λ = \(\frac{n^{2}}{R}\) as
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 5
Lyman, Balmer and Paschen series in the hydrogen spectrum (For reference only)
[Note : A line spectrum is atomic in origin. It is a signature of the element, i.e., we can determine the elements present in a mixture of elements by studying the line spectrum of the mixture.]

Question 9.
State the equations corresponding to Bohr’s atomic model.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 6
Here, me is the mass of the electron, e is the electron charge, Z is the atomic number of the atom, rn is the radius of the nth stable orbit, vn is the speed of the electron in the nth orbit and ε0 is the absolute premittivity of free space. In hydrogen, Z = 1.
me vn rn = n\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\) …………… (2)
[Angular momentum of the electron]

where n ( = 1, 2, 3, …) is the positive integer, called the principal quantum number, and h is Planck’s constant, n denotes the number of the orbit.
Em – En = hv …………. (3)

Here, Em is the energy of the electron in the mth orbit, En is the energy of the electron in the nth orbit (m > n), hv is the energy of the photon emitted and v is the frequency of the electromagnetic radiation emitted.
[Note : Niels Bohr (1885-1962), Danish theoretical physicist, made significant contribution to atomic and
nuclear physics.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 10.
What is the minimum angular momentum of the electron in an hydrogen atom?
Answer:
\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\).

Question 11.
Which physical quantity of an atomic electron has the dimensions same as that of h?
Ans.
Angular momentum.

Question 12.
What is meant by a stationary orbit?
Answer:
In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, a stationary orbit refers to any of the discrete allowed orbits such that the electron does not radiate energy while it is in such orbits.

Question 13.
Derive an expression for the linear speed of an electron in a Bohr orbit. Hence, show that it is inversely proportional to the principal quantum number.
Answer:
Consider an electron revolving in the nth Bohr orbit around the nucleus of an atom with the atomic number Z. Let m and – e be the mass and charge of the electron, r the radius of the orbit and v the linear speed of the electron.

According to Bohr’s first postulate, centripetal force on the electron = electrostatic force of attraction exerted on the electron by the nucleus.
∴ \(\frac{m v^{2}}{r}=\frac{Z e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r^{2}}\) ………….. (1)
where ε0 is the permittivity of free space.
∴mv2 = \(\frac{Z e^{2}}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0} r}\) ………….. (2)
According to Bohr’s second postulate, the orbital angular momentum of the electron is quantized :
mvr = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\) ………… (3)
where h is Planck’s constant and n is the principal quantum number which takes integral values 1, 2, 3, …, etc.
∴ r = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi m v}\)
Substituting this expression for r in Eqn (2), we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 7
as Z, e, ε0 and h are constants.
[Note : In this topic, unless stated otherwise, m = me, r = rn, and v = vn.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 14.
What is the angular momentum of the electron in the third Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom ?
[\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\) = 1.055 × 10-34 kg∙m2/s
Answer:
Angular momentum, L = mvr = \(\frac{nh}{2 \pi}\)
For n = 3, L = 3(\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)) = 3 (1.055 × 10-34)
= 3.165 × 10-34 kg∙m2/s

Question 15.
Derive an expression for the radius of the nth Bohr orbit in an atom. Hence, show that the radius of the orbit is directly proportional to the square of the principal quantum number.
Answer:
Consider an electron revolving in the nth orbit around the nucleus of an atom with the atomic number Z. Let m and – e be the mass and charge of the electron, r the radius of the orbit and v the linear speed of the electron.

According to Bohr’s first postulate, centripetal force on the electron = electrostatic force of attraction exerted on the electron by the nucleus.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 8
where h is Planck’s constant and n is the principal quantum number which takes integral values 1, 2, 3, …… etc.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 9
Since, ε0, h, Z, in and e are constants, it follows that r ∝ n2, i.e., the radius of a Bohr orbit of the electron in an atom is directly proportional to the square of the principal quantum number.

Question 16.
The radius of the first Bohr orbit in the hydro gen atom is 0.5315 Å. What is the radius of the second Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom?
Ans.
In the usual notation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 10
∴ r2 = 4r1 = 4 × 0.5315 = 2.125 Å is the required radius.
[Note : r1 is also denoted by a0.]

Question 17. Show that the angular speed of an electron in the nth Bohr model is ω = \(\frac{\pi m e^{4}}{2 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} h^{3} n^{3}}\) and the corresponding frequency of the revolution of the electron is f = \(\) .
Answer:
The radius of the nth Bohr orbit is
r = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} h^{2} n^{2}}{\pi m Z e^{2}}\) ………….. (1)
and the linear speed of an electron in this orbit is
v = \(\frac{Z e^{2}}{2 \varepsilon_{0} n h}\) ………….. (2)
where ε0 ≡ permittivity of free space, h ≡ Planck’s constant, n ≡ principal quantum number, m ≡ electron mass, e ≡ electronic charge and Z ≡ atomic number of the atom.

Since angular speed ω = \(\frac{v}{r}\), then from Eqs. (1) and (2) we get,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 11
which gives the required expression for the angular speed of an electron in the nth Bohr orbit.
From Equestion (3), the frequency of revolution of the electron,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 12

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 18.
The angular speed of an electron in the first orbit in H-atom is 4.105 × 1016 rad/s. Find the angular speed of the electron in the second orbit.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 13
= 5.131 × 1015 rad/s This is the required quantity.

Question 19.
The frequency of revolution of the electron in the second Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom is 8.158 × 1014 Hz. What is the frequency of revolution of the electron in the fourth Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom ?
Ans.
In the usual notation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 14

Question 20.
Show that the energy of the electron in the nth stationary orbit in the hydrogen atom is
En = -Rch/n2.
Answer:
The energy of the electron in the nth stationary orbit in the hydrogen atom is
En = \(-\frac{m e^{4}}{8 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} h^{2} n^{2}}\)
and the Rydberg constant is
R = \(\frac{m e^{4}}{8 \varepsilon_{0}^{2} h^{3} c}\)
where m = mass of electron, e = electronic charge, h = Planck’s constant, c = speed of light in free space and i, = permittivity of free space.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 15

Question 21.
State the limitations of Bohr’s atomic model.
Answer:
Limitations of Bohr’s atomic model:

  1. The model cannot explain the relative intensities of spectral lines even in the hydrogen spectrum.
  2. The model cannot explain the atomic spectra of many-electron atoms of higher elements.
  3. The model cannot account for the Zeeman effect and Stark effect (fine structure of spectral lines as revealed in the presence of strong magnetic field and electric field, respectively).

[Note : In 1896, Pieter Zeeman (1865-1943), Dutch physicist, discovered the splitting of spectral lines by magnetic field. In 1913, Johannes Stark (1874-1957), German physicist, discovered the splitting of spectral lines by electric field.]

Question 22.
Draw a neat, labelled energy level diagram for the hydrogen atom. Hence explain the different series of spectral lines for hydrogen.
Answer:
According to Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom, an atom exists most of the time in one of a number of stable and discrete energy states. The various states arranged in order of increasing energy constitute the energy level diagram of the atom, as shown in below figure for the hydrogen atom. Here, the higher (less negative) energies are at the top while the lower (more negative) energies are toward the bottom.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 16
According to Bohr’s theory, electromagnetic radiation of a particular wavelength is emitted when there is a transition of the electron from a higher energy state to a lower energy state. Let the quantum number n = m represent a higher energy state and n = n represent a lower energy state (m > n). The formation of the different series of spectral lines is explained from the energy level diagram.

(1) Lyman series : This series in the far UV region of the spectrum arises due to the transitions of the electron to n = 1 from m = 2, 3, 4, …, etc. The wavelengths (λ) of the spectral lines in this series are given by
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\) (m = 2, 3, 4, ……….,∞)
where R is the Rydberg constant.

(2) Balmer series : This series in the visible region of the spectrum arises due to the transitions to n = 2 from m = 3, 4, 5, …, etc. The wavelengths (λ) of the spectral lines in this series are given by
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{2^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\) (m = 3, 4, 5, …. ∞)

(3) Paschen, Brackett and Pfiind series : These three series in the infrared region of the spectrum arise due to the transitions to n = 3, 4 and 5, respectively from m=n + 1, n + 2, etc. The wavelengths (λ) of the lines are given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 17
In each series, the smallest quantum of radiation (smallest frequency, longest wavelength) arises from the transition from m = n +1 to n, and the largest quantum (highest frequency, shortest wavelength — short wavelength limit or series limit) is for the transition from m = ∞ to n.
[Notes :
(1) The lines in the Lyman and Balmer series, beginning with the longest wavelength, are labelled with the Greek letters α, β, γ, δ, ε, …. Thus, the lines in the Lyman series are called Lα, Lβ, Lγ, Lδ … lines while those in the Balmer series are called Hα, Hβ, Hγ, Hδ, … lines. Thus, the Lα, line has a wavelength λ, where
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 18

(2) The first four prominent hydrogen lines (Hα, Hβ, Hγ, Hδ) lie in the visible region and were discovered in the solar spectrum by Anders Angstrom (the first three in 1862 and the fourth in 1871); he also measured their wavelengths to high accuracy.

Johann Jakob Balmer (1825 – 98), Swiss mathema-tician, discovered in 1884 that their wavelengths fitted
the relation λ = \(\frac{B m^{2}}{m^{2}-4}\), where m has integral values 3, 4, 5 and 6 for successive lines and B here is a constant equal to 3645.6 Å. This is Balmer’s formula; originally empirical, it pointed to the need to find an explanation. This led through Rydberg’s work to Bohr’s theory.

(3) Lyman series was discovered between 1906-14, Paschen series in 1908, Brackett series in 1922 and Pfiind series in 1924. A sixth, and the last of the named series in the hydrogen spectrum, is the Humphreys series which results from transitions to n = 6 from m = 7, 8, 9, … etc. The Paschen series lies in the near-infrared region while Pfiind and Humphreys series lie in the far-infrared region.

Further series are unnamed but follow the same pattern. Their lines are increasingly faint showing that they correspond to increasingly rare atomic events.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 23.
Obtain the expressions for longest and shortest wavelengths of spectral lines in ultraviolet region for hydrogen atom.
Answer:
For hydrogen,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 19
where R is the Rydberg constant, and m and n are the principal quantum numbers of the initial and final energy states. The Lyman series in the far UV region of the spectrum arises due to the transitions of the electron to n = 1 from,m = 2, 3,4, …, etc.
For the longest wavelength λ in the Lyman series, m = 2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 20

Question 24.
How many spectral series are possible in the hydrogen spectrum?
Answer:
Infinite. The last (sixth) of the named series in the hydrogen spectrum is the Humphreys series which results from transitions to nf = 6 from ni = 7, 8, 9, … etc. in the far-infrared region. Further series are unnamed but follow the same pattern. Their lines are increasingly faint showing that they correspond to increasingly rare atomic events.
[Note : There are infinite number of lines in each series. The spacing between adjacent lines decreases with decreasing wavelength, converging to the so-called series limit or short-wavelength limit.]

Question 25.
The energy of the electron in the first Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. What is its energy in the second and third Bohr orbit?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 21

Question 26.
The potential energy of the electron in the first Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom is -27.2 eV. What is its kinetic energy and binding energy in the same orbit?
Answer:
Kinetic energy = –\(\frac{\text { potential energy }}{2}=-\frac{27.2}{2}\)
= 13.6 eV and
binding energy = – total energy – (potential energy + kinetic energy)
= – (-27.2 + 13.6) = 13.6 eV

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 27.
Obtain the ratio of the longest wavelength of spectral line in the Paschen series to the longest wavelength of spectral line in the Brackett series.
Answer:
The Bohr formula for the wave number of a spectral line in the hydrogen spectrum is
\(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\)
where is the wavelength of the emitted radiation when the electron jumps from a higher energy state of principal quantum number m to a lower energy state of principal quantum number n. R is the Rydberg constant.

The Paschen series and Brackett series of spectral lines arise due to the transitions to n = 3 and m = 4, respectively. The longest wavelength lines (λ and λBx) in these series arise due to the transitions from m =4 and m = 5, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 22

Question 28.
Obtain the ratio of the wavelength of the Hα line to the wavelength of the Hγ. line in the Balmer series.
Ans.
The Bohr formula for the wave number of a spectral line in the hydrogen spectrum is
\(\bar{v}=\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\)
where λ is the wavelength of the emitted radiation when the electron jumps from a higher energy state of principal quantum number m to a lower energy state of principal quantum number n. R is the Rydberg constant.

The Balmer series of spectral lines arises due to the transitions to n = 2. The Hα and Hγ lines in this series arise due to the transitions from m = 3 and 5, respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 23

Question 29.
On the basis of the de Broglie hypothesis, obtain Bohr’s condition of quantization of angular momentum.
Answer:
By the de Broglie equation, the wavelength associated with an electron having momentum p = mv is
λ = \(\frac{h}{p}=\frac{h}{m v}\) ……….. (1)
In a hydrogen atom in its ground state, the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron is the same as the circumference of the first Bohr orbit. Therefore, the electron orbit in a hydrogen atom in its ground state corresponds to one complete electron wave joined on itself.

Thus, a stationary orbit can be intepreted as one which can accommodate an integral number of de Broglie wavelength so that the associated matter wave will be in phase with itself and constructive interference will allow a standing wave along the orbit.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 24
Therefore, for a stationary Bohr orbit of circumference 2πr,
2πr = nλ
where n is a positive integer.
∴ 2πr = \(\frac{n h}{m v}\) …………. [From Eqn (1)]
∴ Angular momentum, L = mvr = n(\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\))
which is just the Bohr condition of angular momentum quantization for stable or allowed orbits.

30. Solve the following :
Data: e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, me = 9.1 × 10-31 kg, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, c = 3 × 108 m/s. I eV = 1.6 × 10-19 J, ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 F/m, R = 1.097 × 107 m 1, 1/4πε0 = 9 × 109 N∙m2/C2

Question 1.
The radius of the first orbit of the electron in a hydrogen atom is 0.53 Å. Find the centripetal force acting on the electron.
Solution:
Data : r = 5.3 × 10-11 m
The centripetal force on the electron = the electrostatic force between the proton and electron
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 25

Question 2.
Calculate the angular momentum of the electron in the third Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom.
Solution:
Data: n = 3
The angular momentum, L = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
= \(\frac{3\left(6.63 \times 10^{-34}\right)}{2(3.142)}\) = 3.165 × 10-34 kg.m2/s

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 3.
Calculate the potential energy of the electron in the second Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom in electron volt. The radius of the Bohr orbit is 2.12 Å.
Answer:
Data : r = 2.12 × 10-10 m
The potential energy of the electron
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 26

Question 4.
Calculate the radius of the first Bohr orbit in the hydrogen atom. [ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2 e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, m(electron) = 9.1 × 10-31 kg, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s]
Solution:
Data : ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2 e = 1.6 × 10-19 C,
h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, m = 9.1 × 10-31 kg
The radius of a Bohr orbit,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 27
This is the radius of the third Bohr orbit in a hydrogen atom.

Question 5.
Find the ratio of the diameter of the first Bohr orbit to that of the fourth Bohr orbit in a hydrogen atom.
Solution:
The radius of a Bohr orbit,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 28

Question 6.
Calculate the frequency of revolution of the electron in the second Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom. The radius of the orbit is 2.14 Å and the speed of the electron in the orbit is 1.09 × 106 m/s.
Solution:
Data: r = 2.14Å = 2.14 × 10-10 m, v = 1.09 × 106 m/s
v = ωr = (2πf)r
∴ The frequency of revolution of the electron in the second Bohr orbit,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 29

Question 7.
The speed of the electron in the first Bohr orbit (in H atom) of radius 0.5 Å is 2.3 × 106 m/s. Calculate the period of revolution of the electron in this orbit.
Solution:
Data: r = 0.5 Å = 5 × 1011 m, v = 2.3 x 106 m/s
Period of revolution of the electron,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 30

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 8.
The energy of the electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. Find its KE and PE in the same state.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 31

Question 9.
An electron is orbiting in the 3rd Bohr orbit in H atom. Calculate the corresponding ionization energy, if the ground state energy is – 13.6 eV.
Solution:
Data : E1 = -13.6 eV, n1 = 1, n3 = 3, E = 0 eV
The energy of the electron in the nth Bohr orbit,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 32

Question 10.
Find the energy of the electron in the fifth Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom. [Energy of the electron in the first Bohr orbit -13.6 eVI
Solution:
Data : E1 = -13.6 eV
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 33

Question 11.
Calculate the energy of the electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom. Express it in joule and in eV.
[melectron = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2]
(3 marks)
Solution:
Data: m = 9.11 × 10-31 kg, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 C2/N∙m2
The energy of electron in nth Bohr orbit is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 34

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 12.
The energy of the electron in an excited hydrogen atom is – 0.85 eV. Find the corresponding angular momentum of the electron.
[h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, π = 3.142, E1 = -13.6 eV]
Solution :
Data : En = – 0.85 eV, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙ s, π = 3.142, E1 = -13.6 eV
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 35

Question 13.
A photon of energy 12.75 eV is absorbed by an electron in the ground state of a hydrogen atom and raises it to an excited state. Find the quantum number of this state.
Solution:
Data : hv = 12.75 eV
The energy of the electron in the ground state of the hydrogen atom, E1 = -13.6 eV
On absorbing a photon of energy hv = 12.75 eV,
its final energy state is
E1 = Ei + hv = – 13.6.+ 12.75 = -0.85 eV
En = \(-\frac{13.6}{n^{2}}\) eV
∴ Ef = -0.85 = \(-\frac{13.6}{n^{2}}\)
∴ n = \(\sqrt{\frac{13.6}{0.85}}\) = 4
∴ The principal quantum number of the final state of the electron = 4

Question 14.
Determine the linear momentum of the electron in the second Bohr orbit in a hydrogen atom. Hence determine the linear momentum in the third Bohr orbit.
Solution:
The linear speed of the electron in the nth Bohr orbit,
vn = \(\frac{e^{2}}{2 \varepsilon_{0} n h}\)
∴ The linear momentum of the electron in the second orbit,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 36

Question 15.
A quantum of monochromatic radiation of wavelength λ is incident on an hydrogen atom that takes it from the ground state to the n = 3 state. Find λ and the frequency of the radiation.
[E1 = -13.6 eV, E3 = -1.51 eV]
Solution :
Data : ni = 3, nf = 1, E1 = -13.6 eV, E3 = 1.51 eV, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, e = 1.602 × 10-19 C, c = 3 × 108 m/s
The energy of the incident radiation,
hv = E3 – E1
∴ The frequency of the incident radiation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 37

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 16.
A hydrogen atom undergoes a transition from a state with n = 4 to a state with n = 1. Calculate the change in the angular momentum of the electron and the wavelength of the emitted radiation.
[h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, R = 1.097 × 107 m-1]
Solution :
Data : h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, R = 1.097 × 107 m-1
(i) The angular momentum of the electron in the nth orbit of the hydrogen atom is
Ln = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
The change in the angular momentum when the electron jumps from the 4th orbit to the 1st orbit is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 38

Question 17.
Find the Rydberg constant given the energy of the electron in the second orbit in hydrogen atom is -3.4 eV.
Solution:
Data: E2 = -3.4 eV = -3.4 × 1.6 × 10-19 J, h = 6.63 × 10-34 J∙s, c = 3 × 108 m/s
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 39

Question 18.
Find the energy of the electron in eV in the third Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom.
[R = 1.097 × 107 m -1, c = 3 × 108 m/s, h = 6.63 × 10-19 J∙s, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C]
Solution:
Data : n = 3, R = 1.097 × 107 m -1, c = 3 × 108 m/s, h = 6.63 × 10-19 J∙s, e = 1.6 × 10-19 C
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 40

Question 19.
Calculate the wavelength of the first two lines of the Balmer series in the hydrogen spectrum.
Solution :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 41
∴ The wavelength of the second Balmer line,
λ = \(\frac{16}{3.291}\) × 10-7 = 4.862 × 10-7 m = 4862 Å

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 20.
The wavelength of H line of the Balmer series is 4860Å. Calculate the wavelength of the Balmer Hx line.
Solution:
Data : λβ = 4860 Å
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 42

Question 21.
The short wavelength limit of the Lyman series is 911.3 Å. Compute the short wavelength limit of the Balmer series.
Solution:
Data : λ∞L = 911.3 Å
The wavelengths of the lines in the Lyman series are given by
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{1^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\) (m = 2, 3, 4, ……..)
For the shortest wavelength line, m = ∞. Therefore, the short wavelength limit of the Lyman series is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 43

Question 22.
The second member of the Balmer series for the hydrogen atom has wavelength 4860 Å. Calculate Rydberg’s constant.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 44

Question 23.
Find the shortest wavelength of the Paschen series, given that the longest wavelength of the Balmer series in the hydrogen spectrum is 6563 Å.
Solution:
Let λ and λP∞ be the wavelength of the first line, i.e., the longest wavelength line, of the Balmer series and the shortest wavelength of the Paschen series, respectively.
Data : λ = 6560 Å
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 45

Question 24.
Find the longest wavelength in the Paschen series. [R = 1.097 × 107 m-1]
Solution:
Data: R = 1.097 × 107 m-1
\(\frac{1}{\lambda}=R\left(\frac{1}{n^{2}}-\frac{1}{m^{2}}\right)\)
For the longest wavelength line in the Paschen series, m = 4 and n = 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 46

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 25.
Find the ratio of the longest to shortest wavelengths in the Paschen series.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 47

Question 26.
Find the ratio of the longest wavelength in the Paschen series to the shortest wavelength in the Balmer series.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 77

Question 27.
Compute the shortest and the longest wavelength in the Lyman series of hydrogen atom.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 49

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 28.
The wavelength of the first line of the Balmer series is 6563 Å. Calculate the wavelength of the first line of (i) the Lyman series (ii) the Paschen series.
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 50
∴ The wavelength of the first line of the Lyman series,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 51

Question 31.
Name the constituents of an atomic nucleus. What is a nucleon?
Answer:
The constituents of an atomic nucleus are (1) the proton, a positively charged particle (2) the neutron, a neutral (uncharged) particle. The term nucleon (nuclear constituent) refers to a proton as well as a neutron.

[Note : The electron was discovered by J. J. Thomson in 1897. The proton was discovered by Ernest Rutherford in 1919. The neutron was discovered in 1932 by James Chadwick (1891-1974), British physicist. The existence of the neutron and the deuteron was predicted by Rutherford in 1920. The proton has a mass about 1836 times that of the electron, but the magnitude of the electric charge is the same for both. The mass of the neutron is slightly more than that of the proton.]

Question 32.
Define (i) atomic number (ii) mass number. Give their symbols.
Answer:

  1. The number of protons in the nucleus of an atom of an element is called the atomic number of the element. It is also known as the proton number.
    It is denoted by Z.
  2. The number of nucleons (protons and neutrons) in the nucleus of an atom is called the mass number or the atomic mass number. It is denoted by A.

[Notes : (i) The number of neutrons in the nucleus of an atom is known as the neutron number, denoted by N. It is usually greater than Z, with the exceptions of helium (2 protons, 2 neutrons) and hydrogen (1 proton, no neutron) (ii) A = Z + N.]

Question 33.
Write the atomic symbol for an element giving the atomic number and mass number. Give two examples. Which of the two numbers is characteristic of the element? Why?
Answer:
An atom is represented as \(\frac{A}{Z}\)X, where X is the chemical symbol for the element, Z is the atomic number and A is the mass number.
Examples : Fluorine, \(\begin{aligned}
&19 \\
&9
\end{aligned}\)F; Phosphorus, \(\begin{aligned}
&31 \\
&15
\end{aligned}\)P; Gold, \(\begin{aligned}
&197 \\
&79
\end{aligned}\)Au.

The atomic number of an element, which is the number of protons in the nucleus of an atom of the element, is characteristic of the element. It equals the number of electrons in the atom and hence determines the chemical properties of the element and its place in the modern periodic table.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 34.
What are isotopes? Give an example.
Answer:
Atoms of an element having the same atomic number (Z) but different mass numbers (A) are called the isotopes of that element.

Isotopes of an element have different neutron numbers but the same chemical properties.

Example : Hydrogen has three isotopes, namely, hydrogen \( (\begin{aligned}
&1 \\
&1
\end{aligned}\) H), deuterium \( (\begin{aligned}
&2 \\
&1
\end{aligned}\) D) and tritium \( (\begin{aligned}
&3 \\
&1
\end{aligned}\) T). Deuterium and tritium have one and two neutrons in their nuclei, respectively, in addition to the single proton (Z = 1).

Question 35.
What are isobars? Give an example.
Answer:
Atoms of different elements that have the same mass number (A) but different atomic numbers (Z) are called isobars.

Although isobars have the same mass number, they are different elements because the chemical nature of an element is determined by its atomic number. Isobars have different neutron numbers.

Example : \(\begin{array}{r}
13 \\
6
\end{array}\)C and \(\begin{array}{r}
13 \\
7
\end{array}\)N are isobars. They have
the same mass number, A (viz., 13), but their different proton numbers, Z (6 and 7) make them different elements.

Question 36.
What are isotones? Give an example.
Answer:
Atoms of different elements that have the same neutron number (N) but different atomic numbers (Z) are called isotones.

Although isotones have the same neutron number, they are different elements because the chemical nature of an element is determined by its atomic number.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 52

Question 37.
What is unified atomic mass unit? Express it in J/c2 and MeV/c2.
Answer:
The unified atomic mass unit is an accepted but non-SI unit of mass. It is defined to be equal to \(\frac{1}{12}\) of the mass of a free atom of the isotope of carbon with mass number 12 which is at rest and in its ground state. It is denoted by u.

Its value in SI unit is obtained experimentally. 1 u = 1.660538782 (83) × 10-27 kg, with the standard uncertainty in the last two digits given in v parenthesis.
Taking, 1 u = 1.660538782 × 10-27 kg
c = 2.99792458 × 108 m/s,
e = 1.602176462 × 10-19 C and
using the relation E = me2 { ≡ m ≡ E / c2),
we get, 1 u = 1.49241783 × 10-10 J/c2
≅ 1.492 × 10-10 J/c2
and 1 u = 931.494042 MeV / c2
≅ 931.5 MeV/c2

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 38.
How is the nuclear size determined ? State the relation between nuclear size (radius) and mass number.
Answer:
The nuclear size is determined from particle scattering experiments using fast electrons or neutrons. The de Broglie wavelength of the bombarding electrons or neutrons should be less than the radius of the nucleus under study.

It is found that the volume of a nucleus is directly proportional to the mass number A, i.e., to the number of nucleons in the nucleus. For many purposes, nuclei may be assumed to be spherical.
Thus, a nucleus of radius R has a volume \(\frac{4}{3}\) πR3
∴ R3 ∝ A or R ∝ A\(\frac{1}{3}\)
∴ R = R0A\(\frac{1}{3}\)
where R0 ≈ 1.2 × 10-15 m = 1.2 fm.
∴ R ≈ 1.2 AA\(\frac{1}{3}\) fm

[Note : A nucleus does not have a sharp boundary. Also, electron scattering and neutron scattering yield slightly different values of R0. Hence, the relation above is only representative of effective nuclear size. 1 femtometre or 1 fm = 10-15 m; an earlier non-SI unit of the same value called fermi, in honour of Enrico Fermi (1901-54), Italian-US nuclear physicist, is no longer accepted in SI.]

Question 39.
Nuclear density is essentially the same for all nuclei. Justify.
Given 1 u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg and R0 ≈ 1.2 fm, estimate the nuclear density.
Answer:
Relative atomic mass rounded to the nearest integral value equals the atomic mass number A. Thus, ignoring the masses of the atomic electrons and binding energies, nuclear mass expressed in unified atomic mass unit = A u. Also, it is experimentally found that the volume of a nucleus is directly proportional to the mass number A. As both nuclear mass and volume are proportional to the mass number, nuclear density is essentially the same for all nuclei.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 53
The order of nuclear density is 1017 kg/m3.

[Note : Some stars, with masses between 1.4\(M_{\odot}\) and 3\(M_{\odot}\), where \(M_{\odot}\) denotes the mass of our Sun, undergo supernova at the end of their active life and collapse into neutron stars of densities comparable with nuclear v density.]

Question 40.
Define mass defect and state an expression for it.
Answer:
The difference between the sum of the masses of all the individual nucleons in a nucleus and the mass of the nucleus is known as the mass defect.

Mass defect, ∆m = (Zmp + Nmn) – M where mp is the proton mass, mn is the neutron mass, M is the mass of the nucleus, Z is the atomic number and N = A – Z is the neutron number.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 41.
Explain the term nuclear binding energy and express it in terms of mass defect. What is binding energy per nucleon? Write the expression for it.
Answer:
In the atomic nucleus, the protons and the neutrons are bound together by a strong, short range and charge independent, attractive force called the nuclear force. It is necessary to supply energy to break the nucleus. The minimum energy required to separate a nucleus into its free constituents, i.e., protons and neutrons, is known as the nuclear binding energy. It is the mass energy of the nucleons minus the mass energy of the nucleus.

The mass defect of a nucleus, of mass M, mass number A, proton number Z and neutron number N = A – Z, is
∆m = (Zmp + Nmn) – M
where, mp is the proton mass and mn is the neutron mass. Then, from Einstein’s mass-energy relation,
nuclear binding energy = ∆mc2
= [(Zmp -(- Nmn) – M] c2 (in joule)
= [(Zmp + Nmn) – M] \(\frac{c^{2}}{e}\) (in eV)

where c is the speed of light in free space and e is the elementary charge. In calculations using the above equations, mp is replaced by mH (mass of hydrogen atom). M is taken to be the atomic mass and not nuclear mass because the electron masses cancel out and the difference in electronic binding energies can be ignored as these are 106 times smaller than the nuclear binding energy.
∴ Nuclear binding energy
≅ [(ZmH + Nmn) – Matom] c2 (in joule)
The minimum energy required on the average to separate a nucleon from a given nucleus is called the binding energy per nucleon for that nucleus. It is the nuclear binding energy for a nucleus divided by its mass number.
∴ Binding energy per nucleon = \(\frac{\Delta m c^{2}}{A}\)
= [(Zmp + Nmn) – M] \(\frac{c^{2}}{A}\)
≅ [(ZmH + Nmn) – Matom] \(\frac{c^{2}}{A}\)

Question 42.
What is the significance of binding energy per nucleon?
Answer:
The greater the binding energy per nucleon in a nucleus, the greater is the minimum energy needed to remove a nucleon from the nucleus. Thus, binding energy per nucleon indicates the stability of a nucleus.

[Note : The binding energy per nucleon is high when both Z and N are even numbers, and such nuclei are most common. Nuclei with both Z and N odd are very rare.]

Question 43.
What are stable nuclei? What decides nuclear stability? What are the properties of nuclear force?
Answer:
Those nuclei which for certain combinations of neutrons and protons do not spontaneously disintegrate are called stable nuclei. There are two aspects that decide the stability of a nucleus. Firstly, the existence of nuclear energy levels implies certain configurations to achieve potential energy minimum, and secondly, the balance of forces.

Just like energy levels in atoms, nuclear energy levels are filled in sequence obeying the exclusion principle. Thus, there is a tendency for N to equal Z, or to have both even Z and even N.
Properties of the nuclear force :
(1) The nucleons in a nucleus are held .together by the attractive strong nuclear force. This force is much stronger than gravitational force and electromagnetic force.

(2) Nucleons interact strongly only with their nearest neighbours because the nuclear force has an extremely short range. Gravitational force and electromagnetic force are long range forces. They tend to zero only when the separation between two particles tends to infinity.

(3) Inside a nucleus, this force appears to be the same between two protons, a proton and a neutron, and two neutrons. However, between two protons there is also Coulomb repulsion which has a much longer range and, therefore, has appreciable magnitude throughout the entire nucleus. In nuclei having 2 ≤ Z ≤ 83, with neutrons present, the nuclear force is strong enough to overcome the Coulomb repulsion.

For light nuclei (A < 20), N ≥ Z, but is never smaller (except in \(\begin{aligned} &1 \\ &1 \end{aligned}\)H and \(\begin{aligned} &3 \\ &2 \end{aligned}\)H). However, with more than about 10 protons, an excess of neutrons is required to form a stable nucleus; for high atomic numbers, N/Z = 1.6. For Z > 83, even an excess of neutrons cannot prevent spontaneous disintegration and there are no stable nuclei.
[Note : The strength of the nuclear force is evident from the nuclear binding energy.]

Question 44.
Draw a neat labelled graph showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon as a function of mass number. What can we infer from the
graph?
Answer:
Figure shows the plot of the binding energy per nucleon (BE/A, in MeV per nucleon) against mass number A.

From Figure, we can draw the following inferences :
(1) The greater the binding energy per nucleon, the more stable is the nucleus because greater is the minimum energy needed to remove a nucleon. Thus, the nuclei appearing high on the plot are more tightly bound.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 54

(2) BE/A has a maximum value of about 8.8 MeV per nucleon at A = 56 (56Fe nuclide) and then decreases to 7.6 MeV per nucleon at A = 238 (238U nuclide). Thus, the iron nuclide 56Fe has the maximum binding energy per nucleon and is the most stable nuclide. Also, the peak at A = 4 shows that the 4He nucleus (α particle) has higher binding energy per nucleon compared to its neighbours in the periodic table and is exceptionally stable.

(3) The increase in BE /A as A decreases from 240 to 60 shows that if a heavy nucleus splits into two medium-sized fragments, each of the new nuclei will have more BE / A than the original nucleus. The binding energy difference, which can be very large, will then be released. The process of splitting a heavy nucleus is called nuclear fission. The energy released in a fission of 235U nucleus is about 200 MeV.

(4) Joining together, or fusing, two very light nuclei to form a single nucleus will also lead to larger BE/A in the new heavier nucleus. Again, the binding energy difference will be released. This process,which is called nuclear fusion, is also a very effective way of obtaining energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

45. Solve the following :
Question 1.
Find the nuclear radii of 206Pb and 208Pb.
Solution:
Data : R0 = 1.2 × 10-15 m
Nuclear radius, R=R0A\(\frac{1}{3}\)
(i) For 206Pb, A = 206
∴ R = (1.2 × 10-15) (206)\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 1.2 × 10-15 × 5.906
= 7.087 × 10-15 m = 7.087 fm

(ii) For 208 Pb, A = 208
∴ R = (1.2 × 10-15)(208)\(\frac{1}{3}\)
= 1.2 × 10-15 × 5.925
= 7.11 × 10-15 m = 7.11 fm

Question 2.
Given the atomic mass of the isotope of iron 56Fe is 55.93 u, find its nuclear density.
Solution :
Data : A = 56, m = 55.93 u = 55.93 × 1.66 × 10-27 kg, R0 = 1.2 × 10-15 m .
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 55

Question 3.
Given the nuclear radius of 16O is 3.024 fm, find that of 235U.
Solution:
Data : A1 = 16 and R1 = 3.024 fm (for 16O),
A2 = 235 (for 235U)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 56

Question 4.
The mass defect of He nucleus is 0.0304 u. Calculate its binding energy.
Solution:
Data: ∆m = 0.0304 u, 1 u = 931.5 \(\frac{\mathrm{MeV}}{c^{2}}\)
The binding energy of He nucleus
= ∆mc2
= 0.0304 × 931.5
= 28.32 MeV

Question 5.
Calculate the mass defect and binding energy of \(\begin{aligned}
&59 \\
&27
\end{aligned}\) Co which has a nucleus of mass 58.933 u. [Take mp = 1.0078 u, mn = 1.0087 u]
Solution:
Data: mp = 1.0078 u, mn = 1.0087 u, mCo = 58.933 u,
1 u = 931.5 \(\frac{\mathrm{MeV}}{c^{2}}\)
For \(\begin{aligned}
&59 \\
&27
\end{aligned}\)Co, A = 59, Z = 27
∴ N = A – Z = 59 – 27 = 32
The mass defect,
∆m=(Zmp + Nn) – mCo
= (27 × 1.0078 + 32 × 1.0087) – 58.933
= (27.2106 + 32.2784) – 58.933
= 59.4890 – 58.933 = 0.556 u
∴ The binding energy
= ∆mc2
= 0.556 uc2 × 931.5 \(\frac{\mathrm{MeV}}{uc^{2}}\) = 517.8 MeV

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 6.
Find the mass energy of a particle of mass 1 u in joule and electronvolt.
Solution:
Data : m = 1 u = 1.66 × 10-27 kg, c = 3 × 108 m/s,
1 eV = 1.602 × 10-19 J
The mass energy,
E = mc2
= (1.66 × 10-27) (3 × 108)8
= 1.66 × 9 × 10-11 n
= 1.494 × 10-10 J
= \(\frac{1.494 \times 10^{-10}}{1.602 \times 10^{-19}}\) eV
= 9.326 × 108 eV or 932.6 MeV
[Note : The answer differs from the accepted value of about 931.5 MeV because of the rounding off errors in the data used.]

Question 7.
Find the mass energy of a proton at rest in MeV. [mp = 1.673 × 10-27kg]
Solution:
Data : mp = 1.673 × 10-27 kg, c = 3 × 108 m/s,
1 eV = 1.602 × 10-19 J
∴ 1 MeV = 106 × 1.602 × 10-19 J = 1.602 × 10-13 J
The mass energy of a proton at rest,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 57

Question 8.
Find the mass energy of a particle of mass 1 g in joule.
Solution:
Data : m = 1 g = 1 × 10-3 kg, c = 3 × 108 m/s,
1 eV = 1.602 × 10-19 J
The mass energy,
E = mc2
= (1 × 10-3)(3 × 108)2
= 9 × 1013 J

Question 46.
What is radioactivity? OR Define radioactivity.
Answer:
Radioactivity is the phenomenon in which unstable nuclei of an element spontaneously distintegrate into nuclei of another element by emitting a or β particles accompanied by γ-rays. Such transformation is known as radioactive transformation or radioactive decay.

Question 47.
Who discovered radioactivity? Give a brief account of the first observation of radioactivity.
Answer:
Antoine Henri Becquerel (1852-1908), French physicist, discovered radioactivity in 1896.

He had kept photographic plates wrapped in a thick black paper in a drawer of his desk. Later, he also kept uranium salts near the photographic plates. After some days he developed the photographic plates and was surprised to find that they were fogged although he had protected them from light. Becquerel concluded that uranium salts must be emitting some invisible rays which affected the photographic plates. In this way, radioactivity was discovered by Becquerel.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 48.
What is a radioactive element? Give two examples of radioactive elements.
Answer:
The element which exhibits the property of radioactivity, i.e., spontaneous disintegration of unstable nuclei of the element by emission of α or β particles accompanied by γ-rays is called a radioactive element. Examples : Uranium, thorium, polonium, radium, actinium.

Question 49.
Name the three radioactive decay processes. State the nature of particle/radiation emitted in each process. What is meant by the Q value or Q factor of the decay?
Answer:
The processes by which a radioactive element can decay are :
(1) α-decay, by emission of an α-particle (\(\begin{aligned}
&4 \\
&2
\end{aligned}\) He nucleus),
(2) β-decay, by emission of an electron (\(\begin{aligned}
&0 \\
&-1
\end{aligned}\)e) or a positron \(\begin{aligned}
&0 \\
&1
\end{aligned}\)e), and

(3) γ-decay, by emitting electromagnetic radiations (γ-rays) of very short wavelength of about 10-12 m to 10-14 m.

In a radioactive decay, the difference in the energy equivalent of the mass of the parent atom and that of the sum of the masses of the products is called the Q value or Q factor of the decay. It is also called disintegration energy.

Question 50.
State the observations which lead to the conclusion that radioactivity is a nuclear phenomenon.
Answer:
The rate of disintegration of a radioactive material is not affected by changes in physical and chemical conditions such as (1) temperature and pressure (2) action of electric and magnetic fields (3) chemical composition of the material. The above changes affect the orbital electrons, but not the nucleus. Therefore, we conclude that radioactivity is a nuclear phenomenon.

Question 51.
State the nature and properties of a-particles.
Answer:
Nature of α-particles :
(1) An alpha particle is a helium nucleus, i.e., a doubly ionized helium atom. It consists of two protons and two neutrons.
(2) Mass of the α-particle ≅ 4u
Charge on the α-particle = 2 × charge on the proton
Properties of α-particles :
(1) Of the three types of radioactive radiations, α- particles have the maximum ionizing power. It is about 100 times that of β-particles and 104 times that of γ-rays.

(2) They have the least penetrating power, about 100 times less than that of β-particles and 104 times less than that of γ-rays. They can pass through very thin sheets of paper but are scattered by metal foils and mica. Since α-particles produce intense ionization in a medium, they lose their kinetic energy quickly. As a result, they do not penetrate more than a few centimetres (about 2.7 cm to 8.6 cm) in air under normal conditions.

(3) They are deflected by electric and magnetic fields since they are charged particles. Their deflection is less than that of β-particles in the same field.

(4) They affect photographic plates.
(5) They cause fluorescence in fluorescent materials such as zinc sulphide.
(6) They emerge from the nuclei with tremendous speeds in the range of \(\frac{1}{100}\)th to \(\frac{1}{10}\)th of the speed of light in free space.
(7) They destroy living cells.
[Note : α-rays and β-rays were discovered by Henri BecquereL]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 52.
State the nature and properties of β-particles.
Answer:
Nature of β-particles : A β-particle is an electron or a positron.
Properties of β-particles :

  1. β-particles have a moderate ionizing power. It is about 100 times less than that of α-particles, but 100 times more than that of γ-rays.
  2. They have a moderate penetrating power. It is about 100 times more than that of α-particles, but 100 times less than that of γ-rays.
  3. They are deflected by electric and magnetic fields. Their deflection is more than the deflection of α-particles in the same field but in the opposite direction.
  4. They affect photographic plates.
  5. They cause fluorescence in a fluorescent material such as zinc sulphide.
  6. Their energies and speeds are very high. Their speed is of the order of 108 m/s. Some β-particles have speeds of the order of 0.99 c, where c is the speed of light in free space.
  7. They cause more biological damage than α-particles, because they have more penetrating power.

[Note : When a nucleus emits an electron, one of its neutrons changes to a proton; the electron is accompanied by a neutral and almost massless particle called antineutrino \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{e}}\) with which the electron shares its energy and momentum. Hence, β-particles are emitted with speeds ranging from about 0 to 0.99 c.

The properties of a positron are identical to those of an electron except that it carries a positive charge of the same magnitude as an electron. A positron emission in a β+ decay is accompanied by a neutrino ve. A positron is an anti-particle of an electron, and an antineutrino is an antiparticle of neutrino.

The existence of a small neutral particle, emitted simultaneously with the electron in β-decay, was proposed in 1931 by Wolfgang Pauli (1900 -1958), Austrian-US theoretical physicist. It was confirmed experimentally in 1956 by Frederic Reines and Clyde Lorrain Cowan, Jr., US physicists. This neutral particle, that appears in β+ -decay, was called the neu-trino. It travels with a speed very close to that of light in free space. The existence of positron (in 1928) and other antiparticles was predicted by Paul Adrien Maurice Dirac (1902 – 84), British theoretical physicist. All these predictions were eventually confirmed experimentally; the positron was discovered in 1932 by Carl David Anderson, US physicist.]

Question 53.
State the nature and properties of γ-rays.
Answer:
Nature of γ-rays :

  1. γ-rays are electromagnetic waves of very short wavelength (about 10-12 m to 10-14 m).
  2. They are uncharged.

Properties of γ-rays :

  1. γ-rays produce feeble ionization. Their ionizing power is 104 times less than that of a-particles and 100 times less than that of β-particles.
  2. They have the maximum penetrating power. It is about 100 times that of β-particles and 104 times that of α-particles.
  3. They are not deflected by electric and magnetic fields as they are uncharged.
  4. They affect photographic plates.
  5. They cause fluorescence in a fluorescent material such as zinc sulphide.
  6. Their speed in free space is 3 × 108 m/s( the same as that of light waves and X-rays in free space).
  7. γ-rays can be diffracted by crystals. In recent times, γ-ray diffraction has emerged as a powerful tool in structural and defect studies of crystals.
  8. They destroy living cells and tissues and are used for destroying cancer cells.

[Note : γ-rays (not established clearly in Berquerel’s work) were discovered in 1900 by Paul Villard (1860-1934), French physicist.]

Question 54.
(a) What is α-decay? What is the consequence of an α-decay on a radioactive element? What is the Q value or Q factor in this case ?
Q = [mU – mTh – mα]c2
(b) What is β-decay ? What is the consequence of a β-decay on a radioactive element? What is the Q value or Q factor in this case ?
Answer:
(a) A radioactive transformation in which an a-particle is emitted is called α-decay.
In an α-decay, the atomic number of the nucleus decreases by 2 and the mass number decreases by 4.
Example : \({ }_{92}^{38} \mathrm{U} \rightarrow{ }_{90}^{234} \mathrm{Th}+{ }_{2}^{4} \alpha\)
Q = [mU – mTh – mα]c2

(b) A radioactive transformation in which a β-particle is emitted is called β-decay.
In a β -decay, the atomic number of the nucleus increases by 1 and the mass number remains unchanged.
Example : \({ }_{90}^{23} \mathrm{Th} \rightarrow{ }_{91}^{234} \mathrm{~Pa}+{ }_{-1}^{0} e+\bar{v}_{\mathrm{e}}\)
where \(\bar{v}_{\mathrm{e}}\) is the antineutrino emitted to conserve the momentum, energy and spin.
Q = [mTh – mPa – me]c2
In a β+-decay, the atomic number of the nucleus decreases by 1 and the mass number remains unchanged.
Example : \({ }_{15}^{30} \mathrm{P} \rightarrow{ }_{14}^{30} \mathrm{Si}+{ }_{+1}^{0} e+v_{\mathrm{e}}\)
where ve is the neutrino emitted to conserve the momentum, energy and spin.
Q = [mP – mSi – me]c2
[Note : The term fi particle refers to the electron (or positron) emitted by a nucleus.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 55.
Why are α- and β-particle emissions often accompanied by γ-rays?
Answer:
A given nucleus does not emit α- and βparticles simultaneously. However, on emission of α or β-particles, most nuclei are left in an excited state. A nucleus in an excited state emits a γ-ray photon in a transition to the lower energy state. Hence, α- and β-particle emissions are often accompanied by γ-rays.

Question 56.
State the law of radioactive decay and express it in the exponential form.
OR
State the law of radioactive decay. Hence derive the relation N = N0e-λt, where the symbols have their usual meanings.
OR
Show that the number of nuclei of a radioactive material decreases exponentially with time.
Answer:
Law of radioactive decay : At any instant, the rate of radioactive distintegration is directly proportional to the number of nuclei of the radioactive element present at that instant.

Derivation : Let N0 be the number of nuclei present at time t = 0, and N the number of nuclei present at time t.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 58
where λ is a constant of proportionality called the radioactive decay constant or the distintegration constant. It is a constant for a particular radioactive element. The minus sign indicates that N decreases as t increases.
Integrating Eqn (1),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 59
This is the exponential form of the law of radioactive decay. It shows that the number of nuclei present decreases exponentially with time.
[Note : This equation is also written in the form
N(t) = N0e-λt]

Question 57.
If the number of nuclei of a radioactive substance becomes \(\frac{1}{e}\) times the initial number in 10 days, what is the decay constant of the substance ?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 60

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 58.
What is meant by the activity of a sample of radioactive element? State the expression for it and also the units.
Answer:
The rate of disintegration of a sample of a radioactive element is called its activity. Let A denote the activity at time t and A0 the initial activity. Then,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 61
The SI unit of activity is called the becquerel (Bq) in honour of Henri Becquerel. 1 Bq = 1 disintegration per second.

The earlier unit, the curie (Ci) was based on the activity of 1 gram of 226Ra. 1 Ci = 3.7 × 1010 Bqn It was named after Marie Curie, Polish-bom French chemist.
[Note : Eqn (1) is also written in the form A (t) = A0e-λt]

Question 59.
Define half-life a radioactive element and obtain the relation between half-life and decay constant.
Answer:
The half-life of a radioactive element is defined as the average time interval during which half of the initial number of nuclei of the element disintegrate.

Let N0 be the number of nuclei of a radioactive element present at time t = 0 and N, the number of nuclei present at time t. From the law of radioactive decay,
N = N0e-λt
where λ is the decay constant of the element.
If T is the half-life of the element, then, N = \(\frac{N_{0}}{2}\) when t = T.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 62
This is the relation between the half-life and the decay constant of a radioactive element.

[Note : Radioactive decay law is statistical in nature and applicable only when the number of nuclei in the sample under consideration is very large. λ gives the probability that a nucleus of the element will decay in one second. We cannot know the exact number of nuclei that would decay in a given time interval. Hence, the use of the term average in the definition of half-time.]

Question 60.
What is meant by average life or mean life of a radioactive species ? How is it related to the half-life?
Answer:
Let N0 = number of nuclei present at time t = 0 and λ = decay constant of a radioactive species.
| dN | = | λNdt |. ∴ The number of nuclei decaying between time tand t + dt is λN0e-λtdt. The life time of these nuclei is t. The average life or mean life of a radioactive species is denoted by t and is, by definition,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 63

Question 61.
Define decay constant or distintegration constant of a radioactive element. If λ is the decay constant of a radioactive element, show that about 37% of the original nuclei remains undecayed after a time interval of λ-1.
Answer:
The decay constant or disintegration constant of a radioactive element is defined as the ratio of the disintegration rate at an instant to the number of undecayed nuclei of the element present at that instant.

Let N0 be the number of nuclei of a radioactive element present at time t = 0 and N, the number of undecayed nuclei at time t. From the radioactive law,
N = N0e-λt
where λ is the decay constant. At t = λ-1, the fraction of undecayed nuclei is
\(\frac{N}{N_{0}}\) = e-λ × λ-1 = e-1 = \(\frac{1}{e}\)
Since e ≅ 2.718,
\(\frac{N}{N_{0}}=\frac{1}{2.718}\) = 0.3679
Therefore, about 36.79% ≈ 37% of the original nuclei remains undecayed after a time λ-1. Since λ is the probability that a nucleus of the element will decay in one second, λ-1 gives the mean-life or the mean life time τ of the radioactive element measured in second; τ = λ-1.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 62.
Show graphically how the number of nuclei (N) of a radioactive element varies with time (t).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 64

Question 63.
The half-life of a radioactive material is 4 days. Find the time required for 1/4 of the initial number of radioactive nuclei of the element to remain undisintegrated.
Answer:
For t = nT, N = N0/ 2n. In this case, n = 2.
∴ f = 2T = 2 × 4 = 8 days is the required time.

Question 64.
A radioactive sample with half-life 2 days has initial activity 32 μCi. What will be its activity after 8 days?
Answer:
Here, t = 8d and T = 2d
∴ t =4T
For t = nT, N = N0/ 2n and activity ∝ N
∴ A = A0/24 = A0/16 = 32 /16
= 2 μCi is the required activity.

Question 65.
In successive radioactive decay if the decrease in mass number is 32 and the decrease in atomic number is 8, how many (i) α particles (ii) β particles are emitted in the process ?
Answer:

  1. Number of α-particles emitted = 32/4 = 8
  2. Number of β-particles emitted = 16 – 8 = 8.

66. Solve the following :
Question 1.
The decay constant of a radioactive substance is 4.33 × 10-4 per year. Calculate its half-life and average life.
Solution:
Data : λ = 4.33 × 10-4 per year
The half-life period of the radioactive substance.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 65

Question 2.
The half-life of \(\begin{array}{r}
226 \\
88
\end{array}\)Ra is 1620 y. Find its decay constant in SI unit.
Solution:
Data: T = 1620 y = 1620 × 365 × 8.64 × 104 s
= 5.109 × 1010 s
The decay constant of \(\begin{array}{r}
226 \\
88
\end{array}\)Ra is
λ = \(\frac{0.693}{T}=\frac{0.693}{5.109 \times 10^{10}}\) = 1.356 × 10-11 s-1

Question 3.
The half-life of \(\begin{array}{r}
210 \\
84
\end{array}\)Po is 138 d. Find the time required for 75% of the initial number of radio active nuclei of \(\begin{array}{r}
210 \\
84
\end{array}\)Po to disintegrate.
Solution:
Data: T = 138 d, = \(\frac{N}{N_{0}}=\frac{1}{4}\) (since only 25% of the
initial number of nuclei remains undisintegrated)
In one half-life (t = T), \(\frac{N}{N_{0}}=\frac{1}{2}\). In two half-lives (t = 2T), \(\frac{N}{N_{0}}=\frac{1}{4}\)
∴ The time for 75% of \(\begin{array}{r}
210 \\
84
\end{array}\)Po nuclei to disintegrate is 2T = 2 × 138 = 276 d.

Question 4.
Protactinium \(\begin{array}{r}
233 \\
91
\end{array}\)Pa decays to \(\frac{1}{5}\)th of its initial quantity in 62.7 days. Calculate its decay constant, mean-life and half-life.
Solution:
Data : \(\frac{N}{N_{0}}=\frac{1}{5}\), t = 62.7d
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 66

Question 5.
The half-life of \(\begin{array}{r}
210 \\
82
\end{array}\)Pb is 2.2.3 y. How long will it take for its activity to reduce to 30% of the initial activity?
Solution:
Data : T = 22.3 y, A = 0.3 A0
By the radioactive decay law,
N = N0e-λt
∴ λN = λN0e-λt
∴ λ = A0e-λt
where A0 = AN0 is the initial activity and A = λN is the activity at time t.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 67
∴It will take 38.75 y for the activity of \(\begin{array}{r}
210 \\
82
\end{array}\)Pb to reduce to 30% of the initial activity.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 6.
Radioactive sodium \(\begin{aligned}
&24 \\
&11
\end{aligned}\)Na has half-life of 15 h. Find its decay constant and mean-life. How much of 10 g of \(\begin{aligned}
&24 \\
&11
\end{aligned}\)Na will be left after 24 h?
Answer:
Data : T = 15 h, m0 = 10 g, t = 24 h
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 68
since mass of a sample is directly proportional to the number of atoms or nuclei present.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 69

Question 7.
Thorium \(\begin{gathered}
232 \\
90
\end{gathered}\)Th disintegrates into lead \(\begin{gathered}
200 \\
82
\end{gathered}\)Pb. Find the number of α and β particles emitted in the disintegration.
Solution:
An α-particle is a helium nucleus with mass number 4 and atomic number 2. In an α-decay, the mass number of the disintegrating nucleus decreases by 4 and its atomic number decreases by 2.

A β-particle is an electron with mass number 0 and atomic number – 1. In a β-decay, the mass number of the disintegrating nucleus remains unchanged and its atomic number increases by 1.

Let x α-particles and y ß-particles be emitted in the disintegration of \(\begin{gathered}
232 \\
90
\end{gathered}\)Th into \(\begin{gathered}
200 \\
82
\end{gathered}\)Pb.
\({ }_{90}^{232} \mathrm{Th} \stackrel{x \alpha+y \beta^{-}}{\longrightarrow}{ }_{82}^{200} \mathrm{~Pb}\)
∴ 232 – 4x – 0(y) = 200
∴ 4x = 232 – 200 = 32
∴ x = 8
Also, 90 – 2x + 1(y) = 82
∴ 90 – 2(8) + y = 82
∴ y = 82 + 16 – 90 = 8
∴ 8 α-particles and 8 ß-particles are emitted in the decay series of 232Th to 200Pb.

Question 67.
What is nuclear energy?
Answer:
Energy released in a nuclear reaction such as a spontaneous or induced nuclear fission, or nuclear fusion, or in interaction of two nuclei, is called nuclear energy.

[Note : It is far greater from that released in a chemical reaction.]

Question 68.
What is a nuclear reaction? Give one example.
Answer:
A reaction between the nucleus of an atom and a bombarding particle leading to the production of a new nucleus and, in general, the ejection of one or more particles is known as a nuclear reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 70

Question 69.
What are the quantities conserved in a nuclear reaction?
Answer:
The total momentum, energy, spin, charge and number of nucleons are conserved in a nuclear reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 70.
What is fission? Who discovered nuclear fission?
Answer:
Nuclear fission is a nuclear reaction in which a heavy nucleus of an atom, such as that of uranium, splits into two or more fragments of comparable size, either spontaneously or as a result of bombardment of a neutron on the nucleus (induced fission). It is followed by emission of two or three neutrons.

The mass of the original nucleus is more than the sum of the masses of the fragments. This mass difference is released as energy, which can be enormous as in the fission of 235U.

Nuclear fission was discovered by Lise Meitner, Otto Frisch, Otto Hahn and Fritz Strassmann in 1938.

[Notes : (1) Lise Meitner (1878-1968), Austrian- Swedish physicist and radiochemist. Otto Frisch (1904-79), Austrian-British physicist and Meitner’s nephew. Otto Hahn (1879-1968), German radiochemist. Friedrich Wilhelm “Fritz” Strassman (1902-1980), German chemist. (2) In 1934, Enrico Fermi bombarded uranium with neutrons to produce nuclear reactions leading to formation of transuranic elements (Z > 92). In the process, he had carried out nuclear fission, but he misinterpreted the results. The experiments and analysis carried out by Meitner, Hahn and Strassman, and the theoretical work by Meitner and Frisch led to the discovery of fission in 1938-39.

Frisch named the phenomenon fission. Fermi, for his work in the area of nuclear science, was awarded the 1938 Nobel Prize for physics. Hahn was awarded the 1944 Nobel Prize for chemistry; it was not shared by Meitner as her important role in the discovery of fission came to light much later. (3) The most abundant urnanium isotope 238U (abundance 99.28%) can be fissioned by neutrons with high kinetic energy (called fast neutrons), at least 1.3 MeV. 235U (abundance 0.72%) can be fissioned by thermal (or low energy) neutrons having kinetic energy about 0.025 eV. Some types of nuclear reactors require the natural uranium to be enriched to increase its 235U content to about 3%.]

Question 71.
What are the products of the fission of uranium 235 by thermal neutrons?
Answer:
The products of the fission of 235U by thermal neutrons are not unique. A variety of fission fragments are produced with mass number A ranging from about 72 to about 138, subject to the conservation of mass-energy, momentum, number of protons (Z) and number of neutrons (N). A few typical fission equations are
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 71

Question 72.
What is nuclear fusion? Give one example with an equation.
Answer:
A type of nuclear reaction in which lighter atomic nuclei (of low atomic number) fuse to form a heavier nucleus (of higher atomic number) with the’ release of enormous amount of energy is called nuclear fusion.

Very high temperatures, of about 107 K to 108 K, are required to carry out nuclear fusion. Hence, such a reaction is also called a thermonuclear reaction.

Example : The D-T reaction, being used in experimental fusion reactors, fuses a deuteron and a triton nuclei at temperatures of about 108 K.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 72
(2) The value of the energy released in the fusion of two deuteron nuclei and the temperature at which the reaction occurs mentioned in the textbook are probably misprints.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 73.
Give one area of application of (i) nuclear fission (ii) nuclear fusion.
Answer:
(i) Nuclear fission is used in (1) a nuclear reactor as very efficient and the least-polluting source of energy to generate electricity (2) atomic bombs.

(ii) Nuclear fusion is used in (experimental) fusion reactors to generate electricity without the hazards of radioactive radiations and radioactive pollution which happens with fission reactors. Nuclear fusion reactions in the interior of stars are the source of their energy output and the means of synthesis of higher elements like carbon, nitrogen and silicon from hydrogen and helium.

Question 74.
Explain the basic exothermic reaction in stars.
Answer:
The fusion of hydrogen nuclei into helium nuclei results in release of energy. It is the basic exothermic reaction in stars.
(1) The proton-proton cycle :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 73
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 74
The total energy released is 24.7 MeV.

Question 75.
What is a nuclear reactor?
Answer:
A nuclear reactor is a device in which a nuclear fission chain reaction is used in a controlled manner (i) to produce energy in form of heat which is then converted into electricity or (ii) to produce radioisotopes or (iii) to produce new nuclides using a suitable fissionable material such as uranium or plutonium.
In a uranium reactor, \(\begin{gathered}
235 \\
92
\end{gathered}\)U is bombarded by slow neutrons to produce \(\begin{gathered}
235 \\
92
\end{gathered}\)U which undergoes fission.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 76.
What is a chain reaction? How is it produced?
Answer:
A chain reaction is a self-multiplying process in which neutrons ejected in a nuclear fission strike neighbouring nuclei of fissionable material and cause more fissions.
A fission of \(\begin{gathered}
235 \\
92
\end{gathered}\)U nucleus by a thermal neutron leads to ejection of two or three neutrons (2.7 neutrons on an average) having high kinetic energy of about 2 MeV. The kinetic energy of at least one of these neutrons is lowered to about 0.025 eV by a suitable moderator and the neutron is used to cause further fission. The process continues and hence it is called a chain reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 75

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
The linear momentum of an electron in a Bohr orbit of an H-atom (principal quantum number n) is proportional to
(A) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\)
(B) \(\frac{1}{n}\)
(C) n
(D) n2.
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{1}{n}\)

Question 2.
The angular momenta of the electron in successive Bohr orbits differ by
(A) \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
(B) h
(C) \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)
(D) (n – 1)\(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)

Question 3.
The angular momentum of the electron in the second Bohr orbit of hydrogen atom is l. Its angular moementum in the third Bohr orbit is
(A) \(\frac{2}{3}\) l
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\) l
(C) 3l
(D) \(\frac{4}{3}\) l.
Answer:
(B) \(\frac{3}{2}\) l

Question 4.
The time taken by an electron moving with a speed of 2.18 × 106 m/s to complete one revolution in the first orbit (radius 0.53 A) of hydrogen atom is
(A) 1.527 × 10-15 s
(B) 1.527 × 10-16 s
(C) 1.527 × 10-17 s
(D) 1.527 × 10-18 s.
Answer:
(B) 1.527 × 10-16 s

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 5.
If the electron in a hydrogen atom is raised to one of its excited energy states, the electron’s
(A) potential energy increases and kinetic energy decreases
(B) potential energy decreases and kinetic energy increases
(C) potential energy increases with no change in kinetic energy
(D) potential energy decreases but kinetic energy remains constant.
Answer:
(A) potential energy increases and kinetic energy decreases

Question 6.
The potential energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom in its ground state is
(A) – 6.8 eV
(B) – 13.6 eV
(C) – 27.2 eV
(D) 13.6 eV.
Answer:
(C) – 27.2 eV

Question 7.
The kinetic energy of the orbital electron in a hydrogen atom in the excited state corresponding to n = 2 is
(A) 3.4 eV
(B) 6.8 eV
(C) 13.6 eV
(D) 27.2 eV.
Answer:
(A) 3.4 eV

Question 8.
The ratio of the kinetic energy of an electron in a Bohr orbit to its total energy in the same orbit is
(A) -1
(B) 2
(C) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(D) -0.5.
Answer:
(A) -1

Question 9.
The energy of an electron in the nth Bohr orbit is proportional to
(A) n2
(B) n
(C) \(\frac{1}{n}\)
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{1}{n^{2}}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 10.
The radius of the first Bohr orbit is 0.53 Å and that of nth orbit is 212 Å. The value of n is
(A) 2
(B) 12
(C) 20
(D) 400.
Answer:
(C) 20

Question 11.
The radius and the energy of the first Bohr orbit in a hydrogen atom are r1 and E1. If the orbital electron makes a transition to a orbit of radius 4rv the energy of the electron changes to
(A) \(\frac{E_{1}}{4}\)
(B) \(\frac{E_{1}}{2}\)
(C) 2E1
(D) 4E1
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{E_{1}}{4}\)

Question 12.
A hydrogen atom in its ground state is excited to the state of energy E3 by an electron colliding with it. The minimum energy that the colliding electron must have is
(A) 10.2 eV
(B) 12.09 eV
(C) 12.5 eV
(D) 13.6 eV.
Answer:
(B) 12.09 eV

Question 13.
The energy of the electron in a hydrogen atom is raised from a state of energy E2 to that of energy E4. In the process, its
(A) energy doubles
(B) angular momentum doubles
(C) velocity doubles
(D) linear momentum doubles.
Answer:
(B) angular momentum doubles

Question 14.
Given that R is the Rydberg constant for hydrogen, the Hα line in the hydrogen spectrum has a wavelength
(A) \(\frac{1}{6 R}\)
(B) 6R
(C) \(\frac{5 R}{36}\)
(D) \(\frac{36}{5 R}\)
Answer:
(D) \(\frac{36}{5 R}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 15.
When the electron in a hydrogen atom jumps from the second orbit to the first orbit, the wavelength of the emitted rediation is λ. When the electron jumps from the third orbit to the first orbit, the wavelength of the emitted radiation would be
(A) \(\frac{27}{32}\) λ
(B) \(\frac{32}{27}\) λ
(C) \(\frac{2}{3}\) λ
(D) \(\frac{3}{2}\) λ.
Answer:
(A) \(\frac{27}{32}\) λ

Question 16.
In hydrogen atom, the Balmer series is obtained when the electron jumps from
(A) a higher orbit to the first orbit
(B) the first orbit to a higher orbit
(C) a higher orbit to the second orbit
(D) the second orbit to a higher orbit.
Answer:
(C) a higher orbit to the second orbit

Question 17.
The nuclei having the same number of protons but different number of neutrons are called
(A) isobars
(B) α-particles
(C) isotopes
(D) γ-particles.
Answer:
(C) isotopes

Question 18.
The nuclear volume of \(\begin{aligned}
&8 \\
&4
\end{aligned}\) Be is ………. that of \(\begin{aligned}
&1 \\
&1
\end{aligned}\) H.
(A) equal to
(B) two times
(C) four times
(D) eight times.
Answer:
(D) eight times.

Question 19.
The nuclear radius of the tungsten nuclide 74W is twice that of the sodium nuclide \(\begin{aligned}
&23 \\
&11
\end{aligned}\) Na. The neutron number of the tungsten nuclide is
(A) 82
(B) 100
(C) 110
(D) 184.
Answer:
(C) 110

Question 20.
When a β-particle is emitted by a nucleus, its mass number
(A) decreases
(B) remains the same
(C) increases
(D) may decrease or increase.
Answer:
(B) remains the same

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 21.
When an α-particle is emitted by a nucleus, its mass number
(A) increases by 4
(B) decreases by 4
(C) increases by 2
(D) decreases by 2.
Answer:
(B) decreases by 4

Question 22.
When a γ-ray photon is emitted by an unstable nucleus,
(A) Z increases
(B) Z decreases
(C) A increases
(D) Z and A remain the same.
Answer:
(D) Z and A remain the same.

Question 23.
In a radioactive transformation, a change in the mass number occurs with
(A) α- or β-decay
(B) β-decay
(C) γ-decay
(D) α-decay.
Answer:
(D) α-decay.

Question 24.
The half-life of radium is 1600 y. How much of 1 μg of radium will remain undistintegrated after 8000 y?
(A) \(\frac{1}{8}\) μg
(B) \(\frac{1}{16}\) μg
(C) \(\frac{1}{32}\) μg
(D) \(\frac{1}{64}\) μg.
Answer:
(C) \(\frac{1}{32}\) μg

Question 25.
In one mean lifetime of a radioactive element, the fraction of the nuclei that has disintegrated is [e is the base of natral logarithm.]
(A) \(\frac{1}{e}\)
(B) 1 – \(\frac{1}{e}\)
(C) e
(D) e – 1.
Answer:
(B) 1 – \(\frac{1}{e}\)

Question 26.
The decay constant of a radioactive element is λ After a time 2λ-1 of the original number of radioactive nuclei about ……………….. remains undecayed.
(A) 37%
(B) 27%
(C) 25%
(D) 13.7%
Answer:
(D) 13.7%

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei

Question 27.
Complete the following fission reaction :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 15 Structure of Atoms and Nuclei 76
Answer:
(D) \({ }_{35}^{85} \mathrm{Br}+3{ }_{0}^{1} \mathrm{n}\)

Question 28.
The energy generated in the stars is because of
(A) radioactivity
(B) nuclear fission
(C) nuclear fusion
(D) photoelectric phenomenon.
Answer:
(C) nuclear fusion

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 12th Textbook Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

1. (A) Select the correct options and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
Business is a ………………. activity.
(a) socio-economic
(b) service
(c) charitable
Answer:
socio-economic

Question 2.
Business organisation should try to make ……………… utilisation of natural resources.
(a) minimum
(b) maximum
(c) optimum
Answer:
optimum

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 3.
For economic growth and national security ………………. stability is required.
(a) political
(b) social
(c) economic
Answer:
political

Question 4.
Making timely payment of proper taxes is the responsibility of organisation towards ………………
(a) Shareholders
(b) Customers
(c) Government
Answer:
Government

Question 5.
Businessmen are ………………… of the society.
(a) Representatives
(b) Leaders
(c) Trustees
Answer:
Trustees

Question 6.
Business should provide periodic information to ………………
(a) customers
b) owners
(c) employees
Answer:
owners

Question 7.
Business should offer adequate opportunities of promotion to their ………………
(a) employees
(b) customers
(c) investors
Answer:
employees

Question 8.
The term ‘Ethics’ is derived from the ………………. word ‘Ethos’ which means character.
(a) Latin
(b) French
(c) Greek
Answer:
Greek

Question 9.
Business ethics refers to the ……………… system of principles.
(a) economic
(b) social
(c) moral
Answer:
moral

Question 10.
Business organisation should protect health and provide safety measures to ………………
(a) employees
(b) owners
(c) investors
Answer:
employees

Question 11.
At least ………………….. of the average net profit should be spent on C.S.R.
(a) 5%
(b) 2%
(c) 3%.
Answer:
2%.

1. (B) Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) Employees (1) Good quality product
(B) Responsibility to investors (2) To maintain solvency and prestige
(C) Responsibility towards government (3) To serve society
(D) Economic objective (4) Voluntary
(E) Business ethics (5) Job security
(6) Compulsory
(7) Respecting rules and regulations
(8) To earn profit
(9) Branch of Social Science
(10) Protection and environment

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) E-business (5) Job security
(B) B2C (2) To maintain solvency and prestige
(C) Outsourcing (7) Respecting rules and regulations
(D) Digital cash (8) To earn profit
(E) Registration (9) Branch of Social Science

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term for the following statement

Question 1.
Name the philosophy related to social responsibility propounded by Mahatma Gandhi.
Answer:
Trusteeship

Question 2.
Duties, obligations of business directed towards welfare of society.
Answer:
Social Responsibility

Question 3.
Getting good quality products is the basic right of this group of society.
Answer:
Consumers

Question 4.
Providing fair returns on investment is the responsibility of organisation towards this group.
Answer:
Investors

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 5.
Rules of standard dealing with morality in business environment.
Answer:
Business Ethics

Question 6.
An activity motivated by profit.
Answer:
Business

Question 7.
Earning foreign exchange is the responsibility of the organisation towards this group.
Answer:
Government

Question 8.
Employment generation is the responsibility of the organisation towards this group.
Answer:
Society

1. (D) State whether following statement are true or false

Question 1.
Businessmen are trustees of the society.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
Business ethics is a code of conduct.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
The commercial organisation are expected to uplift the weaker section of the society.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
It is the responsibility of commercial organisation to maintain industrial peace.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Owners should not get complete and accurate information about the financial position.
Answer:
False

Question 6.
Media does not play important role in public life.
Answer:
False

Question 7.
Social responsibility is broader than legal responsibility of business.
Answer:
True

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
Job security, health and safety measures, good working condition, reasonable profit.
Answer:
reasonable profit

Question 2.
Good quality products, fair prices, honest advertising, prevent congestion in cities.
Answer:
prevent congestion in cities

Question 3.
Timely payment of taxes, earning foreign exchange, creating goodwill, political stability.
Answer:
creating goodwill

Question 4.
Protection of environment, maintain transparency, employment generation, development of backward region.
Answer:
maintain transparency

Question 5.
Proper conduct of meeting, careful use of capital, fair prices of products, maintain solvency and prestige.
Answer:
fair prices of products.

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
Business organisation can maximise profitability by …………….. wastage.
Answer:
minimising

Question 2.
Social responsibility is broader than …………….. responsibility.
Answer:
legal

Question 3.
The concept of trusteeship was propounded by ……………….
Answer:
Mahatma Gandhi

Question 4.
Business should earn ………………. profit.
Answer:
reasonable

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 5.
……………….. should be fixed according to the nature and importance of work.
Answer:
Remuneration

Question 6.
The word ‘Ethics’ is derived from the Greek word ………………..
Answer:
Ethos

1. (g) Select the correct option

(Responsibilities towards shareholders, Responsibilities towards consumers, Responsibilities towards government. Responsibilities towards society)

Group A Group B
1. (1) After sales service ————–
2. (2) Timely payment of proper taxes ————–
3. —————— Protest Anti-Social activities
4. —————– Fair practices on Stock Exchange

Answer:

Group A Group B
1. After sales service Responsibilities towards consumers
2. Timely payment of proper taxes Responsibilities towards Government
3. Responsibilities towards Society Protest Anti-Social activities
4. Responsibilities towards shareholders Fair practices on Stock Exchange

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
Who can raise voice against business malpractices?
Answer:
Media can raise voice against business malpractices.

Question 2.
What should be done by management to keep workers updated?
Answer:
Guidance methods like ‘Introduction Training’, Refresher Training should be conducted to keep employees updated on the latest development to increase their efficiency and confidence.

Question 3.
What type of advertising should be avoided?
Answer:
False, misleading and vulgar advertisement should be avoided by the organisations.

Question 4.
What organisation should do to improve quality of goods and to reduce cost of production?
Answer:
Organisation should conduct research and development to improve the quality of goods and to reduce the cost of production which in turn will minimise the final prices charged to consumers.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
Social responsibility is narrower term than legal responsibility of business.
Answer:
Social responsibility is broader term than legal responsibility of business.

Question 2.
All sorts of fair practices related to stock exchange should be avoided.
Answer:
All sorts of unfair practices related to stock exchange should be avoided.

Question 3.
Management and union should agree strikes and lockouts to protect the interest of both the parties.
Answer:
Management and union should ban strikes and lockouts to protect the interest of both the parties.

Question 4.
MRP (Maximum Retail Price) should not be printed on every packet.
Answer:
MRP (Maximum Retail Price) should be printed on every packet.

Question 5.
Dishonest advertising can be appreciated by customers in the long run.
Answer:
Honest advertising can be appreciated by customers in the long run.

Question 6.
Financial help should be provided by business organisation for anti-social activities.
Answer:
Financial help should not be provided by business organisation for anti-social activities.

Question 7.
Business ethics is a compulsory term.
Answer:
Business ethics is a voluntary term.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 8.
Business ethics is not a relative term.
Answer:
Business ethics is a relative term.

Question 9.
Social values are based on perceptions of right or wrong.
Answer:
Moral values are based on perceptions of right or wrong.

Question 10.
Moral values provide general guidelines for social conduct.
Answer:
Social values provide general guidelines for social conduct.

2. Explain the following term/concept

Question 1.
Social Responsibility.
Answer:
(1) Good Quality Products : It is the responsibility of a commercial organisation to produce and supply good quality products and services. To improve the quality, every business unit must have quality control department to reject inferior and substandard products. In this respect, International Standards Organisation (ISO) is the latest trend towards quality control. This ensures customers’ loyalty to products.

(2) Fair Prices : The commercial organisation must charge fair and reasonable prices for its goods. Maximum Retail Price (M.R.E) inclusive of all taxes must be printed on all packed products. The customers should not be cheated by being charged higher prices. It is not fair and practicable to fool the customers every time. Such practices bring disrepute to the organisation and spoil its image in the long run.

(3) Customer’s Safety : The organisation must ensure that the product supplied has no adverse effect on the life and health of the consumers. Unsafe products must not be marketed by the organisation. The manufacturers of the genuine products must warn the consumers about the imitation and unsafe products well in time.

Question 2.
Concept of Trusteeship.
Answer:
(1) Trusteeship is a socio-economic philosophy that was propounded by Mahatma Gandhi. According to the principle of trusteeship, “A business must be carried out in trust, legally and morally for the benefit and welfare of the people.” Businessmen are treated to be trustees of society.

(2) Trusteeship provides a means through which rich or wealthy people become trustees of different trusts that take care or look after the welfare (well-being) of the people in the society. Business organisations function and operate within society. They are the part and parcel of the society to which they belong. Therefore, it is now realised that the activity which is harmful to the society is not good (suitable) for the business organisations.

Question 3.
Business Ethics.
Answer:
Meaning : The word ‘ethics’ is derived from Greek word ‘Ethos’ which refers to human character and conduct. The dictionary meaning of ‘ethics’ is moral principles that control or influence a person’s behaviour. The term ‘business ethics’ refers to a system of moral principles or rules of conduct applied to business operations or activities. It is a code of conduct for regulating the activities of business towards society and others. Ethics is a branch of social science.

According to Wheeler, “Business ethics is an art or science of maintaining harmonious relationship with society, its various groups and institutions as well as reorganising the moral responsibility for the right or wrong conduct of business

Question 4.
Moral Values.
Answer:
(1) Moral values are the standards of right and wrong which govern an individual’s behaviour and choices. Moral values may be derived from society, government, religion or self. Moral values are based on the understanding of right and wrong. Business ethics deals with morality in the business environment.

(2) Business may be guided by some moral principles such as not to get involved in unfair trade practices, to be honest and truthful about quality, not to sell adulterated products as pure product, not to give false and misleading advertisements, charging fair prices, paying taxes, duties and fees to the government honestly, and in schedule time, etc.

Question 5.
Social Values.
Answer:
(1) Social values are set of moral principles that provide the general guidelines for our social conduct. Social values constitute an important aspect of the culture of the society. They are based on tradition, ego, honesty, integrity, fairness, hard work, co-operation, forgiveness, etc.

(2) Social values are the values (standards) concerned with the social aspects of human life, e.g. truth, justice, kindness, generosity, tolerance, patriotism, respect for seniors, excellence, etc. The business organisations should develop social, values through educative advertising, cultural programmes, national integration programmes, assistance to the educational institutes, etc.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion

Question 1.
Yashwant Co. Ltd. is providing facilities for their female staff like day care centre for kids and work from home facility. Even management takes their suggestions while taking the decisions though they are members of trade union.

(i) By doing this they are following social responsibilities towards which interest groups?
(ii) What values are they presenting?
(iii) What kind of responsibilities employer follows in above case?
Answer:
(i) By treating the staff with dignity and respect the company follows the social responsibilities towards the employees.
(ii) Yashwant Co. Ltd. are presenting social values by showing co-operation to their female staff.
(iii) Management takes the employees’ suggestions while taking the decisions even though they are members of trade union. By doing this, management recognizes the right of employees to join, Trade Unions. The company also does not restrict employees from forming Trade Union. Thus they follow social responsibility towards employees.

Question 2.
An organisation manufacturing paints has been enjoying a prominent market position since many years. It has been dumping its untreated poisonous waste on the river bank: which has created many health problems for the nearby villages.

(i) Which responsibility is neglected by manufacturing organisation?
(ii) What kind of pollution are they doing?
(iii) What precautionary measures they need to take?
Answer:
(i) Responsibility towards protection of environment is regulated by manufacturing industries.
(ii) They are creating water pollution by dumping its untreated poisonous waste on the river bank.
(iii) Proper waste management techniques should be adopted by the organisation under which waste should be reduced, effort should be made to reuse the waste. Waste that cannot be reduced or reused should be recycled.

Question 3.
A vehicle manufacturing company has adopted the following practices:
(A) Only those components will be used by the company which are environment-friendly.
(B) There will be discharge of harmful wastes only after their proper treatment.
(C) Pollution level of every vehicle will be maintained as per international standards.

(i) By doing this, business organisation follows social responsibility towards which interest group?
(ii) What kind of pollution do they want to avoid ?
(iii) What kind of message do they want to convey ?
Answer:
(i) Business organisation follows social responsibility towards society for protection of environment.
(ii) They want to avoid air pollution.
(iii) They want to convey the message that business should be committed to protect the environment and should not create imbalance in nature.

4. Answer in brief

Question 1.
Give any four types of social responsibilities towards consumers.
Answer:
The social responsibilities of commercial organisation towards consumers are explained as follows:
(1) Good Quality Products : It is the responsibility of a commercial organisation to produce and supply good quality products and services. To improve the quality, every business unit must have quality control department to reject inferior and substandard products. In this respect, International Standards Organisation (ISO) is the latest trend towards quality control. This ensures customers’ loyalty to products.

(2) Fair Prices : The commercial organisation must charge fair and reasonable prices for its goods. Maximum Retail Price (M.R.E) inclusive of all taxes must be printed on all packed products. The customers should not be cheated by being charged higher prices. It is not fair and practicable to fool the customers every time. Such practices bring disrepute to the organisation and spoil its image in the long run.

(3) Customer’s Safety : The organisation must ensure that the product supplied has no adverse effect on the life and health of the consumers. Unsafe products must not be marketed by the organisation. The manufacturers of the genuine products must warn the consumers about the imitation and unsafe products well in time.

(4) Honest Advertising : The advertisement conveys varied information of the products like the facts, features, side effects, advantages, uses, etc. to the customers. The commercial organisations must see to it that their advertisement should not mislead the consumers by exaggerating the actual facts. The commercial organisations must not indulge in vulgar, false and misleading advertisement. Honest advertisements are always appreciated by the consumers and become beneficial in the long run.

(5) After Sales Service: The commercial organisation should offer quick, satisfactory and efficient after sales service specially in the case of consumer durable products for their maintenance during the period of warranty. Effective and efficient after sales services enable them to establish and maintain good relation with the consumers.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 2.
What is Business Ethics ? What are elements of business ethics ?
Answer:
[A] Meaning : The word ‘ethics’ is derived from Greek word ‘Ethos’ which refers to human character and conduct. The dictionary meaning of ‘ethics’ is moral principles that control or influence a person’s behaviour. The term ‘business ethics’ refers to a system of moral principles or rules of conduct applied to business operations or activities. It is a code of conduct for regulating the activities of business towards society and others. Ethics is a branch of social science.

According to Wheeler, “Business ethics is an art or science of maintaining harmonious relationship with society, its various groups and institutions as well as reorganising the moral responsibility for the right or wrong conduct of business.

[B] Elements of business ethics : The elements of business ethics are explained as follows:
(1) Trustworthiness : Every business unit or organisation must work in all areas to maintain trustworthiness. This increases the confidence of clients or customers in the organisation. The clients usually believe in organisations for reliability and quality performance. Company or organisation functions and prospers on character, i fairness, truth, honour and ability.

(2) Honest service delivery : It is much better to be honest about what one can do rather than making empty promises. Empty or false promises ruin the reputation of the business organisation. Business organisation should fulfil or complete all its commitments and obligations and leave every customer feeling well served and satisfied.

(3) Confidentiality : The company or business organisation should strictly obey and follow its i internal confidential policy. It is utmost important for every business organisation to keep in secret the confidential details of its own clients. For private gain it should not disclose such information to any one. Similarly, it should not use any means to get information from competitors about certain formulae or methods of production.

(4) Openness : Good business ethics and continuous improvement also come from keeping an open mind. Business unit should follow the principle of openness. It should regularly demand opinions and feedback from both clients and team members. Even in times of business disagreement, business unit should welcome other’s opinions and ideas with respect and courtesy.

(5) Other common business ethics : (1) A large portion of our society is composed of common people with low purchasing power. Business enterprises should consider likes, dislikes and financial position of these people and accordingly manufacture and provide goods and services. (2) The guaranties and warranties given by the manufacturer should be proper and acceptable by the customers. (3) Advertisements given by the businessmen should not cross limit of decency.

Question 3.
State responsibilities of business towards government.
Answer:
Responsibilities of business towards government:
(1) Timely payment of taxes : Business organisations are expected to pay various taxes such as sales tax, income tax, corporate tax, excise duty, wealth tax, etc. levied by the government from time to time. These funds enable the government to undertake various development projects.

(2) Observing rules and regulations : The business organisations are expected to comply with the various laws, rules and regulations enacted by the government. The company should follow the laws regarding obtaining license of business operation, price determination and production, etc. They should conduct business in lawful manner.

(3) Earning foreign exchange : The business organisations Eire expected to export their products to foreign countries to earn foreign exchange. Foreign exchange is required by the government to import various goods, valuable and important products.

(4) Economic development : The government sets the targets for balanced growth and rapid economic development of the country. The business organisation is expected to provide necessary support to the government.

(5) Implementing socio-economic policies : The business organisations are expected to provide co-operation and required funds to the government in implementing various socio-economic programmes and policies.

Question 4.
State any four CSR activities.
Answer:
CSR, supports the following activities:

  1. Eradicating hunger, poverty & malnutrition, promoting preventive health care & sanitation & making available safe drinking water.
  2. Promoting education, including special education & employment enhancing vocation skills especially among children, women, elderly & the differently abled & livelihood enhancement projects.
  3. Reducing child mortality and improving maternal health by providing good hospital facilities and low cost medicines.
  4. Ensuring environmental sustainability, ecological balance, protection of flora & fauna, animal welfare, agro forestry, conservation of natural resources & maintaining quality of soil, air & water.
  5. Employment enhancing vocational skills, etc.

5. Justify the following statements.

Question 1.
Role of media has major influence on business organisation.
Answer:
(1) Media refers to the various means used by advertisers to inform the public about the products or services. The mass media include the press, social media, radio and television. Active media plays crucial role in the life of the people. Through internet, reach of social media to common people has become very easy.

(2) Media has efficiency to disburse any information, wrong policy, unfair trade practice adopted by any business organisation at a very fast pace to public at large that too at every corner of the world. Media is very vibrant and active.

(3) Media connects the people and creates influence on masses. It can make propaganda (or raise voice) against business malpractices and exploitation of consumers. It can do publicity through repetition of messages by different means.

(4) Newspapers, radio, television, internet, social media, etc. can easily give publicity to unfair practices of business organisations. So, media makes business organisations understand social values and exerts major influence.

Question 2.
Business should allow workers participation in management.
Answer:
(1) Workers are the real architects of success in any business unit. Investments in human resources (capital) gives rich rewards in the long run.

(2) The success and failure of the business organisations to greater extent depend on the support and participation of employees. Therefore, business organisations should encourage workers to participate in management through various schemes like giving suggestions, saving costs, quality circles, profit sharing co-ownership, etc.

(3) When workers are given opportunity to participate in the management, it will raise their morale. This in turn will give the workers a sense of belongingness. They will take an active part in completion of the work assigned to them.

(4) Workers’ participation in the management r enables the organisation to win the confidence of employees. It creates and maintains good, healthy and improved relationship between labour and management which is necessary for the success of any organisation.

Question 3.
Expectations of society towards business are changing.
Answer:
(1) Today the world is changing and expanding very fast. Social demands have changed gradually over the years. The business has to respond them positively.

(2) Now the people all over the globe are well aware of their rights. Overall knowledge level has also increased. In order to fulfil the growing needs of the people, the business firms must operate as per the expectations of society. Business units must give society what it actually wants.

(3) Consumer satisfaction is the ultimate purpose of business activities. A business organisation must give priority to consumer satisfaction over profit motive. Its survival, progress and reputation depend upon the consumer satisfaction. It must win the confidence of its customers by giving them useful services.

(4) Business organisations are expected to act in broad public interest and serve the objectives of mankind and society at large along with the objectives of earning profit. It must provide quality products to society at reasonable prices and above all contribute to the social welfare.

Question 4.
Business organisations should avoid environmental pollution and ecological imbalance.
Answer:
(1) Functioning of business units and industrialisation create air, water and sound pollution. The carbon particles, dust, harmful gases, chemicals, etc. create air pollution.

(2) Harmful chemicals, untreated sewage, industrial waste, fertilizers, pesticides, refuse, e-waste, etc. when get mixed with water, creates water pollution. Aeroplanes, motor vehicles, construction machines and industrial equipment create sound pollution.

(3) The business organisations are expected to take all possible measures to prevent air, water and sound pollution and to maintain the ecological balance. For the well-being of society every organisation should assist the concerned organisations engaged in pollution control programmes such as plantation of trees, preservation of wildlife and natural resources.

(4) Protecting the environment and maintaining ecological balance in the following manner:

  1. Business organisations save cost and money through minimising waste
  2. Business organi¬sations which follow green practices (plantation of more and more trees) get support from customers
  3. Business organisations which take precautions to protect environment create awareness among employees
  4. Protection of environment process cut carbon emission and create conditions for green growth which is beneficial to society
  5. Business organisations showing awareness towards environment protection get support and encouragement from the government.
    Thus, business organisation should avoid environmental pollution and ecological imbalance.

Question 5.
All sorts of unfair practices related to stock exchange should be avoided.
Answer:
(1) The persons who provide finance for short term as well as for long term to the company are called owners or investors. They invest their money and accept risk factor. Management is expected to provide full and factual information about the financial performance of the company to the owners and investors.

(2) Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) plays a pivotal role in regulating and maintaining the interests of investors in the securities market. Law prohibits any sort of activity that are manipulative or unfair in the securities market. Thus, business organisations must avoid unfair practices related to stock exchange like insider trading, providing wrong and secret information about buying/selling or dealing with securities, etc. Any breach in the above mentioned practices may be considered unlawful and be made accountable by SEBI.

(3) Therefore, business organisation should consider responsibilities toward the owners and should avoid all sorts of unfair practices related to stock exchange.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 6.
Business ethics contains moral and social values for doing business.
Answer:
(1) Business Ethics refer to code of conduct that a business organisation are expected to follow while doing a business. According to ‘Wheeler’, “Business ethics is an art or science of maintaining harmonious relationship with society, its various groups and institutions as well as recognizing the moral responsibility for right or wrong conduct of business. ”

(2) Moral values are based on perceptions of right and wrong. They provide the general guidelines for distinguishing between wrong and right path of business, between good and bad, fair and unfair, just and unjust, legal and illegal, proper and improper in respect to human actions. Ethics contain moral values for doing business, Honesty, transparency, fairness, integrity, etc. are moral values that create goodwill and gives economic gain in the long run.

(3) Social values form an important part of the culture of the society. They provide general guidelines for social conduct. Values such as fundamental rights, patriotism, respect for human dignity, rationality, sacrifice, equality, democracy, etc. influence our behaviour in many ways. These social values made the business socially acceptable. As business is a part of society, it can be successful in the long run by adopting social values.

Question 7.
Business ethics can be considered as a tool for social development.
Answer:
(1) Business ethics is a code of conduct evolved for regulating the activities of business towards the society and others.

(2) It calls for the importance of fair treatment to be given to the consumers, workers, suppliers, shareholders, competitors, government and the community at large. Business ethics promote the principles of honesty, sincerity, fairness, justice in business dealings.

(3) It protects the interests of all the constituents of the society. It creates healthy and competitive business atmosphere. It induces businessmen to introduce social security and welfare measures.

(4) The businessmen promote activities enhancing the cultural values of the society. Thus, business ethics, if practised by businessmen in the right spirit, can be considered as a tool for social development.

6. Attempt the following

Question 1.
What is social responsibility of commercial organisation towards consumers ?
Answer:
The social responsibilities of commercial organisation towards consumers are explained as follows:
(1) Good Quality Products : It is the responsibility of a commercial organisation to produce and supply good quality products and services. To improve the quality, every business unit must have quality control department to reject inferior and substandard products. In this respect, International Standards Organisation (ISO) is the latest trend towards quality control. This ensures customers’ loyalty to products.

(2) Fair Prices : The commercial organisation must charge fair and reasonable prices for its goods. Maximum Retail Price (M.R.E) inclusive of all taxes must be printed on all packed products. The customers should not be cheated by being charged higher prices. It is not fair and practicable to fool the customers every time. Such practices bring disrepute to the organisation and spoil its image in the long run.

(3) Customer’s Safety : The organisation must ensure that the product supplied has no adverse effect on the life and health of the consumers. Unsafe products must not be marketed by the organisation. The manufacturers of the genuine products must warn the consumers about the imitation and unsafe products well in time.

(4) Honest Advertising : The advertisement conveys varied information of the products like the facts, features, side effects, advantages, uses, etc. to the customers. The commercial organisations must see to it that their advertisement should not mislead the consumers by exaggerating the actual facts. The commercial organisations must not indulge in vulgar, false and misleading advertisement. Honest advertisements are always appreciated by the consumers and become beneficial in the long run.

(5) After Sales Service: The commercial organisation should offer quick, satisfactory and efficient after sales service specially in the case of consumer durable products for their maintenance during the period of warranty. Effective and efficient after sales services enable them to establish and maintain good relation with the consumers.

(6) Research and Development: The commercial organisation is expected to conduct research and development for the purpose of improving the quality of the product and reducing the cost of production. The commercial organisations must provide quality and branded products such as BIS – Bureau of Indian Standards, AGMARK – Agricultural Marketing, ISI – Indian Standards Institute, etc.

(7) Regular Supply: The commercial organisations are expected to provide goods and services to the consumers regularly as and when needed by them. The commercial organisations are not supposed to create artificial scarcity of goods by hoarding. They should not indulge in black marketing.

(8) Attend Complaints : The commercial organisations must attend to the complaints of consumers without any delay. For this, every organisation should implement quick, effective and suitable grievances redressal system. Suggestions of the customers for the improvement of products should be welcomed and gratefully acknowledged. Required modification in the products should be carried out.

(9) Training: The commercial organisation should organise training to their regular and potential consumers, from time to time, either free of cost or by charging nominal fees.

(10) Avoid Customer Exploitation : In order to avoid exploitation of consumers, the commercial organisations should not indulge in unfair trade practices. To protect the interest of consumers, organisations should avoid monopolistic competition in the market.

Question 2.
State different types of responsibilities towards society.
Answer:
The following are the social responsibilities of a business unit towards society community/ public in general:
(1) Protection of environment : In recent years, pollution becomes one of the major problems. Industries, chemical plants, cement plants, etc. create air pollution and water pollution. The business organisations must take all possible measures to prevent or minimise air and water pollution and maintain ecological balance.

(2) Better and maximum use of resources : The business firms must make proper and optimum use of available resources in the larger interest of the society. The resources such as water, land, fuel, raw materials, etc. should be used fairly and efficiently. However, care should be taken not to misuse or waste such resources.

(3) Reservation for weaker section : For upliftment of economically weaker section of society, the business organisations are expected to reserve certain positions in their organisations. They should also provide financial and other necessary help to them wherever expected.

(4) Development of backward regions : The society expects that the business firms should start their industries in less developed (backward) areas to create employment opportunities. It will increase purchasing power among these people. In this manner, business organisations should make development in backward regions.

(5) Protect against anti-social activities : The business organisations should neither undertake nor participate in anti-social activities. They should not provide any financial assistance to anti-social elements. The business firms should avoid anti-social activities such as smuggling, association with underworld (criminal) people, bribing government officials, etc.

Question 3.
Describe the responsibilities of commercial organisation towards investors.
Answer:
Responsibilities of business towards investors:
(1) Proper conduct of meetings : Whenever need arises, a company should call and organise meetings of investors to provide information about the business. Prior to meeting, proper notice and agenda should be sent well in advance. During the period of financial crisis, investors should be convinced and taken into confidence. Reasons for failure should be explained to the investors to gain their confidence.

(2) Return on Investment : Investors invest their money in the company by accepting risk. They are entitled by get fair returns on their investment at regular interval in the form of interest. Investors expect the following from the business organisations : (a) fair returns on their investment, (b) safety of their investment and (c) steady and gradual appreciation of the business.

(3) Handling grievances : A company is required to pay attention and handle the grievances and complaints of the investors amicably. There should be orderly procedure to solve and deal with grievances without any delay. The business management should answer all the queries of investors regarding any issue in satisfactory manner.

(4) Maintain transparency : Investors supply funds for long term and for working capital to carry on business more efficiently. Investors expect that business firms should maintain high degree of transparency in their operations.

(5) Proper disclosure of information : A company is expected to disclose full and factual information through regular reports, circulars and statement of profit. The company must provide its financial performance more correctly so that prospective investors are able to take right decisions to invest their money in future.

(6) Maintain solvency and prestige : Business organisation or a company is expected to maintain sound financial position, prestige, solvency and goodwill to gain confidence of investors. For this, company should undertake innovation, research and expansion programme on the continuous basis.

Question 4.
Describe the features of Business Ethics.
Answer:
The features of Business Ethics are explained as below:
(1) Code of conduct : Business ethics is a code of conduct developed and evolved for regulating business activities toward welfare of society. It explains what activities one is suppose to do and not do for the welfare of the society. All business units must follows this code of conduct.

(2) Based on moral and social values : Business ethics comprises social and moral principles i.e. rules for carrying out business activities smoothly. This contains self control, consumer protection and welfare, fair treatment to social group, service to society, not to harm (exploit) others, etc.

(3) Gives protection to social groups : Business ethics protects the interests of all the constituents (groups) of the society which include consumers, creditors, employees, small businessmen, shareholders, government, etc.

(4) Provides basic framework : Business ethics specifies the social, cultural, legal, economic and other limits of business within which business units are expected to plan, work out and conduct their functions and activities.

(5) Voluntary : The businessmen must follow (accept) business ethics voluntarily, i.e. on their own. Business ethics must be similar to self¬discipline. It should not be made compulsory by law.

(6) Requires education and guidance : Prior to introduction of business ethics in the organisation, businessmen must be properly educated, trained and given guidance. The businessmen must be convinced and motivated to implement business ethics.

(7) Relative term : Business ethics is a relative term. It differs or changes from one business to another business and from one country to another.
In one country whatever is considered good may be banned or bad for other country.

(8) New concept : Business ethics is considered as newer concept. It is strictly followed and applied in developed, i.e. advanced countries. It is not accepted and followed in developing and poor (backward) countries.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 5.
What is Corporate Social Responsibility?
Answer:
(1) Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is the recent and newest management strategy which creates positive impact on society while doing business. It is a global concept. It is self regulating business model which aims at contributing towards social welfare and support ethically oriented practices. CSR makes a company socially accountable and responsible. CSR makes a company accountable towards itself, its stakeholders, public in general, etc. By undertaking and practising social responsibility company can be alert and awake about social, economic and environmental aspects of the society.

(2) According to UNIDO (United Nations Industrial Development Organization), “Corporate Social Responsibility is a management concept whereby companies integrate social and environmental concerns in their business operations and interactions with their stakeholders”.

According to Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013 and Companies (CSR Policy) Rules 2014, the companies having net worth of 1500 Cr. or more or turnover of 1000 Cr. or more; or net profit of 15 Cr. or more during any financial year have to form a Corporate Social Responsibility Committee of the Board. The Board’s report will give information about the compositions of CSR committee with effect from 1st April, 2014.

(3) In every financial year, all companies should spend at least 2% of average net profits of last 3 years on their CSR policy. The CSR committee consists of 4 directors who meet at least 2 times in a year to discuss and review the CSR policy and CSR activities, prepare budget, explain the way to implement projects and to establish a transparent means to check progress.

(4) CSR, supports the following activities:

  1. Eradicating hunger, poverty & malnutrition, promoting preventive health care & sanitation & making available safe drinking water.
  2. Promoting education, including special education & employment enhancing vocation skills especially among children, women, elderly & the differently abled & livelihood enhancement projects.
  3. Reducing child mortality and improving maternal health by providing good hospital facilities and low cost medicines.
  4. Ensuring environmental sustainability, ecological balance, protection of flora & fauna, animal welfare, agro forestry, conservation of natural resources & maintaining quality of soil, air & water.
  5. Employment enhancing vocational skills, etc.

(5) Penalties for non-compliance of CSR activities (duties) would attract a fine of not less than Rs 50,000 which may increase to Rs 25,00,000 and every officer of the company in default is given punishment of imprisonment for 3 years or with fine of Rs 50,000 which may increase to Rs 5,00,000 or with both.

7. Answer the following

Question 1.
Explain the responsibilities of business towards employees.
Answer:
The responsibilities of business towards employees are explained as follows:
(1) Job security: Job security (guarantee) gives mental peace to the employees. In order to encourage employees to work with full concentration, dedication and commitment, the business organisation must give job security and frame rules for confirmation of their service and strictly adhere to them. This will in turn raise their morale, interest and loyalty towards the organisation.

(2) Fair remuneration : The business organisation should pay adequate and attractive salaries along with incentives like overtime allowance, bonus, etc. to all employees. Wages or salaries payable to employees should be fixed by considering nature of work. The business organisations should frame suitable wage plans for increments and timely revision of wages.

(3) Health and safety measures : The business organisations is expected to take necessary steps for protecting the health and hygiene of the employees. Proper sanitation, canteen, medical facilities, hygienic conditions, etc. must be provided to them. Proper maintenance of machines and premises must be done to prevent accidents and control pollution. Business organisation should provide safety equipment such as helmets, safety goggles, gloves, shoes, masks, etc. to the employees.

(4) Good working condition : The business organisations must provide good working conditions to their employees such as adequate lighting, ventilation, safe drinking water, etc. The business organisations are expected to take necessary steps to avoid and minimise air, sound and water pollution. The business organisation must fix proper working hours and norms (shiftwise, if any) with due provisions for lunch break, tea intervals, restrooms, etc.

(5) Recognition of Trade Unions : The business organisation must recognise the right of a worker to join a recognised trade union. The management or employer should not prevent workers from forming a trade union. The management should not follow the policy of “Divide and Rule”. Further, the management should solve the problems of the workers amicably by holding face to face interactions, talks, meetings and negotiations with unions. The management and union should agree to ban lockouts and strikes to protect the interest of both the parties. A business organisation is expected to maintain industrial harmony and peace.

(6) Education and training : The business organisations are expected to take efforts to educate and train the employees. Depending on the nature of job, the business organisation should offer education, training and guidance to their employees free of cost. To update their knowledge, on the latest development and to increase the S efficiency of the employees, the organisation should arrange ‘Refresher in service training’ and ‘Introduction Training’ at regular intervals.

(7) Workers participation in management : The business organisations are expected to encourage workers to participant in the management by forming workers’ committee. The management should encourage the workers ; through different schemes like suggestion schemes, profit sharing, etc. These schemes enable the management to raise employees’ morale and help the management to give them a sense of belonging.

(8) Promotion and career opportunities : Business organisations should offer enough opportunities of promotion to their qualified and talented employees. They should give detailed information about qualification, skills and I experience required to get promotions. This will increase awareness and motivate the workers to work hard.

(9) Proper grievance procedure : The organi-sation must introduce a suitable grievance (redressal) procedure to deal with the employees’ complaints. All their queries or problems should be sorted out and solved quickly and amicably.

The employees must feel satisfied that their complaints are attended properly. Management or employer must investigate and take necessary actions to settle the grievances and complaints.

(10) Miscellaneous : Management or employer should-

  1. give fair treatment to all employees.
  2. recognise, appreciate and encourage special skills and talents of the employees.
  3. introduce code of conduct for the employees.
  4. protect religious, social, political rights of the employees.
  5. allow employees to form informal groups.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 2.
Define the concept of Social Responsibility and what is the need for social responsibility.
Answer:
[A] Meaning and Definition : Social responsibility is an obligation of the business organisation to take those decisions and perform those actions which are desirable to fulfil the objectives and add values to our society. The business organisations are expected to perform all the activities of their business in such a manner that such activities will not cause any harm to any part of the society.

In other words, the business enterprises should undertake such activities which will protect and contribute to the interest of society and fulfil their expectations. According to Howard D. Bowen “Social Responsibility is to pursue those policies to make those decisions, or to follow those lines of action which are desirable in terms of the objectives and values of our society.” In brief, social responsibility comprises of an element of voluntary action taken by the business people for the benefit of the society.

[B] Need for social responsibility:
(1) Concept of Trusteeship : Trusteeship is a socio-economic philosophy that was advocated by Mahatma Gandhi. According to it, rich (wealthy) people would be trustees of the trusts that take care of the welfare of the people in general. Businessmen are treated as trustees of society.

(2) Changing expectations of society : Over the years, society’s expectations from the business organisation have undergone severe change. In earlier days, business firms were recognised as the providers of goods and services. However in recent years society expects that every business organisation as a responsible citizen should contribute towards social welfare of the people in the society.

(3) Reputation : Business organisations spend large amount of money in brand building and in creating and strengthening their favourable image. The business organisations which care for every organ of the society and contribute to social well¬being enjoy a good reputation in the society. Such organisations always get good support from the public which in turn increases sales, profitability, attraction of talent and sustained growth.

(4) Protection of environment : It is the social responsibility of the business organisations to make proper and careful use of country’s natural resources. They should not cause environmental pollution (degradation) like contamination pollution of water resources, depletion of ozone layer, etc. Such type of pollutions result in poor health of the community and put a question mark on the survival of human species/race.

(5) Optimum utilisation of resources : Usually, large business organisations have huge amount of resources such as manpower, talent, finance and expert at their disposal to use. It is the social responsibility of business organisations to make optimum use of available resources to protect society’s interests. The organisation should always avoid wastage of resources.

(6) Pressure of trade union : The workers have now become more conscious of their rights and privileges. In recent years, trade unions play significant role in business environment. The workers have realised that their efforts contribute to the profits of the business organisation and expect management to pay them fair wages, bonus, etc. to minimise or avoid conflicts between trade unions and management. The business organisations should understand the responsibility towards employees to avoid conflicts and act accordingly.

(7) Growth of consumer movement : Advancement and growth in education, development of mass media and growing competition in the market create awareness among the consumers about their rights and powers. Hence, business organisation are required to follow consumer-oriented policies.

(8) Government control : From the side of business organisation, government rules and regulations are not desirable. This is because government put certain restrictions and limit the freedom of business organisations. In order to put moral and legal pressure on business, the government has enacted several laws such as Consumer Protection Act, 1986, Air Pollution Act, Food Adulteration Act, etc.

(9) Long term self interest : A business organisation and its image stand to earn handsome profit in the long run if its motive is providing services to the society. When the workers, consumers, shareholders, government officials and members of the public feel that a business organisation is indifferent to the social interests, they may withdraw their support to end co¬operation. Therefore, it is in the long-term interest of the business organisation to be socially useful and fulfil its social responsibility.

(10) Complexities of social problems : Many a time some business organisations themselves create social problems such as discrimination in treatment, unsafe workplaces, different types of pollutions, etc. It is the moral and social obligation of the business organisation to solve these social problems.

(11) Globalisation : In globalisation, business activities are conducted throughout the world. In recent years, the entire globe (world) has becomes the market place for buying and selling goods and services produced in any part of the world. Globalisation creates and provides more opportunities, threats and challenges to the business organisations. Those countries in the world which have followed good and fair trade practices capture and influence the entire world trade.

(12) Role of media : By using internet, it is easier to approach the common people. Media is dynamic and active which can influence large number of people in the society. Media is useful to raise voice against malpractice and exploitation of the consumers. Media plays important and active role in public life. Thus, Business organisation should not neglect the social values.

Question 3.
Explain the responsibilities of a business unit towards society at a large.
Answer:
The following are the social responsibilities of a business unit towards society community/ public in general:
(1) Protection of environment : In recent years, pollution becomes one of the major problems. Industries, chemical plants, cement plants, etc. create air pollution and water pollution. The business organisations must take all possible measures to prevent or minimise air and water pollution and maintain ecological balance.

(2) Better and maximum use of resources : The business firms must make proper and optimum use of available resources in the larger interest of the society. The resources such as water, land, fuel, raw materials, etc. should be used fairly and efficiently. However, care should be taken not to misuse or waste such resources.

(3) Reservation for weaker section : For upliftment of economically weaker section of society, the business organisations are expected to reserve certain positions in their organisations. They should also provide financial and other necessary help to them wherever expected.

(4) Development of backward regions : The society expects that the business firms should start their industries in less developed (backward) areas to create employment opportunities. It will increase purchasing power among these people. In this manner, business organisations should make development in backward regions.

(5) Protect against anti-social activities : The business organisations should neither undertake nor participate in anti-social activities. They should not provide any financial assistance to anti-social elements. The business firms should avoid anti-social activities such as smuggling, association with underworld (criminal) people, bribing government officials, etc.

(6) Financial assistance : The society expects financial helps and donations from the business organisations for various social welfare activities such as eradication of poverty, illiteracy, etc. The society also expects financial assistance from them to organise various awareness programmes like anti-drug campaigns, antinoise pollution campaigns, etc.

(7) Prevent congestions : The society expects that the business firms start industries in industrial zones and at different locations. It will minimise the adverse effects like pollution and overcrowded cities in residential areas. This facilitates business firms to provide jobs to local people. This in turn avoids congestion in big cities.

(8) Employment generation : The business units should generate and provide better job opportunities to young and well qualified people in all sections of the society. It should make maximum efforts to generate employment through expansion and diversification of its business. This will avoid unemployment and poverty in the society.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 6 Social Responsibilities of Business

Question 4.
What are the responsibilities of business towards investors and government?
Answer:
[A] Responsibilities of business towards investors:
(1) Proper conduct of meetings : Whenever need arises, a company should call and organise meetings of investors to provide information about the business. Prior to meeting, proper notice and agenda should be sent well in advance. During the period of financial crisis, investors should be convinced and taken into confidence. Reasons for failure should be explained to the investors to gain their confidence.

(2) Return on Investment : Investors invest their money in the company by accepting risk. They are entitled by get fair returns on their investment at regular interval in the form of interest. Investors expect the following from the business organisations : (a) fair returns on their investment, (b) safety of their investment and (c) steady and gradual appreciation of the business.

(3) Handling grievances : A company is required to pay attention and handle the grievances and complaints of the investors amicably. There should be orderly procedure to solve and deal with grievances without any delay. The business management should answer all the queries of investors regarding any issue in satisfactory manner.

(4) Maintain transparency : Investors supply funds for long term and for working capital to carry on business more efficiently. Investors expect that business firms should maintain high degree of transparency in their operations.

(5) Proper disclosure of information : A company is expected to disclose full and factual information through regular reports, circulars and statement of profit. The company must provide its financial performance more correctly so that prospective investors are able to take right decisions to invest their money in future.

(6) Maintain solvency and prestige : Business organisation or a company is expected to maintain sound financial position, prestige, solvency and goodwill to gain confidence of investors. For this, company should undertake innovation, research and expansion programme on the continuous basis.

[B] Responsibilities of business towards government:
(1) Timely payment of taxes : Business organisations are expected to pay various taxes such as sales tax, income tax, corporate tax, excise duty, wealth tax, etc. levied by the government from time to time. These funds enable the government to undertake various development projects.

(2) Observing rules and regulations : The business organisations are expected to comply with the various laws, rules and regulations enacted by the government. The company should follow the laws regarding obtaining license of business operation, price determination and production, etc. They should conduct business in lawful manner.

(3) Earning foreign exchange : The business organisations Eire expected to export their products to foreign countries to earn foreign exchange. Foreign exchange is required by the government to import various goods, valuable and important products.

(4) Economic development : The government sets the targets for balanced growth and rapid economic development of the country. The business organisation is expected to provide necessary support to the government.

(5) Implementing socio-economic policies : The business organisations are expected to provide co-operation and required funds to the government in implementing various socio-economic programmes and policies.

(6) Suggestions to the Government: The business organisations are expected to give suggestions to the government in framing important policies such as Industrial Policy, Import-Export Policy, Licensing Policy, etc. They are helpful to government in framing organisation friendly policies.

(7) No favours : The business organisation should not take any favour from the government officials by giving bribes or influencing them in any matter.

(8) Contributing to government treasury: The business organisation must contribute by extending financial aid to the government during emergencies and natural calamities like floods.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 12th Textbook Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

1. (A) Select the correct options and rewrite the sentence

Question 1.
For online transactions ……………… is required.
(a) registration
(b) trading
(c) business
Answer:
(a) registration

Question 2.
The term ‘e-business’ is derived from the term ……………….. and e-commerce.
(a) Cash
(b) e-pay
(c) e-mail
Answer:
(c) e-mail

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 3.
The transactions under ………………. are between consumers and consumers.
(a) B2B
(b) C2C
(c) B2C
Answer:
(b) C2C

Question 4.
The process of contracting a business function to someone else is called as …………….
(a) Outsourcing
(b) Trading
(c) e-business
Answer:
(a) Outsourcing

Question 5.
In online shopping customers put the product in the ……………..
(a) shopping mall
(b) shopping cart
(c) shopping bag
Answer:
(b) shopping cart

1. (B) Match the pairs

Question 1.

Group A Group B
(A) E-business (1) Consumer to consumer
(B) B2C (2) Exist everywhere
(C) Outsourcing (3) First step
(D) Digital cash (4) Business to Consumer
(E) Registration (5) Electronic business
(6) BPO
(7) RTO
(8) Efficient business
(9) Exist only in cyberspace
(10) Last step

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) E-business (5) Electronic business
(B) B2C (4) Business to Consumer
(C) Outsourcing (6) BPO
(D) Digital cash (9) Exist only in cyberspace
(E) Registration (3) First step

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term for the following statement

Question 1.
The stage where the goods bought are delivered to the customer.
Answer:
delivery stage

Question 2.
The term derived from the terms e-mail and e-commerce.
Answer:
e-business

Question 3.
The transaction which is done with the help of the internet.
Answer:
online transactions

Question 4.
The first step in online transaction.
Answer:
Registration

Question 5.
The process of contracting a business function to specialized agencies.
Answer:
outsourcing

Question 6.
Subset of outsourcing.
Answer:
BPO

Question 7.
Sub segment of BPO.
Answer:
KPO

Question 8.
One of the value added BPO service which involves legal work.
Answer:
LPO.

1. (D) State whether following statement are true or false

Question 1.
It is easy to set up e-business as compared to traditional business.
Answer:
True

Question 2.
The term e-business is derived from the term e-mail and e-commerce.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
e-business allows you to work across the globe in any field.
Answer:
True

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 4.
LPO stands for legal product outsourcing.
Answer:
False

Question 5.
KPO requires advanced analytical and technical skills.
Answer:
True

Question 6.
With the help of outsourcing, company cannot focus on the core areas.
Answer:
False

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
BPO, RTO, LPO, KPO
Answer:
RTO

Question 2.
B2B, B2C, A2Z, C2C.
Answer:
A2Z

Question 3.
Debit card, Credit card, Aadhar card, ATM card.
Answer:
Aadhaar card

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
E-business is an abbreviation for ………………….
Answer:
Electronic business

Question 2.
The term e-business came into existence in the year ………………..
Answer:
1997

Question 3.
E-business means using the …………….. to connect people and process.
Answer:
Internet

Question 4.
E-business is …………….. of e-commerce.
Answer:
superset

Question 5.
E-commerce is …………….. of e-business.
Answer:
subset

Question 6.
The process of contracting a business function to specialized agencies is known as ……………….
Answer:
Outsourcing

1. (G) Select the correct option and complete the following table

(Business to Business, First step, e-commerce, Payment mechanism, e-business)

Group A Group B
A. Registration —————
B. Superset of e-commerce ————–
C. —————— Last step
D. Subset of e-business ————-
E. —————– B2B

Answer:

Group A Group B
A. Registration First step
B. Superset of e-commerce e-business
C. Payment mechanism Last step
D. Subset of e-business e-commerce
E. Business to Business. B2B

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What is E-business?
Answer:
E-business i.e. electronic business means and includes buying and selling of goods and services along with providing technical or consumer support through internet.

Question 2.
What is outsourcing?
Answer:
Outsourcing is the process of contracting (transferring) any specific business activity, the non-core functions, of the business to specialised agencies to carry out for some money consideration.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 3.
What is online transaction?
Answer:
Online transaction refers to a process of buying and selling of goods and services with the help of internet.

Question 4.
What is Shopping cart?
Answer:
Shopping cart is an online record of what buyer has picked up while browsing the online store, i.e. number of units, quantity, price, etc.

Question 5.
What is digital cash?
Answer:
A form of electronic currency that exists only in cyberspace and has no real physical properties but offers the ability to use as real currency in am electronic format.

Question 6.
What is BPO?
Answer:
Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) refers to the outsourcing (transferring to perform) of peripheral (not important) activities (functions) of the organisation to am external organisation or a service provider to minimise cost and increase efficiency.

Question 7.
What is KPO?
Answer:
KPO i.e. Knowledge Process Outsourcing ; described as the functions related to knowledge and information outsourced (transferred to perform) to third party which may be in the same country or in an off shore location.

Question 8.
What is LPO?
Answer:
Legal Process Outsourcing (LPO) is a form of outsourcing in which legal services, ranging from drafting legal documents, performing legal research to offering legal advice are hired or obtained from outside law firm or legal support services company for money consideration.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentence:

Question 1.
E-business is hard to start.
Answer:
easy

Question 2.
There are five stages of online transactions.
Answer:
three

Question 3.
Registration is the Last step in online transaction.
Answer:
First

Question 4.
Digital cash is form of plastic currency.
Answer:
electronic currency

Question 5.
KPO includes less knowledge based and specialized work.
Answer:
more

1. (J) Arrange in proper order

Question 1.
Purchase or sale, Delivery stage, Pre purchase or sale.
Answer:
Pre purchase or sale, Purchase or sale, Delivery stage.

Question 2.
Placing an order, Cash on delivery, Registration
Answer:
Registration, Placing an order, cash on delivery

2. Explain the following term/concept:

Question 1.
E-business.
Answer:
(1) E-business is abbreviated form of electronic business which implies application and use of information and communication technologies (ICT) to conduct and complete all business activities. In 1997, International Business Machines (IBM) used this term. It refers to the use of the web, internet, intranets, extranets, etc. to connect people, process and to conduct business.

(2) The entire process of settling up a website, helping the customers navigate through the website, offering available products, discounts, to attract the prospective buyers, e-business establishes more closer relationship between partners, employees, suppliers and helps companies to manage their business efficiently.

In India, till today most of the business firms are managed as per traditional methods. Now most of the businesses are well aware of benefits of e-business and hence they started incorporating e-business in their business policy and strategy. Google pay, swiggy, ola, ebay are the examples of e-business. Various types of ’e’ business transactions are B2B, B2C, C2B, C2C, B2A, and C2A.

Question 2.
B2B.
Answer:
Business to Business (B2B) : The transactions under B2B include the transactions between one business firm with other business firms. In this type of transactions individual consumers are not involved. In order to get raw materials, catering services, manpower, components of machinery, etc., business firms interact with each other. B2B transactions include supplying ancillary parts/components to manufacturers, providing value added services like catering, providing man power, etc. The business must depend upon one another in order to survive.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 3.
B2C.
Answer:
Business to Consumer (B2C) : The transactions under B2C include transactions between business firms and consumers. When consumer identifies a need or requirement, he searches for the product or services to fulfil his need. He then selects a vendor, negotiates the price, receives product or services, makes payment and gets service and warranty claims. The business firms use their website for different range of marketing activities such as sales or product promotion, product information, reviews about the product or service and delivery of the products at doorstep. In order to get more response from the customers, the cost of products and services is kept low through this method and the speed of transaction is faster, e.g. www.flipkart.com, www.yebhi.com, etc.

Question 4.
C2C.
Answer:
Consumer to Consumer (C2C) : The transactions under Consumer to Consumer are between two people. Using e-business facility on internet, the consumers can buy and sell goods and services to other consumers, through some third party. A common consumer posts the product or services for sale with the price and other details online and other consumers tries to buy them. The sites are performing the role of intermediaries, just to match the consumers. For buying and selling, internet allows a lot of space for consumers group to be formed. The consumer forums interact with each other for best variety of goods and services. Through such groups redressal of complaints is also possible. One may sell his products through an online retail space operated by eBay or Yahoo! shopping, etc.

Question 5.
Outsourcing.
Answer:
(1) Outsourcing is a process of allocation of specific business processes or functions to a specialist external service provider or agency for certain monetary consideration. In outsourcing, the service provider or contractor enters into an agreement or formal contract with the company or the firm for providing services against certain monetary charges. After this the service provider, will take the responsibility of carrying out the tasks as per the expectation of the company.

(2) When services such as security, canteen, sanitation, etc. are outsourced by a company, then the security guards, waiters, cooks, sanitation scavangers, etc. are not the employees of the company although they work inside the company premises. They directly work under the control of service provider or contractor. Many organisations, companies, corporate houses, establishments, hospitals, shops, malls, housing societies, offices, etc. outsource their non-core (less important) areas of business such as canteen, sanitation, security services, etc. to outside agencies.

Question 6.
BPO.
Answer:
(1) BPO stands for Business Process Outsourcing. BPO basically refers to the outsourcing of some work or functions of the organisation to third party or service provider to save overall cost of the organisation. In other words, BPO is a business system in which one company hires another company or service provider to do certain process of work (or task) for certain money consideration.

(2) In brief, BPO is a subset of outsourcing that involves the contracting of the operations and responsibilities to a third party to minimise cost and increase efficiency.

Question 7.
LPO.
Answer:
(1) LPO stands for Legal Process Outsourcing. LPO is a type of KPO that renders legal services ranging from drafting legal documents, performing legal research to offering legal advice. LPO implies practice of law firm. It refers to obtaining legal services from outside legal support service company or law firm for certain consideration.

(2) In some industry or organisation in house legal department or a company outsourced legal work to such law firms where it can be done or performed at less cost. For instance, many companies in Europe or US outsource their legal work to Indian law firms where it can be done at considerably lower cost.

Question 8.
KPO.
Answer:
(1) KPO stands for Knowledge Process Outsourcing. In KPO, the important functions related to knowledge and information are outsourced (assigned to perform) to third party service providers. KPO is the sub-part (Section) of BPO in which services of outside or third party service provider are hired not only for its ability to do particular business process or function but also to provide expertise it has.

(2) KPO is nothing but the allotment of more important or relatively high level tasks or functions to an outside organisation or to a different group specially in a different geographic location. KPO is a subset of Business Process Outsourcing (BPO). KPO implies outsource of more important or core functions or business process to third party service provider or organisation to perform which may or may not reduce its cost of the parent company but surely assists in value addition.

3. Study the following case/situation and express your opinion

Question 1.
Abhay purchases some gift articles online from www.flipkart.com. At the same time Sheetal purchased gift from e-bay.com.

(i) Which website is related to C2C?
(ii) Which website is related to B2C?
(iii) What first step does Abhay need to follow?
Answer:
(i) eBay.com website is related to Consumer to Consumer (C2C).
(ii) www.flipkart.com website is related to Business to Consumer (B2C).
(iii) Before online shopping, Abhay has to register with the www.flipkart.com by filling up a registration form. Registration is the first step in online transaction. Abhay needs to login a particular website to buy particular gift articles.

Question 2.
Satvik purchases watch from Titan shop and his friend Shambhavi purchases watch from online shopping site.

(i) Which shopping is from traditional business?
(ii) Which shopping is from e-business?
(iii) Which business involved high risk ?
Answer:
(i) Purchase of watch by Satvik from Titan shop is an example of traditional business.
(ii) Purchase of watch by Shambhavi from online shopping site is an example of e-business.
(iii) e-business i.e. purchase of watch from online shopping site involves high risk as there is no direct contact between Shambhavi and e-business owner.

Question 3.
Mr. Ved made his payment by cheque at the same time Mr. Shlok made his payment by fund transfer.

(i) Whose payment is faster?
(ii) Whose payment is related to traditional business?
(iii) Whose payment is related to e-business?
Answer:
(i) The payment made by Mr. Shlok by fund transfer is faster than payment made by Mr. Ved through cheque.
(ii) The payment made by Mr. Ved by cheque is related to traditional business.
(iii) The payment made by Mr. Shlok by fund transfer is related to e-business.

4. Distinguish between

Question 1.
Traditional business and E-business
Answer:

Traditional business E-business
1. Meaning Business which is managed and carried out in accordance with specific custom or a trading practice for long time is called traditional business. Business which is managed and carried out by using information technology i.e. the internet is called e-business.
2. Formation Traditional business is comparatively difficult to form as it requires lengthy and complicated procedure to start. E-business is comparatively easy to form.
3. Setting up cost To start, establish and manage traditional business large amount of capital is required. To start, establish and manage e-business very less amount of capital is required.
4. Risk involved In traditional business, less risk is involved as interaction between parties is possible due to personal contact. In e-business, high risk is involved as there is no direct contract between the parties.
5. Scope of business Traditional business is limited to specific area so its scope is limited. E-business covers the entire world so its scope is vast and unlimited.
6. Physical inspection and delivery of goods In traditional business, goods can be inspected physically before they are purchased and their delivery is instant. In e-business, goods cannot be inspected physically before they are purchased and their delivery takes time.

Question 2.
E-business and E-commerce
Answer:

E-business E-commerce
1. Meaning E-business means buying and selling of goods or services along with providing technical or customer support through the internet. E-commerce is the trading aspect of e-business where commercial transaction are done over internet.
2. What is it? E-business is superset of E-commerce. E-commerce is subset of E-business
3. Features E-business involves all types of re-sale and post¬sale efforts. E-commerce just involves buying and selling of products and services.
4. Concept E-business is broader concept. This is because it involves market surveying, supply chain, logistic management and using determining. E-commerce has narrow scope. This is because it is restricted to buying and selling of product and services.
5. Transaction E-business is used in the context of Business to Business (B2B) transactions. E-commerce is more suitable in Business to Consumer (B2C) transactions.
6. Which network is used? E-business includes the use of internet, intranet or extranet. E-commerce involves the compulsory use of internet.

Question 3.
BPO and KPO
Answer:

BPO KPO
1. Meaning BPO implies the outsourcing of non-primary peripheral activities of the organisation to an external organisation to decrease cost and increase efficiency of parent organisation. KPO is a form of outsourcing in which knowledge related and information related work are outsourced to third party service providers to help in value addition and to get cost benefits.
2. Degree of complexity BPO is comparatively less complex. KPO is relatively more complex.
3. Requirement BPO requires process expertise. KPO requires knowledge expertise.
4. Talent required in employees BPO requires personnel having good communication skills. KPO requires professional qualified personnel.
5. Focus on BPO focus on low level process. KPO focus on high level process.

5. Answer in brief

Question 1.
What is Outsourcing? Illustrate with suitable example.
Answer:
(1) Outsourcing is a process of allocation of specific business processes or functions to a specialist external service provider or agency for certain monetary consideration. In outsourcing, the service provider or contractor enters into an agreement or formal contract with the company or the firm for providing services against certain monetary charges. After this the service provider, will take the responsibility of carrying out the tasks as per the expectation of the company.

(2) When services such as security, canteen, sanitation, etc. are outsourced by a company, then the security guards, waiters, cooks, sanitation scavangers, etc. are not the employees of the company although they work inside the company premises. They directly work under the control of service provider or contractor. Many organisations, companies, corporate houses, establishments, hospitals, shops, malls, housing societies, offices, etc. outsource their non-core (less important) areas of business such as canteen, sanitation, security services, etc. to outside agencies.

(3) Similarly arrangements for wedding, anniversary, birthday celebration, etc. can also be outsourced to such agencies. This is because many a time an organisation cannot handle all the functions or aspects of business process internally. Some processes are temporarily required to be performed. In such cases, organisation does not want to recruit and appoint professionals to perform such tasks. Most of the services require finely tuned skills which organisation cannot provide. With increasing global competition, most of the companies are focussing their attention on the improvement of quality of their products. Hence, they outsource their non-core business areas so that they can concentrate fully on their core business activities.

(4) Outsourcing benefits the organisation in two ways, viz. (i) It helps to reduce overall costs and (ii) It can use the expertise of the specialised agencies to perform certain tasks more efficiently.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 2.
What is BPO? Explain in detail.
Answer:
(1) BPO stands for Business Process Outsourcing. BPO basically refers to the outsourcing of some work or functions of the organisation to third party or service provider to save overall cost of the organisation. In other words, BPO is a business system in which one company hires another company or service provider to do certain process of work (or task) for certain money consideration.

(2) In brief, BPO is a subset of outsourcing that involves the contracting of the operations and responsibilities to a third party to minimise cost and increase efficiency.

(3) It refers to the outsourcing of less important (non-core) or non-primary activities of the organisation to an external organisation or service provider to minimise the cost and increase efficiency of the organisation.

(4) For instance, customer care centres for various banks, service providers, etc. BPO is less complex and requires process expertise. It also requires good communication skills. It focuses on low level process.

Question 3.
What is KPO? Explain in detail.
Answer:
(1) KPO stands for Knowledge Process Outsourcing. In KPO, the important functions related to knowledge and information are outsourced (assigned to perform) to third party service providers. KPO is the sub-part (Section) of BPO in which services of outside or third party service provider are hired not only for its ability to do particular business process or function but also to provide expertise it has.

(2) KPO is nothing but the allotment of more important or relatively high level tasks or functions to an outside organisation or to a different group specially in a different geographic location. KPO is a subset of Business Process Outsourcing (BPO). KPO implies outsource of more important or core functions or business process to third party service provider or organisation to perform which may or may not reduce its cost of the parent company but surely assists in value addition.

(3) Thus, in KPO the business processes which are outsourced are exceptionally more specialised and knowledge based in comparison to Business Process Outsourcings. In brief, KPO is a form of outsourcing in which knowledge related and information related work is done or carried out by the workers working in different company or by a subsidiary of the some organisation which may be in the same country or on off shore location to save cost.

(4) In KPO, both core as well as non-core activities are performed. It requires advanced analytical and technical skills and high degree of specialist expertise. Margarent Rouse defines KPO as, “KPO is the allocation of relatively high- level tasks to an outside organisation or a different group within the same organisation’’

Question 4.
What is LPO? Explain in detail.
Answer:
(1) LPO stands for Legal Process Outsourcing. LPO is a type of KPO that renders legal services ranging from drafting legal documents, performing legal research to offering legal advice. LPO implies practice of law firm. It refers to obtaining legal services from outside legal support service company or law firm for certain consideration.

(2) In some industry or organisation in house legal department or a company outsourced legal work to such law firms where it can be done or performed at less cost. For instance, many companies in Europe or US outsource their legal work to Indian law firms where it can be done at considerably lower cost.

(3) In recent years, LPO an high end industry has been growing rapidly in India. LPO is superficially a media invention which is derived from BPO. LPO has made tremendous progress in India in past few years.

(4) LPO gained success by producing and rendering services such as document review, legal research and writing, drafting of briefings, etc. Important benefits of outsourcing legal functions is cost savings and to access high level talent and niche expertise that may not exist within the firm or company.

6. Justify the following statements

Question 1.
It is easy to set up e-business as compared to traditional business,
Answer:
(1) e-business is run, managed and carried out with the help of information technology, i.e. web (internet). However, traditional business is run, managed and carried out in accordance with specific old custom or a trading practices of long lasting.

(2) In traditional business large, physical space is needed, to arrange and display the variety of goods. It needs large amount of capital to have infrastructure, staff and other required facilities, e-business can be started, managed and operated with the help of the internet from any place or even from one’s own home. Naturally, it requires very less capital. It is also easy to set up.

(3) In traditional business, time is required to travel, to convince, to negotiate and to interact with the customers. In such process lot of time, energy and money are wasted. While in e-business required information is provided and accepted with terms and conditions more instantly.

(4) e-business is also free from most of the problems as faced by the traditional business. Thus, it is easy to set up e-business.

Question 2.
E-business allows user to work across the globe in any field.
Answer:
(1) e-business i.e. electronic business may be defined as the application of information and technologies to support all the activities of business. It involves electronic buying and supply, chain management, processing orders electronically, online payments via debit or credit cards, handling customer service, etc.

(2) In order to begin with e-business, a business owner must have an internet presence. He has to obtain an e-mail address for communicating the same to the customers and other business associates. This helps speedy communication between business firms and customers. Communication is easy as there is no face to face interaction.

(3) Once the owner of e-business has acquired an electronic means of contact, he may sell goods to the customers residing in any part of the world. There is no need of any wholesalers, retailers, etc. This reduces costs and increases profit. In e-business, goods can be purchased on internet from any place across the globe, payments can be made with the help of debit, credit card, internet banking and the goods are physically delivered at the doorstep of the buyer.

(4) Similarly, he can do trading in any field, e-business uses internet to connect people and processes. The World Wide Web (WWW) offers lot of exposure to e-business on a global platform. International relationship is very strong in e-business. The Government also offers lot of support to e-business. Thus, it allows one to work across the globe in any field he likes.

Question 3.
Online transaction is done with the help of the internet.
Answer:
(1) Online transactions take place when a process of buying and selling are completed through the internet. For online transaction, registration is required. The consumer needs to login a particular website to buy a particular article or service. The customer’s email ID, name, address and other details are saved and safe with the website for further contact.

(2) When a customer likes a product or service, he/she selects, pick ups and drops the items or things in the shopping cart. The shopping cart keeps the systematic and detail record of what items have been picked up while browsing the online store.

(3) The buyer then proceeds to the payment option after selecting all the products. Payment can be made by accepting cash on delivery mode of payment, after receiving physical delivery of goods. The customer may pay in cash or by debit or credit card. The buyer also sends a cheque to the seller and the seller sends the products after the realisation of the cheque.

(4) If the payment is transferred by the buyer from his account to the seller’s account electronically, then after the payment is received by the seller, he sends the goods to buyer. The credit card or debit card is also used by the card holder for. making payment of purchases. The amount gets immediately transferred to vendor’s bank account. After the successful transfer of funds, goods are delivered by the vendor to buyer. Thus, all the aspects of online transaction are completed with the help of the internet.

7. Attempt the following

Question 1.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of e-business?
Answer:
[A] Advantages of e-business : The advantages of e-business are explained as follows:
(1) Ease of formation : In comparison to the traditional method of business, e-business is very easy to set up. The advent of internet has afforded entrepreneurs the ability to open small businesses with a minimal overhead.

(2) Lower investment requirements : As compared to traditional business, the investment requirements of e-business are very low. This is because for conducting e-business, the entrepreneurs do not need a large store or professional space, e-business can be managed with minimum manpower. If entrepreneurs have good contact (network), they can do extremely good business with less investments.

(3) Convenience : In e-business, seller and buyer get advantages of internet platform. Internet offers the convenience of 24 × 7 × 365 days a year to both buyer and seller. Business can be done any time with great flexibility. Truly speaking, e-business has enabled and enhanced by electronics. It offers benefits of accessing anything, anytime and from anywhere.

(4) Speed : Web facilitates direct communication between the seller and buyer. It helps the customer to direct or point out his needs and expectation. Similarly, using website seller can show the available products, offer discount and do everything 1 possible to sell his products. Thus, much of buying or selling involves exchange of information through internet at the click of mouse.

(5) Global access : Truly speaking, internet is boundaryless. Internet facilitates and allows the seller an access to the national as well as global market. Internet also offers freedom to buyer to select products from any part of world. There is no need of face to face interaction between buyer and seller. All the things are completed by using internet.

(6) Movement towards a paperless society : Use of internet has considerably reduced its dependence on the paperwork. Due to use of internet, recording and referencing of information are very easy and less time consuming.

(7) Government support : In e-business transactions, cost reduction and availability of products at relatively low prices are possible. This is beneficial to society at large. Hence, government always supports or favours e-business by providing favourable environment for establishing e-business. This support facilitates maximum transparency in the business.

(8) Easy payment : The payment in e-business can be done by credit card, debit card, fund transfer, etc. These facilities are available round the clock.

[B] Disadvantages of e-business : The disadvantages of e-business are explained as follows:
(1) Lack of personal touch : Before buying the products most of the customers want to see, handle, touch, inspect or test the products which is not possible in e-business system. Because of this reasons, most of the customers do not look for online purchase of products on the internet.

(2) Delivery time : In e-business, the delivery of products takes considerable time. In traditional business, immediate delivery of products is given to buyer after he buys the products. The considerable time lag discourages the customer to buy products from e-business. Now a days most of the e-business assures one day delivery. This improvement does not solve the issue completely.

(3) Security issues : The scam through online business by many people cannot be denied. It is also easier for hackers to obtain one’s financial details which can be misused for their personal gain. Thus, online business has less security and integrity issues. Because of these reasons the potential buyers are also discouraged to buy anything from e-business.

(4) Government interference : Many a time, the government monitors, interferes and controls the e-business system. This may put a great hurdle on its growth and prosperity.

(5) High risk : In e-business system, transaction risks such as supply of inferior quality of goods, supplied products do not match with the sample shown, high prices, defects in products, cheating, etc. cannot be denied. In case of any fraud, it becomes very difficult to take legal action due to lack of direct contact between the parties.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

Question 2.
What are the types of e-buslness? Explain.
Answer:
The types of e-business is shown in the following:
e-business-

  1. Business to Business (B2B)
  2. Business to Consumer (B2C)
  3. Consumer to Business (C2B)
  4. Consumer to Consumer (C2C)
  5. Business to Administration (B2A)
  6. Consumer to Administration (C2A)

The type of e-business are explained as follows:
(1) Business to Business (B2B) : The transactions under B2B include the transactions between one business firm with other business firms. In this type of transactions individual consumers are not involved. In order to get raw materials, catering services, manpower, components of machinery, etc., business firms interact with each other. B2B transactions include supplying ancillary parts/components to manufacturers, providing value added services like catering, providing man power, etc. The business must depend upon one another in order to survive.

(2) Business to Consumer (B2C) : The transactions under B2C include transactions between business firms and consumers. When consumer identifies a need or requirement, he searches for the product or services to fulfil his need. He then selects a vendor, negotiates the price, receives product or services, makes payment and gets service and warranty claims.

The business firms use their website for different range of marketing activities such as sales or product promotion, product information, reviews about the product or service and delivery of the products at doorstep. In order to get more response from the customers, the cost of products and services is kept low through this method and the speed of transaction is faster, e.g. www.flipkart.com, www.yebhi.com, etc.

(3) Consumer to Business (C2B) : Consumer to Business is rapidly growing where the consumer demands or requests a specific service from the business lender. In this transaction, buyers quote their own price for specific product or services. A consumer who is in need of product or services posts his request with a specific budget. The companies interested in providing services or products review the customer’s requirement, negotiate price and finalise the deal. Pest control service, doorstep food delivery, taxi services, etc. are the examples of Consumer to Business transaction.

(4) Consumer to Consumer (C2C) : The transactions under Consumer to Consumer are between two people. Using e-business facility on internet, the consumers can buy and sell goods and services to other consumers, through some third party. A common consumer posts the product or services for sale with the price and other details online and other consumers tries to buy them. The sites are performing the role of intermediaries, just to match the consumers.

For buying and selling, internet allows a lot of space for consumers group to be formed. The consumer forums interact with each other for best variety of goods and services. Through such groups redressal of complaints is also possible. One may sell his products through an online retail space operated by eBay or Yahoo! shopping, etc.

(5) Business to Administration (B2A) : The transactions under Business to Administration are between the business and public administration. This part of e-commerce entirely includes all transactions conducted online between firm at one end and public administration on the other end. For instance, registration of companies, filing returns, payment of taxes, getting permits, etc.

(6) Consumer to Administration (C2A) : The transactions under Consumer to Administration are between the Consumer and Public Administration. This part of e-commerce includes entirely all transactions conducted online between consumer at one end and public administration on the other end. For instance, obtaining passport, aadhaar card, licenses, etc.

Question 3.
What are the advantages of outsourcing?
Answer:
Advantages : The advantages of outsourcing are explained as follows:
(1) Overall cost advantages : Outsourcing reduces cost. Outsourcing avoids the need to hire employees in houses. Hence, recruitment and training costs can be eliminated or minimised. It S also saves time and efforts on training the employees. Similarly, cost of outsourcing services is much less than recruiting work force for the company.

(2) Stimulates entrepreneurship, employment and experts : Outsourcing encourages and stimulates entrepreneurship, employment and expertness in the country from where outsourcing is done.

(3) Low manpower cost : In every organisation manpower is required to operate machineries, to do routine work, to perform jobs, to administer and manage business affairs. Recruitment and appointment of personnel on permanent basis are costly. Manpower through outsourcing is available at a lower cost. Outsourcing is beneficial in some portions of business process.

(4) Access to professional, expert and high quality services : Usually the non-core areas or tasks are given to the people who are expert, specialised and skilled in that particular field. These people provide better level of services. They commit less errors and avoid wastage and misuse.

(5) Emphasis on core process rather than the supporting ones : Outsourcing supporting the business processes, facilitates the organisation to concentration on its core (more important) areas to improve the quality of its products and services. This in turn leads to better profits and increase output and turnover.

(6) Investment requirements are reduced : By outsourcing the non-core areas, the organisation can easily save on investing in the latest technology. These organisation allow the outsourcing partners to handle the entire infrastructure. Thus, the organisation itself is required to manage only remaining portion of business process. Hence, investment requirements of the organisation are very less.

(7) Increased efficiency and productivity : Many a time tasks are outsourced to the vendors who are specialised in their fields. Outsourced vendors have deep knowledge, experience, specific equipment and technical expertise. They give performance or do assigned task much better than the ones at the outsourcing organisation. As a result the tasks can be completed faster, with greater efficiency and with better quality output.

(8) Knowledge sharing : Most of the times tasks are outsourced to the vendors who are specialised and expert in their fields. While working together outsourced partners (vendors) share their knowledge, experience, technical expertise, etc. with the employees of the organisation. This is one of the prime advantages of outsourcing. Organisation also uses and shares particular kind of service. Thus, outsourcing helps to develop both the companies and also boosts goodwill in the industry.

Question 4.
What are the disadvantages of outsourcing ?
Answer:
Disadvantages of outsourcing : The disadvantages of outsourcing are explained as follows:
(1) Lack of customer focus : An outsourced vendor may be catering to the expertise needs of several companies at a time. In such cases, the vendors may lack complete focus on outsourcing company’s needs or tasks. As a result, the quality of the outsourced service may not be up to the mark.

(2) A threat to security and confidentiality : When an organisation outsources some portions of business process, it involves a risk of exposing its confidential information to a third party. Similarly, there is danger of the misuse of company’s confidential information by the contractors. So outsourcing involves security issues.
(3) Dissatisfactory services : In case the organisation does not select right partner for outsourcing, it has to face several problems such as substandard quality output, delayed delivery, inappropriate categorisation of responsibilities, etc. It has to compromise on the quality of outsourcing.

(4) Ethical issues : In some cases, the company outsourcing its non-core areas, ignores ethical issues related to outsourcing. When the functions of the organisation are outsourced to a company from another country, the employment opportunities from one’s own country get reduced, which in turn aggravates the unemployment problem.

(5) Other disadvantages :

  1. Misunderstanding of contracts ultimately creates many problems for the organisations.
  2. Lack of effective communication also creates many problems to the organisations outsourcing their functions.
  3. Some times the quality of the outsourced service is not up to the mark, poor and delayed services. In such cases company has to suffer heavy loss on account of wastage.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

8. Answer the following

Question 1.
Explain the steps involved in online transaction.
Answer:
In online transaction there are three stages, viz. pre-purchase/sale, actual purchase/ sale and delivery stage. Online transaction involves the following steps:
(1) Registration : Registration is compulsory for online transactions. One who wants to do online shopping is required to register his name with online vendor by filling up a registration form. The consumer is required to login a particular website. The customer’s details such as email ID, name, address and other information are saved and are safe with the website along with a ‘Password’ relating to the registered ‘account’ and ‘Shopping cart’. To avoid misuse by anyone ‘Account’ and ‘Shopping Cart’ are password protected.

(2) Placing an order : The online shopper can select, pick up and drop the items or things in the shopping cart. The shopping cart keeps the systematic and detail record of what items or things have been picked up, quantity to be bought, the price of each product while browsing the online store. After confirmation, the customer or shopper has to choose a payment option.

(3) Payment : Making payment is the last step in online transaction. The buyer is required to select the payment option. The payment systems in online transactions are secured with very high level encryption. Because of these arrangements, the personal financial information gets completely secured. Payment can be made in one of the following ways:
(i) Cash on Delivery (COD) : According to Cash on Delivery mode of payment, after receiving physical delivery of goods, payments is effected at the doorstep of the customer. The customer can make payment in cash or through debit or credit card.

(ii) Cheque : Under this mode of payment, the S vendor collects the cheque from the customer and j after realisation of the cheque, delivery of the goods is given to the buyer.

(iii) Net banking transfer : Under this mode, the payment is made by buyer to vendor by transfer of funds through the internet. The buyer transfers the agreed purchase amount to the online vendor’s account. It is an electronic facility i of transferring funds though the internet. After receiving the amount, the vendor delivers the goods to the buyer.

(iv) Credit or Debit Cards : Credit card and Debit card are also called Plastic Money. The vendor gets the amount from the buyer through credit or debit card. The amount gets immediately transferred to vendor’s bank account. After the successful transfer of funds, goods are delivered by the vendor to buyer.

(v) Digital Cash : Digital cash is a form of electronic currency which has no reed physical properties. However, digital cash offers the ability to use real currency in an electronic format.

Question 2.
What is Outsourcing? Explain the advantages and disadvantages of outsourcing.
Answer:
[A] Meaning : Outsourcing is a process of allocation of specific business processes or functions to a specialist external service provider or agency for certain monetary consideration. In outsourcing, the service provider or contractor enters into an agreement or formal contract with the company or the firm for providing services against certain monetary charges. After this the service provider, will take the responsibility of carrying out the tasks as per the expectation of the company.

[B] Advantages : The advantages of outsourcing are explained as follows:
(1) Overall cost advantages : Outsourcing reduces cost. Outsourcing avoids the need to hire employees in houses. Hence, recruitment and training costs can be eliminated or minimised. It is also saves time and efforts on training the employees. Similarly, cost of outsourcing services is much less than recruiting work force for the company.

(2) Stimulates entrepreneurship, employment and experts : Outsourcing encourages and stimulates entrepreneurship, employment and expertness in the country from where outsourcing is done.

(3) Low manpower cost : In every organisation manpower is required to operate machineries, to do routine work, to perform jobs, to administer and manage business affairs. Recruitment and appointment of personnel on permanent basis are costly. Manpower through outsourcing is available at a lower cost. Outsourcing is beneficial in some portions of business process.

(4) Access to professional, expert and high quality services : Usually the non-core areas or tasks are given to the people who are expert, specialised and skilled in that particular field. These people provide better level of services. They commit less errors and avoid wastage and misuse.

(5) Emphasis on core process rather than the supporting ones : Outsourcing supporting the business processes, facilitates the organisation to concentration on its core (more important) areas to improve the quality of its products and services. This in turn leads to better profits and increase output and turnover.

(6) Investment requirements are reduced : By outsourcing the non-core areas, the organisation can easily save on investing in the latest technology. These organisation allow the outsourcing partners to handle the entire infrastructure. Thus, the organisation itself is required to manage only remaining portion of business process. Hence, investment requirements of the organisation are very less.

(7) Increased efficiency and productivity : Many a time tasks are outsourced to the vendors who are specialised in their fields. Outsourced vendors have deep knowledge, experience, specific equipment and technical expertise. They give performance or do assigned task much better than the ones at the outsourcing organisation. As a result the tasks can be completed faster, with greater efficiency and with better quality output.

(8) Knowledge sharing : Most of the times tasks are outsourced to the vendors who are specialised and expert in their fields. While working together outsourced partners (vendors) share their knowledge, experience, technical expertise, etc. with the employees of the organisation. This is one of the prime advantages of outsourcing. Organisation also uses and shares particular kind of service. Thus, outsourcing helps to develop both the companies and also boosts goodwill in the industry.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 5 Emerging Modes of Business

[C] Disadvantages of outsourcing : The disadvantages of outsourcing are explained as follows:
(1) Lack of customer focus : An outsourced vendor may be catering to the expertise needs of several companies at a time. In such cases, the vendors may lack complete focus on outsourcing company’s needs or tasks. As a result, the quality of the outsourced service may not be up to the mark.

(2) A threat to security and confidentiality : When an organisation outsources some portions of business process, it involves a risk of exposing its confidential information to a third party. Similarly, there is danger of the misuse of company’s confidential information by the contractors. So outsourcing involves security issues.
(3) Dissatisfactory services : In case the organisation does not select right partner for outsourcing, it has to face several problems such as substandard quality output, delayed delivery, inappropriate categorisation of responsibilities, etc. It has to compromise on the quality of outsourcing.

(4) Ethical issues : In some cases, the company outsourcing its non-core areas, ignores ethical issues related to outsourcing. When the functions of the organisation are outsourced to a company from another country, the employment opportunities from one’s own country get reduced, which in turn aggravates the unemployment problem.

(5) Other disadvantages :

  1. Misunderstanding of contracts ultimately creates many problems for the organisations.
  2. Lack of effective communication also creates many problems to the organisations outsourcing their functions.
  3. Some times the quality of the outsourced service is not up to the mark, poor and delayed services. In such cases company has to suffer heavy loss on account of wastage.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 1.
What is a PN-junction diode? What is a depletion region? What is barrier potential in a PN-junction?
Answer:
PN-junction diode: A two-terminal semiconductor device consisting of a PN-junction is called a PN- junction diode.
Depletion region: The neighbourhood of the junction between a p-type layer and an n-type layer within a single semiconducting crystal is depleted of free (or mobile) charge carriers. This is called the depletion region or depletion layer.

Barrier potential: The electric potential difference across the PN-junction is called the potential barrier or barrier potential.

[Note: Under the open-circuit condition (no applied potential difference), the width of the depletion region and the height of the potential barrier have their equilibrium values. The width of the depletion region in an unbiased pn-junction diode ranges from 0.5 pm to 1 pm and depends on the dopant concentrations. The barrier potential is about 0.3 V for Ge junction diode and about 0.7 V for Si junction diode.]

Question 2.
Explain the forward bias and reverse bias conditions of a diode.
Answer:
Forward-biased state : When the positive terminal of a cell is connected to the p side of the junction and the negative terminal to the n side, the diode is said to be forward biased. When forward biased, the depletion region narrows and, consequently, the potential barrier is lowered. This causes the majority charge carriers of each region to cross into the other region. This way the diode conducts when forward biased; the total current across the junction is called the forward current and is due to both electron and hole currents. Because of the narrowing of the depletion region, a forward-biased junction diode has a very low resistance and acts as a closed switch.

Reverse-biased state : A pn-junction diode is said to be reverse biased when the positive terminal of a cell or battery is connected to the n side of the junction, and the negative terminal to the p side. When reverse biased, the depletion region widens and the potential barrier is increased, the majority charge carrier concentration in each region decreases against the equilibrium values and the reverse-biased junction diode has a high resistance. The diffusion current across the junction becomes zero. Thus, the diode does not conduct when reverse biased and is said to be in a quiescent or non-conducting state, i.e., it acts as an open switch (almost).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 3.
What is rectification? What is a rectifier? How does a pn-junction diode act as a rectifier?
Answer:

  1. The process of converting an alternating voltage (or current) to a direct voltage (or current) is called rectification.
    A circuit or device that is used to convert an alternating voltage (or current) to a direct voltage (or current) is called a rectifier. A rectifier produces a unidirectional but pulsating voltage from an alternating voltage.
  2. When an alternating voltage is applied across a pn-junction diode, the diode is forward-biased and reverse-biased during alternate half cycles.
  3. During the half cycle when the diode is forward- – biased, it conducts. Therefore, there is a current through it from the p-region to the n-region.
  4. During the next half cycle, it is reverse-biased and does not conduct. Therefore, current passes only in one direction through the circuit. This way, a pn-junction diode acts as a rectifier.

Question 4.
Explain the need for rectification/rectifiers.
Answer:
Nowadays electrical energy is generated, transmitted and distributed in the form of alternating voltage because it is simpler and more economical than direct current transmission and distribution. Another important reason for the widespread use of alternating voltage in preference to direct voltage is the fact that alternating voltage can be conveniently changed in magnitude by means of a transformer.

However, most electrical and electronic systems need a dc voltage to work. Since the transmitted voltage is very high and alternating, we need to reduce the ac line voltage and then convert it to a relatively constant dc output voltage. The power-line voltage is sequentially stepped down at the distribution substations. At the consumer end, the ac voltage is rectified using junction diodes to dc voltage.

Question 5.
Draw a neat block diagram of a dc power supply and state the function of each part.
OR
With the help of a block diagram, explain the scheme of a power supply for obtaining dc output voltage from ac line voltage.
Answer:
A consumer electronic system called a dc power supply produces a fairly constant dc voltage from ac supply voltage. Below figure shows a functional block diagram of the circuits within a power supply.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 1
Block diagram of dc power supply with waveforms at each stage

The ac supply voltage is usually stepped-down by a transformer and its secondary voltage is converted to a pulsating dc by a diode rectifier. By the superposition theorem, this rectifier output can be looked upon as having two different components : a dc voltage (the average value) and an ac voltage (the fluctuating part). The filter circuit smooths out the pulsating dc. It blocks almost all of the ac component and almost all of the dc component is passed on to the load resistor. Figure shows the filtered output for a rectified full-wave dc. The only deviation from a perfect dc voltage is the small ac load voltage called ripple. A well-designed filter circuit minimizes the ripple. In this way, we get an almost perfect dc voltage, one that is almost constant, like the voltage out of a battery.

The regulation of a power supply is its ability to hold the output steady under conditions of changing input or changing load. As power supplies are loaded, the output voltage tends to drop to a lower value. Nowadays, an integrated circuit (IC) voltage regulator is connected between a filter and the load resistor, especially in low-voltage power supplies. This device not only reduces the ripple, it also holds the output voltage constant under varying load and ac input voltage.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 6.
Distinguish between a half-wave rectifier and full-wave rectifier.
Answer:

Half-wave rectifier Full-wave rectifier
1. A device or a circuit which rectifies only one-half of each cycle of an alternat­ing voltage is called a half-wave rectifier. 1. A device or a circuit which rectifies both halves of each cycle of an alternat­ing voltage is called a full-wave rectifier.
2. A half-wave rectifier cir­cuit uses a single diode which conducts for only one-half of each cycle. 2. A full-wave rectifier cir­cuit uses at least two diodes which conduct alternately for consecu­tive halves of each cycle.

Question 7.
State any two advantages of a full-wave rectifier.
Answer:

  1. A full-wave rectifier rectifies both halves of each cycle of the ac input.
  2. Efficiency of a full-wave rectifier is twice that of a half-wave rectifier.
  3. The ripple in a full-wave rectifier is less than that in a half-wave rectifier.
    Ripple factors for a full-wave and half-wave rectifiers are respectively, 0.482 and 1.21.

Question 8.
Explain ripple in the output of a rectifier. What is ripple factor?
Answer:
The output of a rectifier is a pulsating dc. By the superposition theorem, this rectifier output can be looked upon as having two different components : a dc and an ac. The direct current is the average value of the pulsating current, averaged over each half cycle of the ac input. The ac component in the output is called the ripple. Ripple is undesirable in most electronic circuits and devices.

The ratio of the root-mean-square value of the ac component to the average value of the dc component in the filtered rectifier output is known as the ripple factor.
Ripple factor = \(\frac{(r m s \text { value of ac component })}{\text { (average value of dc component) }}\)
Percentage ripple = ripple factor × 100%
This factor mainly decides the effectiveness of a filter circuit in a power supply, i.e., smaller the value of this factor, lesser is the ac component in comparison to the dc component. Hence, more effective is the filter.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 10.
Explain the action of a capacitive filter with necessary diagrams.
Answer:
Consider a simple capacitive filter added to a full-wave rectifier circuit, Fig. 16.6(a). A capacitor is a charge storage device that it can deliver later to a load.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 2
(a) Capacitive filter at the output of a full-wave rectifier (b) Waveform of filtered output
In the first quarter cycle, the capacitor charges as the rectifier output peaks. Later, as the rectifier output drops off during the second quarter cycle, the capacitor discharges and delivers the load current. The voltage across the capacitor, and the load, decreases up to a point B when the next voltage peak recharges the capacitor again. To be effective, a filter capacitor should be only slightly discharged between peaks. This will mean a small voltage change across the load and, thus, small ripple. As shown in Fig. (b), the capacitor supplies all the load current from A to B; from B to C, the rectifier supplies the current to the load and the capacitor.

The discharging time constant of a filter capacitor has to be long as compared to the time between the voltage peaks. For the same capacitor used with a half-wave rectifier, the capacitor will have twice the time to discharge, and the ripple will be greater. Thus, full-wave rectifiers are used when a low ripple factor is desired.

Question 11.
What is regulation in a dc power supply ? OR Explain unregulated power supply and regulated power supply.
Answer:
Voltage regulation is am important factor of a power supply. Regulation is its ability to hold the dc output steady under conditions of changing ac input or changing load. The output voltage under no-load condition (no current drawn from the supply) tends to drop to a lower value when load current is drawn from the supply (under load). The amount the dc voltage changes between the no-load and full-load conditions is described by a factor called voltage regulation.
Voltage regulation = \(\frac{\text { no-load voltage }-\text { full-load voltage }}{\text { full-load voltage }}\)

Question 12.
What is a regulated power supply?
Answer:
A dc power supply whose preset output voltage remains constant irrespective of variations in the line voltage or load current is called a regulated power supply.

Question 13.
What is a unregulated power supply ?
Answer:
A dc power supply whose output changes when a load is connected across it is called unregulated power supply.

Question 14.
Name any four common special-purpose diodes.
Answer:
Special-purpose diodes :

  1. Zener diode
  2. light emitting diode (LED)
  3. photodiode
  4. solar cell.

Question 15.
What is meant by breakdown of a pn-junction? Name two important mechanisms of junction breakdown.
Answer:
In a reverse-biased pn-junction, the depletion region is wider and the potential barrier is higher over equilibrium values. The majority charge carrier concentration in each region decreases from the equilibrium values and the diffusion current across the junction is zero. Only a very very small current flows due to the motion of minority charge carriers. Thus, the principal characteristic of a pn-junction diode is that it rectifies, i.e., it conducts significantly in one direction only.

When a sufficiently large reverse voltage is applied to a pn-junction, there is an abrupt strong increase in the reverse current and its rectifying properties are lost. This is known as junction breakdown. The absolute value VB of the voltage at which the phenomenon occurs is called breakdown voltage. The breakdown process is not inherently destructive and is reversible.

Two important breakdown mechanisms are the Zener breakdown (due to tunneling effect) and avalanche breakdown (due to avalanche multipli-cation).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 16.
Explain Zener breakdown.
Answer:
In a reverse-biased pn-junction, the depletion region is wider and the potential barrier is higher over equilibrium values. The electric field in the depletion region is from the n- to the p-region. When a sufficiently large reverse voltage is applied to a pn-junction, the junction breaks down and conducts a very large current. Of the two important breakdown mechanisms, Zener breakdown takes place in heavily doped diodes.

Usually, the energy that an electron can gain from even a strong field is very small. However, the depletion region is very narrow in a heavily doped diode. Because of this, the electric field across the depletion region is intense enough to break the covalent bonds between neighbouring silicon atoms and pull electrons out of their orbits. This results in conduction electrons and holes. In the energy band diagram representation, this corresponds to the transition of an electron from the valence band to the conduction band and become available for conduction.

The current increases with increase in applied voltage, but without further increase in voltage across the diode. This process, in which an electron of energy less than the barrier height penetrates through the energy bandgap, is called tunneling (a quantum mechanical effect). The creation of electrons in the conduction band and holes in the valence band by tunneling effect in a reverse- biased pn-junction diode is called the Zener effect.

[Notes : (1) Tunneling occurs only if the electric field is very high. The typical field for silicon and gallium arsenide is > 106 V / cm. To achieve such a high field, the doping concentrations for both p- and w-regions must be quite high (>1018 cm-3). (2) Zener breakdown or Zener effect is named in honour of Clarence M. Zener (1905-93), US physicist, who explained the breakdown mechanism. (3) Avalanche breakdown occurs in diodes with a doping concentration of ≅ 1017 cm-3 or less. The carriers gain enough kinetic energy to generate electron-hole pairs by the avalanche process when the value of reverse | V | becomes large. An electron in the conduction band can gain kinetic energy before it collides with a valence electron. The high-energy electron in the conduction band can transfer some of its kinetic energy to the valence electron to make an upward transition to the conduction band. An electron-hole pair is generated. All such electrons and holes accelerate in the high field of the depletion region and, in turn, generate other electron-hole pairs in a like manner. This process is called the avalanche process.]

Question 17. What is a Zener diode?
Answer:
A Zener diode is a heavily doped pn-junction diode operated in its breakdown region. Zener breakdown occurs when the breakdown voltage is less than about 6 V while avalanche breakdown occurs in lightly doped diodes and for breakdown voltage greater than 6 V. However, the Zener effect was discovered before the avalanche effect, so all diodes used in the breakdown region came to be known as Zener diodes.

Question 18.
Explain the use of a resistor in series with a Zener diode.
Answer:
The I-V characteristics in the breakdown region of a Zener diode is almost vertical. That is, the current IZ can rapidly increase at constant VZ. To prevent damage due to excessive heating, the Zener current should not exceed the rated maximum current, IZM. Hence, a current-limiting resistor Rs is connected in series with the diode.

IZ and the power dissipated in the Zener diode will be large for IL = 0 (no-load condition) or when IL is less than the rated maximum (when Rs is small and RL is large). The current-limiting resistor Rs is so chosen that the Zener current does not exceed the rated maximum reverse current, IZM when there is no load or when the load is very high.

The rated maximum power of a Zener diode is
PZM = IZM = VZ
At no-load condition, the current through Rs is Z = IZM and the voltage drop across it is V – VZ, where V is the unregulated source voltage. The diode current will be maximum when V is maxi-mum at Vmax and I = IZM. Then, the minimum value of the series resistance should be
Rs, min = \(\frac{V_{\max }-V_{Z}}{I_{Z M}}\)

A Zener diode is operated in the breakdown region. There is a minimum Zener current, IZ(min), that places the desired operating point in the breakdown region. There is a maximum Zener current, IZM, at which the power dissipation drives the junction temperature to the maximum allowed. Beyond that current the diode can be damaged. Hence, the supply voltage must be greater than Vz and the current-limiting resistor must limit the diode current to less than the rated maximum, IZM.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 19.
State any two applications of a Zener diode.
Answer:
Applications of a Zener diode :

  1. Voltage regulator
  2. Fixed reference voltage in biasing transistors
  3. Peak clipper in a wave shaping circuit
  4. Meter protection from voltage fluctuations.

Question 20.
Solve the following :
(1) A Zener diode has a Zener voltage of 2.4 V and a 500 mW power rating. What should be the maxi-mum current through the diode if you design conservatively with a safety factor of 2?
Solution:
Data : Vz = 2.4 V, PZM = 500 mW A conservative design includes a safety factor to keep the power dissipation well below the rated maximum power. Thus, with a safety factor of 2, the operating power of the Zener diode is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 3

(2) A 10 V regulated power supply uses a Zener diode of 500 mW power rating with an input voltage of 15 V dc and a current limiting resistor of 500 Ω. If a load of 1 kΩ is connected across the diode, is the diode in the breakdown region?
Solution:
Data: V = 15V, VZ = 10V, Rs = 500 Ω, RL =1000 Ω
The supply current,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 4
∴ The diode current, IZ = I – IL = 0
Thus, the Zener diode is at the threshold of break down and there will not be any regulation.

(3) A 10 V regulated power supply is designed using a Zener diode of 500 mW power rating with an input voltage of 15 V dc. A load of 1 kΩ is to be connected across the diode. Calculate (a) the rated maximum current through the diode (b) the mini mum value of the series resistance.
Solution:
Data: V = 15V, VZ = 10 V, PZM = 500 mW,
RL = 1000 Ω, Rs = 200 Ω
The rated maximum Zener current,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 5

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

(4) In the above problem, calculate the load current. If a series resistance of 200 Ω is used, what is the Zener current ?
Solution:
Data : V = 15 V, VZ = 10 V, PZM = 500 mW, RL = 1000 Ω, Rs = 200 Ω
The current through Rs is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 6
∴ The zener current,
IZ = Is – IL = 25 – 10 = 15 mA

(5) A Zener regulator has an input voltage that may vary from 15 V to 20 V while the load current may vary from 5 mA to 20 mA. If the Zener voltage is 12 V, calculate the maximum series resistance.
Solution:
Data : Vlow = 15 V, Vhigh = 20 V, VZ = 12 V,
IL, min = 5mA, IL, max = 20mA
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 7

Question 21.
What is a photodiode?
Answer:
A photodiode is a special purpose reverse-biased pn-junction diode that generates charge carriers in response to photons and high energy particles, and passes a photocurrent in the external circuit proportional to the intensity of the incident radiation. The term photodiode usually means a sensor that accurately detects changes in light level. Hence, it is sometimes called a photodetector or photosensor which operates as a photoelectric converter.

Question 22.
Explain the I-V characteristics of a photodiode.
Answer:
When a Si photodiode is operated in the dark (zero illumination), the current versus voltage characteristics observed are similar to the curve of a rectifier diode as shown by curve (1) in figure. This dark current in Si photodiodes range from 5 pA to 10 nA.

When light is incident on the photodiode, the curve shifts to (2) and increasing the incident illuminance (light level) shifts this characteristic curve still further to (3) in parallel. The magnitude of the reverse voltage has nearly no influence on the photocurrent and only a weak influence on the dark current. The normal reverse currents are in tens to hundreds of microampere range.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 8
The I-V characteristics of a photodiode showing dark current and photocurrent for increasing illuminance

The almost equal spacing between the curves for the same increment in luminous flux reveals that the reverse current and luminous flux are almost linearly related. The photocurrent of the Si photo-diode is extremely linear with respect to the il-luminance. Since the total reverse current is the sum of the photocurrent and the dark current, the sensitivity of a photodiode is increased by minimizing the dark current.

Question 23.
Explain saturation current of a photodiode with a neat labelled diagram.
Answer:
When a reverse-biased photodiode is illuminated, the reverse current at a constant reverse voltage is directly proportional to the illuminance. The de-pendence of the photocurrent on the illuminance is very linear over six or more orders of illuminance, e.g., in the range from a few nanowatts to tens of milliwatts with an active area of a few mm2. But after a certain value of reverse current, the current does not increase further with increasing light intensity. This constant value is called the satura-tion current of the photodiode.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 9

Question 24.
What is (i) dark current (ii) dark resistance of a photodiode?
Answer:
(i) Dark current: The current associated with a photo-diode with an applied reverse bias during operation in the dark (zero illumination) due to background radiation and thermally excited minority saturation current. It is of the order of picoamperes to nanoamperes. Larger active areas or increase in temperature and reverse bias result in higher dark current.

(ii) Dark resistance : The ratio of maximum withstandable reverse voltage to the dark current of a photo-diode is called dark resistance of that diode.
Dark resistance, Rd = \(\frac{\text { (maximum reverse voltage) }}{(\text { dark current })}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 25.
State any four advantages of a photodiode.
Answer:
Advantages of a photodiode :

  1. Quick response to light.
  2. High operational speed.
  3. Excellent linear response over a wide dynamic range.
  4. Low cost.
  5. Wide spectral response.
  6. Compact, lightweight, mechanically rugged and long life.

Question 26.
State any two disadvantages of a photodiode.
Answer:
Disadvantages of a photodiode :

  1. Poor temperature stability : Reverse current is temperature dependent.
  2. Reverse current for low illumination is small and requires amplification.

Question 27.
State any two applications of photodiodes.
Answer:
Applications of photodiodes :

  1. A reverse-biased photodiode conducts only when illuminated, assuming that the dark current is essentially zero. Due to its quick response to radi-ation and high operational speed, photodiodes are used in high-speed counting or switching applications.
  2. Extensively used in an fibreoptic communication system.
  3. As photosensors/photodetectors for detection of UV radiations and accurate measurement of illumination. Avalanche photodiodes have increased responsivity and can be used as photomultipliers, especially for low illumination.
  4. In burglar alarm systems as normally closed switch until exposure to radiation is interrupted. When interrupted, the reverse current drops to the dark current level and sounds the alarm.
  5. In an optocoupler, a photodiode is combined with a light-emitting diode to couple an input signal to the output circuit. The key advantage of an optocoupler is the electrical isolation between the input and output circuits, especially in high voltage applications. With an optocoupler, the only contact between the input and the output is a beam of light.

Question 28.
Name two types of solar energy devices.
Answer:
Two major types of devices converting solar energy in usable form are

  1. photothermal devices, which convert the solar energy into heat energy
  2. photovoltaic devices, which convert solar energy into electrical energy.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 29.
What is a solar cell ? State the principle of its working.
Answer:
A solar cell is an unbiased pn-junction that converts the energy of sunlight directly into electricity with a high conversion efficiency.

Principle : A solar cell works on the photovoltaic effect in which an emf is produced between the two layers of a pn-junction as a result of irradiation.

Question 30.
Describe the output characteristics of a solar cell with a neat labelled graph.
Answer:
Output characteristic of a solar cell : The output characteristic, I-V curve, of a solar cell exposed to sunlight is plotted by varying the load resistance (Rr) from zero to infinity and measuring the corresponding current and voltage.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 10
The short-circuit condition occurs when RL = 0 so that V = 0. The current in this case is referred to as the short-circuit current ISC. The open-circuit condition occurs when RL = ∞. The net current in this case is zero and the voltage produced is called as the open-circuit voltage VOC. Increasing the lightsensing area or light intensity per single solar cell produces a proportionate increase in ISC. VOC is independent of these parameters.

The operating point of a solar cell module is the point (Vp, Ip) on the I-V curve which delivers maximum power to the load. For this, Vp/ Ip must be equal to RL.
[Note : The photocurrent in a solar cell is always in the reverse-bias direction so that the I-V graph is in the fourth quadrant.]

Question 31.
State the material selection criteria for solar cells.
Answer:
Criteria for materials to be used in solar cells :

  1. Band gap energy must be between 1 eV and 1.8 eV. (The best band gap of a solar cell is in the region of 1.5 eV.)
  2. It must have high optical absorption.
  3. It must have high electrical conductivity.
  4. The raw material must be available in abundance and the cost of the material must be low.

Question 32.
Name the common materials for solar cells.
Answer:
Optimized band gap for solar cells is close to 1.5 eV. Some of the common materials for solar cells are

  1. silicon (Si), EG = 1.12 eV – currently the most popular material but has low absorption coefficient and high temperature dependence,
  2. gallium arsenide (GaAs), EG = 1.42 eV -by far the most widely used, especially for high end applications like satellites. Its absorption coefficient is about ten times better than silicon and doesn’t have the same temperature dependence.
  3. copper-indium diselenide (CIS), EG = 1.01 eV – has the highest optical absorption, but gallium is introduced in the lattice to raise the band gap energy closer to the solar ideal. This resulted in the popular copper-indium-gallium diselenide (Culn- GaSe2 or CIGS) material for photovoltaic cell. By variation of Ga fraction, a band gap of around 1.48 eV has been achieved.
  4. cadmium telluride (CdTe), EG = 1.44 eV-made from the II-VI group elements.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

[Notes : (1) By far the most widely used III-V solar cell is gallium arsenide (GaAs). Other III-V semiconductors-indium phosphide (InP), gallium antimonide (GaSb), aluminium gallium arsenide (AlGaAs), indium gallium phosphide (InGaP), and indium gallium arsenide (InGaAs)-exchange group III elements to make different band gap energies. III-V semiconductors offer a great host of advantages over silicon as a material for photovoltaics. However, the biggest drawback is cost. (2) The theoretical limit on the thermodynamic efficiency of single-junction solar cells is ~ 30%. Hence, today’s most efficient technology for the generation of electricity from solar radiation is the use of multi-junction solar cells made of III-V compound semiconductors. Efficiencies up to 39% have al-ready been reported under concentrated sunlight. These solar cells have initially been developed for powering satellites in space and are now starting to explore the terrestrial energy market through the use of photovoltaic concentrator systems. A triple-junction solar cell, Ga0.35In0.65P/Ga0.83In0.17As/Ge, has been demonstrated by a conversion efficiency of 41.1% at 454 kW/m2]

Question 33.
State any four uses of solar cells.
Answer:
Uses of solar cells :

  1. A solar cell array consisting of a set of solar cells is used during daylight hours to power an electrical equipment as well as to recharge batteries which can then be used during night.
  2. Solar cell arrays provide electrical power to equipment on a satellite as well as at remote places on the Earth where electric power lines are absent.
  3. Large-scale solar power generation systems linked with commercial power grid.
  4. Independent power supply systems for radar detectors, monitoring systems, radio relay stations, roadlights and roadsigns.
  5. Indoor uses include consumer products like, calculators, clocks, digital thermometers, etc. (They use very low levels of power and work under lowbrightness long-wavelength light from incandescent lamps, etc.)

Question 34.
What is a light-emitting diode (LED) ?
Answer:
A light-emitting diode (LED) is a forward-biased pn-junction diode formed from compound semiconductor materials such as gallium arsenide (GaAs) in which light emission can take place from direct radiative recombination of excess electron-hole pairs. A photon is emitted when an electron in the conduction band recombines with a hole in the valence band.

In infrared emitting LEDs, the encapsulating plastic lens may be impregnated or coated with phosphorus. Then, phosphorescence of the phos-phorus gives off visible light.

[Note: In an ordinary pn-junction diode, energy released in electron-hole recombination process is absorbed in the crystal structure as heat.]

Question 35.
Describe with a neat diagram the construction of an LED.
Answer:
Construction : A light-emitting diode is a forward- biased pn-junction diode formed from compound semiconductor materials. As shown in Fig. 16.14(a), the top metal contact to the n-layer (say) is provided with a window for the emitted light to escape. The diode chip is encapsulated in a transparent plastic lens. The cathode and anode leads from the metal contacts to the n-and p-layers, respectively, are provided for external connections, shown in figure.
The negative electrode (cathode) is identified by a notch or flat spot on the plastic body, or the cathode lead is shorter than the anode.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 11

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 36.
Draw the I-V forward characteristics of an LED and explain it.
Answer:
Explanation : The forward characteristic of an LED is similar to an ordinary junction diode. The diode starts conducting only after the forward-bias voltage overcomes the barrier potential. Thereafter the current increases exponentially beyond the knee region.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 12
The threshold voltage is about 1.2 V for a standard red LED to about 3.6 V for a blue LED. However, these values depend on the manufacturer because of the different dopant concentrations used for the different wavelength ranges.

The intensity of the emitted light is directly propotional to the forward current. An LED is operated with a typical forward current of 20 mA- about 5 mA for a simple LED indicator to about 30 mA where a high intensity of light is needed. The LED forward current must be limited to a specified safe value using a series resistance.

The peak inverse voltage (PIV) or breakdown voltage of an LED is low, typically 5 V.

Question 37.
State any four advantages of an LED over common light sources.
Answer:
Advantages of an LED as a light source over common light sources :

  1. Energy efficiency : An LED is small in size, requires low operating voltage and power and is extremely energy efficient, consuming up to 90% less power than incandescent bulbs. LED’s are now capable of outputting 135 lumens/watt.
  2. Life and ruggedness : Being a solid state device, an LED is more rugged than bulbs with filament and has a typical life of 50000 hours or more.
  3. Fast switching : An LED is very fast, i.e., its switching (on / off) time is less than 1 ns.
  4. Brightness and colour control: The intensity of the emitted light can be varied continuously. The colour of the emitted light also can be controlled.
  5. Small size : Because of their small size, they can be used to produce self-luminous, static or running, seven-segment alphanumeric displays.
  6. Environmentally friendly : An LED being a semi-conductor device, does not contain hazardous substances like mercury (as in sodium and mercury vapour lamps).
  7. Operationally cheap : Since LEDs use only a fraction of the energy of an incandescent light bulb there is a dramatic decrease in power costs.

Question 38.
State any four disadvantages of an LED.
Answer:
Disadvantages of an LED light source :
(1) Blue light hazard : There is a photobiological con-cern that bright blue LEDs and cool-white LEDs are capable of exceeding safe limits.

(2) Light quality : Most cool-white LEDs have spectral output significantly different from the Sun or an incandescent bulb-peak output being at 460 nm rather than peak retinal sensitivity of 550 nm. This can cause the colour of objects to be perceived differently under cool-white LED illumination than sunlight or incandescent bulbs.

(3) Temperature dependence : An LED luminaire can overheat in high ambient temperatures and effective cooling methods using heat sinks are essential for high-power LEDs. (Although the thermal power involved is not very large, it is released within a very small volume and area.) This is especially important for automotive, medical and military applications where the light unit must operate over a large range of temperatures and yet have a low failure rate.

(4) High initial cost: LEDs are currently more expen-sive-price per lumen-in initial capital cost, than most conventional lighting technologies.

(5) Voltage sensitivity : LEDs must be operated with the voltage above the threshold and the current below the rated maximum. This requires current- limiting resistors or current-regulated power supplies.

(6) Blue light pollution : Cool-white LEDs emit pro-portionally more blue light than conventional out-door light sources such as high-pressure sodium lamps. Due to Rayleigh scattering, these LEDs can cause more light pollution than other light sources.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 39.
State any four applications of LEDs.
Answer:
Applications of LEDs :

  1. An LED is commonly used as an On/Off indicator lamp on electrical equipment.
  2. LEDs are used in self-luminous seven-segment alphanumeric displays of calculators and digital clocks and meters, signages, etc.
  3. Because of their low power consumption, LEDs are now commonly used in traffic signals, handheld torches, LED TV sets, domestic and decorative illumination and various indicator lamps in light motor vehicles and two-wheelers.
  4. Under certain conditions, the essentially monochromatic light emitted by an LED is also coherent. Such diode lasers have found applications in optical fibre communications, CD players, CDROM drives, laser printers, bar code scanners, laser pointers, etc.

Question 40.
What is a junction transistor?
Answer:
A junction transistor consists of two back-to-back pn-junctions forming a sandwich structure in which a thin layer of n-type or p-type semiconductor is sandwiched between two layers of opposite type semiconductor.

The three terminals of a transistor connected to its three layers are known as the emitter (E), base (B) and collector (C). One pn-junction is between the emitter and the base while the other pn-junction is between the collector and the base.

The electric current is transported by both type of carriers, electrons and holes; for this reason the device is called a bipolar junction transistor (BJT).

There are two types of junction transistors : (i) pnp transistor (ii) npn transistor.

[Note : The point-contact transistor was invented in 1947 by US physicists John Bardeen (1908-91), Walter Brattain (1902-87) and William Shockley (1910-89). A month later Shockley invented the junction transistor.]

Question 41.
Draw the circuit symbols of (i) a pnp transistor (ii) an npn transistor.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 13
The arrow on the emitter shows the direction of current when the base-emitter junction is forward- biased. If the arrow points in (Points iN), it indicates the transistor is a pnp. On the other hand, if the arrow points out, the transistor is an npn (Not Pointing iN).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 42.
How is a junction transistor formed? Draw schematic diagrams showing the structure of the two types of BJTs.
Answer:
A bipolar junction transistor has three separately doped regions and two pn-junctions. A pnp transistor is formed by starting with a p-type substrate. An zz-type region is grown by thermally diffusing do-nor impurities into this substrate. A very heavily doped p+ region is then diffused into the n-type region. The heavily doped p + -region is called the emitter, symbol E in below figure.The narrow central n-region, with lightly doped concentration, is called the base (symbol B). The width of the base is small compared with the minority carrier diffusion length. The moderately doped p-region is called the collector (symbol C). The doping concentration in each region is assumed to be uniform.

The npn transistor is the complementary structure to the pnp transistor : A narrow p region grown into an n type substrate, by thermally diffusing acceptor impurities, forms the base. The heavily doped n + region diffused into the base forms the emitter.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 14

Question 43.
Draw diagrams showing the two-diode analogues of npn and pnp transistors.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 15
[Important note : The diode equivalents are pretty much useless except for biasing a transistor or testing with a ‘digital multimeter (DMM). The transistor action of a BJT, as explained in Question 55 is substantially different from that of two independent back-to-back pn-junctions.]

Question 46.
Explain the working of an npn transistor with a neatly labelled circuit diagram.
OR
Explain the action of a junction transistor with a neatly labelled circuit diagram.
Answer:
For normal operation of a junction transistor, the emitter-base junction is always forward biased and the collector-base junction is always reverse biased. Below figure shows the biasing of the junctions for an npn transistor connected as an amplifier with the common-base configuration, that is, the base lead is common to the input and output circuits. The emitter-base junction is forward biased by the battery VBB while the collector-base junction is reverse biased by the battery VCC. VBB should be greater than the emitter-base barrier potential (the threshold voltage). The arrows of the various currents indicate the direction of current under normal operating conditions (also called the active mode).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 16
Since the emitter-base junction is forward biased, majority carriers electrons in the n+ emitter are injected into the base and holes (majority carriers in the p-type base) are injected from the base into the emitter. Under the ideal-diode condition, these two current components constitute the total emitter current IE.

The emitter is a very heavily doped n-type region. Hence, the current between emitter E and base B is almost entirely electron current from E into B across the forward-biased emitter junction.

The p-type base is narrow and the hole density in the base is very low. Therefore, virtually all the injected electrons (more than 95%) diffuse right across the base to the collector junction without recombining with holes. Since the collector junction is reverse biased, the electrons on reaching the collector junction are quickly swept by the strong electric field there into the n-type collector region, where they constitute the collector current IC.

In practice, about 1% to 5% of the holes from the emitter recombine with holes in the base layer and cause a small current IB in the base lead. Therefore,
IE = IB + IC ≈ IC
Therefore, carriers injected from a nearby emitter junction can result in a large current flow in a reverse-biased collector junction. This is the transistor action, and it can be realized only when the two junctions are physically close enough to interact as described.

If a pnp transistor is used, the battery connections must be reversed to give the correct bias. The conduction process is similar but takes place instead by migration of holes from emitter to collector. A few of these holes recombine with electrons in the base.

[Notes : (1) If, the two junctions are so far apart that all the injected electrons are recombined in the base before reaching the base-collector junction, then the transistor action is lost and the p-n-p structure becomes merely two diodes connected back to back. (2) Use of double-subscripted voltage notation in transistor circuits : same subscripts (viz., Vm and Vcc) represent the voltage of a biasing battery; different subscripts (viz, VBB and VCC) are used to indicate voltage between two points. Single subscripts (as in Fig. 16.19) are used for a node voltage, that is, the voltage between the subscripted point and ground.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 47.
What are the different transistor configurations in a circuit? Show them schematically.
Answer:
There are three configurations in which a transistor may be connected in a circuit:
(a) Common-emitter (CE) : The emitter terminal is common to the input and output circuits.
(b) Common-base (CB) : The base terminal is common to the input and output circuits.
(c) Common-collector (CC) : The collector terminal is common to the input and output circuits.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 17
[Notes : (1) CE: Produces the highest current and power gain of all the three bipolar transistor configurations the reason why it is the most commonly used configuration for transistor based amplifiers. The emitter is grounded and the input signal applied between the base and emitter. The input impedance is small due to the forward biasing of the EB-junction. The output taken from between the collector and emitter, as well as the outputimpedance, are large due to the reverse biased CB-junction. However, its voltage gain is much lower. – (2) CB : The base terminal is grounded, the input signal is applied between the base and emitter terminals while the output signal is taken from between the base and collector terminals. Though its high frequency response is good for single stage amplifier circuits, it is not very common due to its low current gain characteristics and low input impedance. (3) CC : Very useful for impedance matching applications because of the very large ratio of input impedance to output impedance. The collector is grounded and the input signal is directly given to the base. The output is taken across the load resistor in series with the emitter. Hence, the current through the load resistor is the emitter current and the current gain of the configuration is approximately equal to the β value of the transistor.]

Question 48.
State the relation between the dc common-base current ratio (αdc) and the dc common-emitter current ratio (βdc).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 18

Question 49.
Draw a neat labelled circuit diagram to study the characteristics of a transistor in common- emitter configuration.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 19

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 50.
Explain with necessary graphs (1) input (base) (2) output (collector) characteristics of a transistor in common-emitter configuration.
Answer:
Common-emitter characteristics :
(1) Input or base characteristics : This is a set of curves of base current IB against base to emitter voltage VBE for different constant collector to emitter voltages VCE shown in figure.

Keeping collector voltage VCE constant, base voltage is gradually increased from zero. Initially, IB is zero till VBE is less than the threshold voltage for the forward-biased base-emitter junction, 0.7 V for silicon and 0.3 V for germanium. For VBE greater than the threshold voltage, IB increases steeply.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 20
For a constant collector voltage VCE, the dynamic input resistance (ri) is defined as the ratio of the differential change in the base-to-emitter voltage (∆VBE) to the corresponding change in the base current (∆ICE).
ri = (\(\frac{\Delta V_{\mathrm{BE}}}{\Delta I_{\mathrm{B}}}\))VCE = constant

(2) Output or collector characteristics : This is a set of curves of collector current IC against collector-to- emitter voltage VCE for different constant base currents IB, shown in figure.

(i) For VBE less than the threshold voltage for the junction, IB = 0 and IC = 0, i.e., there is no current through the transistor. Both the junctions are reverse biased and the transistor acts like an open switch. Then the transistor is said to be switched Fully-OFF or in the cut-off region or OFF-mode.

(ii) The base current is set to a suitable value by varying the base-to-emitter voltage VBE to a value greater than the threshold voltage. Then, the collector-to-emitter voltage VCE is varied and the variation of IC is plotted against VCE. For very small values of VCE, ideally zero, IC is maximum, equal to VCC/ RL. Both the junctions are forward biased and the transistor acts like a closed switch. The transistor is said to be switched Fully-ON, or in the saturation region or ON-mode.

(iii) But for values of VCE above about the threshold voltage, IC is constant and VCE has relatively little effect on it. In this region, called as the active region, IC is determined almost entirely by IB. In this region, the common-emitter current gain β is large.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 21
For a constant base current IB, the dynamic output resistance (r0) is defined as the ratio of the differential change in the collector-to-emitter voltage (∆VCE) to the corresponding change in the collector current (∆IC).
r0 = \(\left(\frac{\Delta V_{\mathrm{CE}}}{\Delta I_{\mathrm{C}}}\right)_{I_{\mathrm{B}}=\text { constant }}\)

Question 51.
What is an amplifier? Explain the use of a transistor as an amplifier.
OR
Draw a neat circuit diagram of a transistor CE- amplifier and explain its working.
Answer:
A device that increases the amplitude of voltage, current or power of a weak alternating signal, by drawing energy from a separate source other than the signal, is called an amplifier.

Principle : The collector current can be controlled by a small change in the base current.

Electric circuit: Consider the use of a npn transistor as an amplifier in the widely used common- emitter (CE) configuration in which the emitter is common to the input and output circuits, shown in figure. The emitter-base junction is forward biased by the battery VBB while the collector-base junction is reverse biased by the battery VCC.

The voltage Vi to be amplified, called the signal voltage, is applied between the base and the emitter.

Working : The collector characteristics shows that in the active region, the collector current Ic is determined almost entirely by the base current IB, and collector potential Vc has relatively little effect on it.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 22
An npn transistor amplifier in CE configuration

For Vi = 0, applying Kirchhoff’s loop law to the output and input loops, we get respectively,
VCC – ICRL – VCE = 0 ……………. (1)
and PBB – IBRB – VBE = 0 …………… (2)
The applied signal voltage causes small changes ∆VBE in the emitter-base p.d. thereby producing variations ∆VBE in the base current.
∆VBE = ri∆IB …………. (3)
where ri is the dynamic input resistance.
BBB + Vi = IBRB + VBE + ∆IB(RB + ri)
∴ Vi = ∆IB(RB + ri) = ri∆IB

The variations in ∆IB cause proportionately larger variations ∆IC in the collector current because ∆IC = βac ∆IB, where the ac common-emitter current gain (βac) is always greater than 50. For normal operating voltages, βac is almost the same as βdc. From EQuestion(l), since VCC is constant,
∆VCC = ∆ICRL + ∆VCE = 0
The time-varying collector current produces a time-varying output voltage P0 across the load resistance RL.
V0 = ∆VCE = – ∆ICRL = – [βac∆IBRL

Thus, V0 > Vi, so that the circuit produces a voltage gain. The amplifier’s voltage gain (Av) is defined as the ratio of the output voltage to the input voltage.
Av = \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{o}}}{V_{\mathrm{i}}}=-\frac{\beta_{\mathrm{ac}} R_{\mathrm{L}}}{r_{\mathrm{i}}}\)

The minus sign indicates that the output voltage is 180° out of phase with the input voltage.
[ Note : Amplifiers use emitter bias by moving the resistor from the base circuit to the emitter circuit. This important change keeps the operating point of the transistor fixed and immune to changes in current gain. The base supply voltage is now applied directly to the base.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 52.
Solve the following :
(1) The diagram shows a CE circuit using a silicon transistor. Calculate the (a) base current (b) collector current. [VBB = 2V, VCC = 10V, RB = 100 kΩ, RL = 1 kΩ, [βdc = 200]
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 23
Solution:
Data : VBB = 2 V, VCC = 10 V, RB = 100 kΩ, RL = 1 kΩ,
βdc = 200.
Since it is a silicon transistor, the emitter-base
barrier potential, VBE = 0.7 V.
The voltage across the base resistor is
VBB – VBE = 2 – 0.7 = 1.3 V
Therefore, the base current,
IB = \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{BB}}-V_{\mathrm{BE}}}{R_{\mathrm{B}}}=\frac{1.3}{10^{5}}\) = 1.3 × 10-5 = 13 μA
The collector current,
IC = βIB = 200 × 1.3 × 10-5 = 2.6 × 10-3 A = 2.6mA

(2) In the above problem, calculate the collector- emitter voltage (VCE).
Solution:
The collector-emitter voltage,
VCE = VCC – ICRL = 10 – (2.6 × 10-3)(103) = 2.6V

Question 53.
What is meant by an analog signal and an analog electronic circuit?
Answer:
An analog signal consists of a continuously varying voltage or current. An analog electronic circuit takes an analog signal as input and outputs a signal that varies continuously according to the input signal.

Question 54.
What is meant by a digital signal?
Answer:
A digital signal consists of a sequence of electrical pulses whose waveform is approximately regular, with the potential switching alternately between two values. The lower value of the potential is labelled as LOW or 0 and the higher value as HIGH or 1.

With just two bits of information, 1 or 0 (HIGH or LOW), digital circuits use binary system. A sequence of 1s and 0s is encoded to represent numerals, letters of the alphabet, punctuation marks and instructions.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 24

[ Note : The meaning of a voltage being high or low at a particular location within a circuit can signify a number of things. For example, it may represent the on or off state of a switch or saturated transistor. It may represent one bit of a number, or whether an event has occurred, or whether some action should be taken. The high and low states can be represented as true and false statements, which are used in Boolean logic. When positive-true logic is used high = true, while high = false when negative-true logic is used.]

Question 55.
What is a digital circuit?
Answer:
An electronic circuit that processes only digital signals is called a digital circuit. There are only two voltage states present at any point within a digital circuit. These voltage states are either high or low.

The branch of electronics which deals with digital circuits is called digital electronics.

[Note : Digital circuits can store and process bits of information needed to make complex logical decisions. Digital electronics incorporate logical decision-making processes into a circuit.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 56.
What are the three ways of representing a logic gate?
Answer:
A logic gate can be represented by its logic symbol, Boolean expression and the truth table.

Question 57.
How many rows are there in the truth table of a 3-input gate?
Answer:
Each of the 3 inputs can take 2 values (0 and 1).
Hence, the number of rows in the truth table of a 3-input gate = 2 × 2 × 2 = 23 = 8.

Question 58.
Name the common logic gates.
Answer:
The five common logic gates are the AND, OR, NOT, NAND and NOR gates.

Of these the AND, OR and NOT gates which respectively perform the logical AND, logical OR and logical NOT operations are called the basic logic gates. These three gates form the basis for other types of logical gates. The NAND and NOR are called the universal logic gates because any gate can be implemented by the combination of NAND and NOR gates.

Question 59.
Define the following logic gates :
(1) AND
(2) OR
(3) NOT.
Give the logic symbol, Boolean expression and truth table of each. (1 mark each )
Answer:
(1) The AND gate : It is a circuit with two or more inputs and one output in which the output signal is HIGH if and only if all the inputs are HIGH simultaneously.
The AND operation represents a logical multiplication.

Below figure shows the 2-input AND gate logic symbol and the Boolean expression and the truth table for the AND function.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 25

(2) The OR gate : It is a circuit with two or more inputs and one output in which the output signal is HIGH if any one or more of the inputs is HIGH.
The OR operation represents a logical addition.

Below figure shows the 2-input OR gate logic symbol, and the Boolean expression and the truth table for the OR function.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 26

(3) The NOT gate or INVERTER : It is a circuit with one input whose output is HIGH if the input is LOW and vice versa.
The NOT operation outputs an inverted version of the input. Hence, a NOT gate is also known as an INVERTER.

The small invert bubble on the output side of the inverter logic symbol, Fig. 16.30 and the over bar (__) in the Boolean expression represent the invert function.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 27

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 60.
A gate generates a HIGH output when at least one of its inputs is HIGH. Which is this gate?
Answer:
It is an OR gate.

Question 61.
How will a 2-input AND gate work when both its input terminals are shorted? Give the circuit symbol and truth table.
Answer:
When both the input terminals of a 2-input AND gate are shorted, i.e., the same signal X goes to both inputs, the output is Y = X ∙ X which will give 1 if X = 1, and 0 if X = 0; hence Y = X ∙ X = X.
Circuit symbol:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 28
Truth table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 29
[Note : The OR operation gives exactly the same result. The laws Y = X ∙ X = X and Y = X + X = X are called idem potent laws.]

Question 62.
Write the Boolean expression and give the circuit symbol for a 3-input AND gate.
Answer:
Consider an AND gate with 3-inputs, A, B and C. Boolean expression : Y = A ∙ B ∙ C
Circuit symbol: Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 30

Question 63.
If only 2-input OR gates are available, draw the circuit to implement the Boolean expression Y = A + B + C.
Answer:
Implementation of Y = A + B + C using two-input OR gates :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 31

Question 64.
Define the logic gates (1) NAND (2) NOR.
Give the logic symbol, Boolean expression and truth table of each.
How are the above gates realized from the basic gates?
Answer:
(1) The NAND gate : It is a circuit with two or more inputs and one output, whose output is HIGH if any one or more of the inputs is LOW; the output is LOW if all the inputs are HIGH.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 32
The NAND gate is a combination of an AND gate followed by a NOT gate so that the truth table of the NAND function is obtained by inverting the outputs of the AND gate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 33

(2) The NOR gate: It is a circuit with two or more inputs and one output, in which the output is HIGH if and only if all the inputs are LOW.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 34
The NOR gate is realized by connecting the output of OR gate to the input of a NOT gate, so that the truth table of the NOR function is obtained by inverting the outputs of the OR gate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 35

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 65.
How will a NAND gate work when all its input terminals are shorted?
Answer:
A NOT gate.

Question 66.
Define the XOR (Exclusive OR) logic gate. Give its logic symbol, Boolean expression and truth table. How is the XOR gate realized from the basic gates?
Answer:
The XOR (Exclusive OR) gate : It is a circuit with only two inputs and one output in which the output signal is HIGH if and only if the inputs are different from each other.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 36

Question 67.
Prepare the truth tables for the following logic circuits. Write the Boolean expression for the output and name (or identify) the output function in each case.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 37
OR
Draw the logic diagram and write the truth table for the Boolean equations
(1) Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)
(2) Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}\)
(3) \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}\)
(4) \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)
Answer:
(1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 38
The same signal X is fed to both the inputs of the 2-input NOR gate.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 39
The truth table shows that the output is HIGH if the input is LOW and vice versa. Therefore, the circuit functions as a NOT gate or INVERTER.
∴ Boolean expression for the output logic is Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{X}}\)

(2)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 40
The same signal X is fed to both the inputs of the 2-input NAND gate.
Truth table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 41
The truth table shows that the output is HIGH if the input is LOW and vice versa. Therefore, the circuit functions as a NOT gate or INVERTER.
∴ Boolean expression for the output logic is Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{X}}\)

(3)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 42
Each input of the 2-input OR gate is fed through a NOT gate, i.e., the inputs to the OR gate are \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\).
Truth table:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 43
The truth table shows that the output is HIGH if any one of the inputs is LOW; the output is LOW if all the inputs are HIGH. Therefore, the circuit functions as a NAND gate.
∴ Boolean expression for the output logic is Y = latex]\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}[/latex]

(4)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 44
Inverted inputs \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) and \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\) are fed to the 2-input AND gate.
Truth table :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 45
The truth table shows that the output is HIGH if and only if all the inputs are LOW. Therefore, the circuit functions as a NOR gate.
∴ Boolean expression for the output logic is Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)

Question 68.
What is the equivalent logic gate for the following logic circuit?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 46
Answer:
The given logic circuit (combination of logic gates) is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 47
i. e., the output is HIGH if and only if both the inputs are LOW, which is obtained by a NOR gate.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices

Question 69.
Write the truth table for the Boolean equation Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) – B + A – \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 48

Multiple Choice Questions

Question 1.
An electronic circuit which converts alternating voltage into unidirectional pulsating voltage is called
(A) a transistor
(B) a rectifier
(C) an oscillator
(D) a transformer.
Answer:
(B) a rectifier

Question 2.
A pn junction exhibits rectifying property because of
(A) the potential barrier across the pn junction
(B) the difference in the doping concentrations in the p- and n-layers
(C) the avalanche breakdown when reverse biased
(D) the Zener breakdown when reverse biased.
Answer:
(A) the potential barrier across the pn junction

Question 3.
The stepped down output of a transformer, with turns ratio 5 : 1, is fed to an ideal diode D and load resistance RL. The peak load voltage is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 49
(A) 22 V
(B) 31 V
(C) 44 V
(D) 62 V
Answer:
(D) 62 V

Question 4.
In the given circuit, the peak value of the ac source voltage is 10 V, and the diode has a negligible forward resistance and infinite reverse resistance. During the negative half cycle of the source voltage, the peak voltage across the diode is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 50
(A) – 10 V
(B) 0
(C) 5 V
(D) 10 V
Answer:
(A) – 10 V

Question 5.
A full-wave rectifier uses a grounded centre tap on the secondary winding of a transformer and a 60 Hz source voltage across the primary winding. The output frequency of the full-wave rectifier is
(A) 30 Hz
(B) 60 Hz
(C) 120 Hz
(D) 240 Hz.
Answer:
(C) 120 Hz

Question 6.
Avalanche breakdown in a Zener diode takes place due to
(A) thermal energy
(B) light energy
(C) magnetic field
(D) accelerated minority charge carriers.
Answer:
(D) accelerated minority charge carriers.

Question 7.
A Zener diode is used as a
(A) half wave regulator
(B) half wave rectifier
(C) simple voltage regulator
(D) voltage amplifier.
Answer:
(C) simple voltage regulator

Question 8.
The current through the Zener diode in the following circuit is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 51
(A) 5 mA
(B) 10 mA
(C) 15 mA
(D) 30 mA.
Answer:
(A) 5 mA

Question 9.
In operation, a photodiode is
(A) unbiased
(B) always forward-biased
(C) always reverse-biased
(D) either forward-or reverse-biased.
Answer:
(C) always reverse-biased

Question 10.
The photocurrent in a photodiode is a few
(A) nanoamperes
(B) microamperes
(C) milliamperes
(D) amperes.
Answer:
(B) microamperes

Question 11.
A photodiode is used in
(A) a brake indicator
(B) an optocoupler
(C) a regulated power supply
(D) a logic gate.
Answer:
(B) an optocoupler

Question 12.
When the load resistance across a solar cell is zero, the current in the external circuit passed by the solar cell is called
(A) the open-circuit current
(B) the reverse saturation current
(C) the short-circuit current
(D) the photocurrent.
Answer:
(C) the short-circuit current

Question 13.
Which of the following is the correct circuit symbol for an LED ?
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 52
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 54

Question 14.
The colour of light emitted by an LED depends upon
(A) its forward bias
(B) its reverse bias
(C) the band gap of the material of the semiconductor
(D) its size.
Answer:
(C) the band gap of the material of the semiconductor

Question 15.
The centre terminal of a junction transistor is called
(A) the emitter
(B) the opposite semiconductor
(C) the collector
(D) the base.
Answer:
(D) the base.

Question 16.
A transistor acts as a ‘closed switch’ when it is in
(A) the cutoff region
(B) the active region
(C) the breakdown region
(D) the saturation region.
Answer:
(D) the saturation region.

Question 17.
A junction transistor acts as
(A) a rectifier
(B) an amplifier
(C) the oscillator
(D) a voltage regulator.
Answer:
(B) an amplifier

Question 18.
When an npn junction transistor is used as an amplifier in CE-mode,
(A) the central p-type region is common to both input and output circuits
(B) the emitter terminal is common to both input and output circuits
(C) the emitter junction is reverse biased while the collector junction is forward biased
(D) the signal voltage is applied between the two n regions.
Answer:
(B) the emitter terminal is common to both input and output circuits

Question 19.
When a pnp transistor is operated in saturation region, then its
(A) the base-emitter junction is forward biased and base-collector junction is reverse biased
(B) both the base-emitter and base-collector junctions are reverse biased
(C) both the base-emitter and base-collector junctions are forward biased
(D) the base-emitter junction is reverse biased and base-collector junction is forward biased.
Answer:
(C) both the base-emitter and base-collector junctions are forward biased

Question 20.
Which logic gate corresponds to the logical equation, Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\) ?
(A) NAND
(B) NOR
(C) AND
(D) OR
Answer:
(B) NOR

Question 21.
The output of a NAND gate is HIGH if
(A) any one or more of the inputs is LOW
(B) all the inputs are HIGH
(C) only all the inputs are simultaneously LOW
(D) only if an inverter is connected at its output.
Answer:
(A) any one or more of the inputs is LOW

Question 22.
The output of NOR gate is HIGH, when
(A) all inputs are HIGH
(B) all inputs are LOW
(C) only one of its inputs is HIGH
(D) only one of its inputs is LOW.
Answer:
(B) all inputs are LOW

Question 23.
Which logic gate corresponds to the truth table
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Important Questions Chapter 16 Semiconductor Devices 53
(A) AND
(B) NOR
(C) OR
(D) NAND
Answer:
(B) NOR

Question 24.
The logic gate which produces LOW output when any one of the input is HIGH and produces HIGH output only when all of its inputs are LOW is called
(A) an AND gate
(B) an OR gate
(C) a NOR gate
(D) a NAND gate.
Answer:
(C) a NOR gate

Question 25.
The Boolean expression for an Exclusive OR gate is
(A) A + B
(B) A ⊕ B
(C) \(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)
(D) A ∙ B
Answer:
(B) A ⊕ B

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Organisation of Commerce and Management 12th Textbook Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Organisation of Commerce and Management Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

1. (A) Select the correct options and rewrite the sentences

Question 1.
The word ‘entrepreneur’ is derived from the ……………… word ‘entreprende’.
(a) Japanese
(b) English
(c) French
Answer:
(c) French

Question 2.
‘Entreprende’ means to ………………..
(a) Undertake
(b) Enterprise
(c) Businessman
Answer:
(a) Undertake

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 3.
Start Up India is an initiative of the ………………
(a) RBI
(b) Government of India
(c) World Bank
Answer:
(b) Government of India

Question 4.
………………. is the idea of bringing urban residents to rural areas, by empowering to local communities, both socially and economically.
(a) Agro tourism
(b) Medical tourism
(c) Entertainment
Answer:
(a) Agro tourism

1. (B) Match the pairs

Group A Group B
(A) Gap filling function (1) 2016
(B) Entrepreneur (2) Employment
(C) Agro tourism (3) Old methods of production
(D) Technology  (4) 2019
(E) Start up India (5) Self motivated
(6) Rural tourism
(7) Entrepreneurship
(8) Latest knowledge
(9) Necessity Based
(10) Medical tourism

Answer:

Group A Group B
(A) Gap filling function (7) Entrepreneurship
(B) Entrepreneur (5) Self motivated
(C) Agro tourism (6) Rural tourism
(D) Technology (8) Latest knowledge
(E) Start up India (1) 2016

1. (C) Give one word/phrase/term which can substitute each one of the following

Question 1.
An undertaking or adventure involving uncertainty and risk and requiring innovation.
Answer:
Enterprise

Question 2.
A function of creating something new for an economic activity.
Answer:
Innovation

Question 3.
A person who is an innovator who introduces new combinations of means of production.
Answer:
Entrepreneur

Question 4.
The process of enhancing entrepreneurial skills and knowledge through structured training and institution building programmes.
Answer:
Entrepreneur development

Question 5.
The process that motivates a person into action and induces him to continue the course of action for the achievement of goals.
Answer:
Motivation

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 6.
An employee who has an authority and support of the organisation to implement his creative ideas.
Answer:
Intrapreneur

1. (D) State true or false

Question 1.
An entrepreneur should not be ready to work hard.
Answer:
False

Question 2.
Agritourism can support agricultural economy.
Answer:
True

Question 3.
Successful businessman takes calculated risk.
Answer:
True

Question 4.
Entrepreneurship is a full time job which requires dedication and hard work.
Answer:
True

Question 5.
Startup India is an initiative of the Government of France.
Answer:
False.

1. (E) Find the odd one

Question 1.
Communicator, Innovator, Self-starter, Inactive.
Answer:
Inactive

Question 2.
Trekking, Wildlife study, Horseback riding, Indoor games.
Answer:
Indoor games

Question 3.
Innovation, Lack of communication, Development of market, Determining the objectives.
Answer:
Lack of communication.

1. (F) Complete the sentences

Question 1.
An entrepreneur is a person who starts a …………………
Answer:
Business / Enterprise

Question 2.
‘Start-up’ India initiative was launched in ……………….
Answer:
2016.

1. (G) Select the correct option

(Innovation, Niche tourism, Agro tourism, Entrepreneurship)

Group A Group B
1. The idea of bringing Urban resident to agricultural farm —————
2. Agro tourism is a form of ————–
3. —————— To introduce new combination of products and features
4. —————– A full time job which requires, dedication and hard-work.

Answer:

Group A Group B
1. The idea of bringing Urban resident to agricultural farm Agro tourism
2. Agro tourism is a form of Niche tourism
3. Innovation To introduce new combination of products and features
4. Entrepreneurship. A full time job which requires, dedication and hard-work.

1. (H) Answer in one sentence

Question 1.
What is Agro tourism?
Answer:
Agro tourism is the idea to bring urban residents to rural areas for leisure travel and spending.

Question 2.
Who is ‘Entrepreneur’?
Answer:
Entrepreneur is a person who organises and operates a business or businesses, taking on greater than normal financial risks in order to do so.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 3.
Who described ‘Entrepreneurship’ as the founding of a private enterprise?
Answer:
John Sturt Mill, a famous economist, described ‘Entrepreneurship’ as founding of a private enterprise in 1948.

1. (I) Correct the underlined word and rewrite the sentences

Question 1.
The word ‘Entrepreneur’ comes from the German verb entreprendre, it means ‘to undertake’.
Answer:
French

Question 2.
Entrepreneurs try to make home a better place where the needs of consumers can be satisfied.
Answer:
market

Question 3.
The loan taken under stand-up India scheme is repayable in ten years.
Answer:
seven.

2. Explain the following term/concept

Question 1.
Entrepreneur.
Answer:
An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money. The entrepreneurs are passionate to invent, innovate, lead or pioneers with a disruptive product or technology. Entrepreneurs try to make market a better place where the needs of consumers can be satisfied. They have the courage to offer and share an idea or a product or a service with the world. A small businessman, founder of multi-billion company, freelancing carpenter are examples of entrepreneurs.

Question 2.
Agro tourism.
Answer:
Agro tourism is the idea of bringing urban residents to rural areas for leisure travel and spending. Agro tourism is a commercial enterprise at a working farm, ranch or agricultural plant conducted for the enjoyment of visitors that generates supplement income for the owner. Agrotourism activities include picking fruits, tending bees, milking cows and other educational pursuits. In short, Agro tourism provides the tourists a chance to reconnect with the land and provides a ‘hand on experience’ with local foods. Agro tourism can support agricultural economy when local producers can no longer complete economically.

Question 3.
Start-ups.
Answer:
A start-up is defined as an entity having its headquarter in India, which was opened less than 10 years ago and has an annual turnover of less than Rs 100 crores. It is an initiative of the Government of India, launched in 2016. It aims at building an ecosystem which will nurture start¬ups in the country. So that, sustainable economic growth and large scale employment opportunities can be generated. One of the objectives of the Indian Government is to make India a nation of job creator instead of job seekers.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 4.
Stand-ups.
Answer:
Stand-up India scheme is for financing SC/ST and/or women entrepreneurs. The objective of the stand-up India scheme is to facilitate bank loans between Rs 10 lakh and Rs 1 crore to at least one SC or ST borrower and at least one woman borrower per branch for setting up a greenfield enterprise. This enterprise maybe in manufacturing, services or the trading sector. In case of non-individual enterprise at least 51% of the share-holding and controlling stake should be held by either an SC/ST or woman, above 18 years of age.

Question 5.
Intrapreneur.
Answer:
Intrapreneurship is the entrepreneurship within an existing organisation. An intrapreneur is an employee who has the authority and support of his company/employer to implement his own innovative and creative ideas. His idea or products may or may not earn immediate revenue for the company. But the employee keeps receiving his salary. The company provides the infrastructure. Many large organisations have dedicated Research and Development Departments where employees are encouraged to use their creative abilities. These ideas or innovations may earn handsome profit to an organisation. So Intrapreneur is the entrepreneurship within an organisation.

3. Study the following case /situation and express your opinion

Mr. Soham is a young MBA degree holder, Mr. Navin is B.Com graduate. Mr. Soham is willing to start dairy farm at his village, Mr. Navin is willing to work as cashier in Private Company.

(i) Find out dream of Soham and Navin.
(ii) State anyone feature of Entrepreneur.
(iii) To become successful entrepreneur, which qualities Mr. Soham should have?
Answer:
(i) Dream of Soham is to become ; entrepreneur and dream of Navin is to take up job in a private company and get a fixed income as salary.
(ii) Entrepreneur is a person who is willing to take risk in order to earn money and start a business.
(iii) To become a successful entrepreneur Mr. Soham should have qualities like innovator, creator, reactive and risk bearer.

4. Answer in brief

Question 1.
Define Entrepreneur. Explain functions of entrepreneur.
Answer:
[A] Definition : According to Webster dictionary, “An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money.” The entrepreneurs are passionate to innovate, lend, invent or pioneer with a disruptive product or technology. A small businessman, a plumber or a founder of huge company are entrepreneurs.

[B] Functions : The functions of an entrepreneur are:
(1) Innovation : Usually, an entrepreneur has an innovative mind. He introduces new combination of means of production. He introduces something new or something different that would give his business a competitive advantage. Innovation sometimes involves problem solving and entrepreneur gets pleasure by using his talents to solve those problems.

(2) Determination of objectives : An entrepreneur is required to decide the aims and objectives of the business enterprise he intends to establish. He has to change those aims and ; objectives as per changing conditions or accept those which are beneficial to the enterprise as per the market situation.

(3) Development of market: An entrepreneur has to find new, different and innovative ways to market his products and services. As the markets are developing constantly, he has to conduct surveys, research to understand customer’s demand.

(4) New technology : Entrepreneur has to install new, advanced and efficient technology, new machinery, new and scientific methods of production to save overall cost and to improve the methods of production.

(5) Good relations : Prosperity, growth and development of enterprise mostly depend on the cordial and efficient relations of the superiors, subordinates and all employees. In this respect, co-ordination among the employees plays a significant role to make business enterprise successful.

(6) Organising funds : Finance is required to meet working capital and fixed capital needs of business. The entrepreneur has to raise adequate financial resources to keep enterprise in living condition. For this purpose, he has to keep good relation with the existing as well as potential investors.

(7) Taking decisions : Timely, correct and wise decisions are most important to run a successful business. An entrepreneur has to evaluate pros and cons of every business decision.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 2.
Define entrepreneur. Explain the qualities of successful entrepreneur.
Answer:
[A] Definition : According to Webster dictionary, “An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money.” The entrepreneurs are passionate to innovate, lend, invent or pioneer with a disruptive product or technology. A small businessman, a plumber or a founder of huge company are entrepreneurs.

[B] The qualities of a successful entrepreneur:
(1) Discipline : An entrepreneur has comprehensive strategies and tactics to accomplish the organisational goal. Successful entrepreneur is disciplined enough to take steps every day towards the attainment of his objectives. They eliminate any hindrance or distractions.

(2) Confidence : An entrepreneur is confident with the knowledge that he will make his businesses succeed. He shows the confidence in everything he does.

(3) Open-minded : An entrepreneur has the ability to look at everything around him and realises that every event and situation is a business opportunity. New ideas are constantly being generated about potential new business.

(4) Self starter : An entrepreneur is proactive, not waiting for someone to give him permission. Everything which needs to be done, he should start in himself. So, he sets parameters for the project.

(5) Competitive : An entrepreneur knows that he can do a job better than others. He needs to be competitive to win every game of the business.

(6) Creativity : An entrepreneur often comes up with solutions which are the synthesis of other item. He makes connections between two unrelated events or situations.

(7) Determination : An entrepreneur is determined to make all of their endeavours succeed, so will try again until it does. He sees opportunity for success in defeat.

(8) Strong communication skills : The entrepreneur has strong communication skill to sell the product and to motivate employees. He has to highlight benefits of situation and coach others to be successful.

(9) Strong work ethics : An entrepreneur mind is constantly on his work place to ensure that an outcome meets his expectations.

(10) Passion : Passion is the most important that of a successful entrepreneur. He genuinely loves his work because there is a joy that his business gives which goes beyond the money. He should always research and read to make his business grow and be better.

5. Justify the following statements

Question 1.
Entrepreneurship is the best source for self-employment.
Answer:
(1) Innovation : Entrepreneur need to be innovative. The essence of entrepreneurship is innovation. Innovation may take place in the following forms viz., the introduction of a new product in the market, the installation of new production technology, entry of specific product, the discovery of a new source of raw material, etc. In view of changing taste, preferences, etc., of the consumers, from time to time, entrepreneur undertakes research and development to manufacture products to satisfy the consumers’ needs.

(2) Economic activity: In order to satisfy human wants and as well as in exchange earn a better livelihood, an entrepreneur manufactures new products or modify the existing products as per the needs, preferences and demands of the consumers. For this purpose, he undertakes a systematic plan activity by using his skills, knowledge and experience. For this reason, entrepreneurship is considered as an economic activity.

(3) Creative activity : Innovation is a process of creating something new and creativity is most important for innovation. Therefore, innovation should be strongly supported by creativity, Innovation and creativity are supplement to each other. Introducing creativity in the production process is a challenging task before the entrepreneur. Hence, creativity is an essential element of entrepreneurship.

(4) Risk-bearing : An entrepreneur has to undertake many risks including fall in prices, changes in fashions, earthquake, etc. All these risks cannot be insured with insurance companies. A risk which cannot be insured against and measured is called uncertainty. Entrepreneur buys factors of production at certain prices to combine their contributions into the products and then sells those products at uncertain prices in future. Thus, entrepreneur is a risk-bearing agent of production.

Question 2.
Successful businessman takes calculated risk.
Answer:
[A] Definition : According to Webster dictionary, “An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money.” The entrepreneurs are passionate to innovate, lend, invent or pioneer with a disruptive product or technology. A small businessman, a plumber or a founder of huge company are entrepreneurs.

[B] Functions : The functions of an entrepreneur are:
(1) Innovation : Usually, an entrepreneur has an innovative mind. He introduces new combination of means of production. He introduces something new or something different that would give his business a competitive advantage. Innovation sometimes involves problem solving and entrepreneur gets pleasure by using his talents to solve those problems.

(2) Determination of objectives : An entrepreneur is required to decide the aims and objectives of the business enterprise he intends to establish. He has to change those aims and ; objectives as per changing conditions or accept those which are beneficial to the enterprise as per the market situation.

(3) Development of market: An entrepreneur has to find new, different and innovative ways to market his products and services. As the markets are developing constantly, he has to conduct surveys, research to understand customer’s demand.

(4) New technology : Entrepreneur has to install new, advanced and efficient technology, new machinery, new and scientific methods of production to save overall cost and to improve the methods of production.

(5) Good relations : Prosperity, growth and development of enterprise mostly depend on the cordial and efficient relations of the superiors, subordinates and all employees. In this respect, co-ordination among the employees plays a significant role to make business enterprise successful.

(6) Organising funds : Finance is required to meet working capital and fixed capital needs of business. The entrepreneur has to raise adequate financial resources to keep enterprise in living condition. For this purpose, he has to keep good relation with the existing as well as potential investors.

(7) Taking decisions : Timely, correct and wise decisions are most important to run a successful business. An entrepreneur has to evaluate pros and cons of every business decision.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 3.
Entrepreneur must be a good communicator.
Answer:
The following are the characteristics of entrepreneurship development:
(1) Innovation : Entrepreneur need to be innovative. The essence of entrepreneurship is innovation. Innovation may take place in the following forms viz., the introduction of a new product in the market, the installation of new production technology, entry of specific product, the discovery of a new source of raw material, etc. In view of changing taste, preferences, etc., of the consumers, from time to time, entrepreneur undertakes research and development to manufacture products to satisfy the consumers’ needs.

(2) Economic activity: In order to satisfy human wants and as well as in exchange earn a better livelihood, an entrepreneur manufactures new products or modify the existing products as per the needs, preferences and demands of the consumers. For this purpose, he undertakes a systematic plan activity by using his skills, knowledge and experience. For this reason, entrepreneurship is considered as an economic activity.

(3) Organisation building : Entrepreneurship is an activity of organising various factors of production and various resources such as financial, physical and human resources. By considering place utility, time utility, form utility, etc., entrepreneur has to assemble different factors j of production and resources under one roof for producing new products.

(4) Creative activity : Innovation is a process of creating something new and creativity is most important for innovation. Therefore, innovation should be strongly supported by creativity, Innovation and creativity are supplement to each other. Introducing creativity in the production process is a challenging task before the entrepreneur. Hence, creativity is an essential element of entrepreneurship.

(5) Managerial skill and leadership : The entrepreneur who has strong passion of doing or creating something new rather than just to earn profit will become a successful entrepreneur. Managerial skills and leadership are the most important features of successful entrepreneur. Other skills are not considered so important. Entrepreneur must be a good leader and manager of the groups working under him.

(6) Skilful management : The efficient and skilful management of the organisation is an important quality of entrepreneurship. With the help of professional management and skilled managers, entrepreneurship becomes easy and successful activity. The success of any entrepreneurship depends on its skilful management.

(7) Risk-bearing : An entrepreneur has to undertake many risks including fall in prices, changes in fashions, earthquake, etc. All these risks cannot be insured with insurance companies. A risk which cannot be insured against and measured is called uncertainty. Entrepreneur buys factors of production at certain prices to combine their contributions into the products and then sells those products at uncertain prices in future. Thus, entrepreneur is a risk-bearing agent of production.

(8) Gap filling function : Gap filling is considered as the most important feature of entrepreneur. It is the job of entrepreneur to find the gap and fill it or make up the deficiencies which always exist in the knowledge about the production function. Entrepreneur must have all the solutions of the problems.

Question 4.
An entrepreneur must be an innovator.
Answer:
Innovation is a dynamic change brought by entrepreneur by bringing new combinations of factors of production. Innovation by entrepreneur is must for development of an organisation. Entrepreneur can be an innovator in many ways. They are:
(1) Introduction of a new product: Entrepreneur through his dynamic skill and intelligence create new products by fulfilling innovation to commercialisation by embedding it in an environment where it did not exist previously.

(2) Introduction of a new method of production : By introducing new and latest technology an entrepreneur brings new life and energy in methods of production. Introduction of new technology, new machinery, scientific methods of production will save money and time of the organisation.

(3) Opening of a new market : An innovative idea with new products. It opens a new market which are not existing previously.

(4) Carrying out new forms of organisation for industry : An innovative entrepreneur is the one who discovers new methods and new materials. He utilises invention and discoveries in order to make new combinations. Thus, entrepreneur must be an innovator.

Question 5.
With creativity, farmers can expand their Agro tourism Business.
Answer:
With creativity, farmers can expand their Agro tourism business through recreation, fun, entertaining activities. The valuable activities which farmer can do creatively are:
(1) Outdoor recreation : Farmer can add value and can expand their agro tourism business by outdoor recreation like trekking, fishing, hunting, wild life study, horse back riding, etc. All such activities are the point of attraction for a tourist and this can be enjoyed with family and friends too.

(2) Educational experiences : Farmers can also be more creative in farming tours, rice plantation, cooking classes on chulha. All such activities help customer to get hands on experience which they enjoy with adding educational values.

(3) Entertainment : Entertainment through harvest festivals like Hurda Party’ in Maharashtra, local dances, folk songs are recreation also main attraction for a customer for agro tourism. Entertaining activities such as contest, adult and children classes, games, etc. can be arranged. This innovative touch helps farmer to expand his business.

(4) Hospitality services : Hospitality services like farm stays, guided forms makes customer more happy. Farmer can add value to guest experience by offering them refreshment, fresh fruits, juice, fresh food, etc.

Happy customer will definitely returns and also spread good word of mouth to their family and friends. Thus, with creativity, farmers can expand their agro tourism business.

6. Attempt the following

Question 1.
Explain the characteristics Entrepreneurship Development.
Answer:
The following are the characteristics of entrepreneurship development:
(1) Innovation : Entrepreneur need to be innovative. The essence of entrepreneurship is innovation. Innovation may take place in the following forms viz., the introduction of a new product in the market, the installation of new production technology, entry of specific product, the discovery of a new source of raw material, etc. In view of changing taste, preferences, etc., of the consumers, from time to time, entrepreneur undertakes research and development to manufacture products to satisfy the consumers’ needs.

(2) Economic activity: In order to satisfy human wants and as well as in exchange earn a better livelihood, an entrepreneur manufactures new products or modify the existing products as per the needs, preferences and demands of the consumers. For this purpose, he undertakes a systematic plan activity by using his skills, knowledge and experience. For this reason, entrepreneurship is considered as an economic activity.

(3) Organisation building : Entrepreneurship is an activity of organising various factors of production and various resources such as financial, physical and human resources. By considering place utility, time utility, form utility,etc., entrepreneur has to assemble different factors j of production and resources under one roof for producing new products.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

(4) Creative activity : Innovation is a process of creating something new and creativity is most important for innovation. Therefore, innovation should be strongly supported by creativity, Innovation and creativity are supplement to each other. Introducing creativity in the production process is a challenging task before the entrepreneur. Hence, creativity is an essential element of entrepreneurship.

(5) Managerial skill and leadership : The entrepreneur who has strong passion of doing or creating something new rather than just to earn profit will become a successful entrepreneur. Managerial skills and leadership are the most important features of successful entrepreneur. Other skills are not considered so important. Entrepreneur must be a good leader and manager of the groups working under him.

(6) Skilful management : The efficient and skilful management of the organisation is an important quality of entrepreneurship. With the help of professional management and skilled managers, entrepreneurship becomes easy and successful activity. The success of any entrepreneurship depends on its skilful management.

(7) Risk-bearing : An entrepreneur has to undertake many risks including fall in prices, changes in fashions, earthquake, etc. All these risks cannot be insured with insurance companies. A risk which cannot be insured against and measured is called uncertainty. Entrepreneur buys factors of production at certain prices to combine their contributions into the products and then sells those products at uncertain prices in future. Thus, entrepreneur is a risk-bearing agent of production.

(8) Gap filling function : Gap filling is considered as the most important feature of entrepreneur. It is the job of entrepreneur to find the gap and fill it or make up the deficiencies which always exist in the knowledge about the production function. Entrepreneur must have all the solutions of the problems.

Question 2.
What is Entrepreneurship Development Programmes (EDP)?
Answer:
An entrepreneurship development
programme has been defined as “a programme designed to help a person in strengthening his entrepreneurial motive and in acquiring skills and capabilities necessary for playing his entrepreneurial role efficiently”.

EDP was first introduced in Gujarat in 1970 and was sponsored by the Gujarat Industrial Investment Corporation. EDP is basically a device through which people with entrepreneurial talents are identified, motivated to take up new industrial venture and guided in all aspects of starting a venture or an enterprise.

The following are the main objectives of EDP:
(1) Paster entreprenurial growth : The main objective is to increase the rate of all round entrepreneurial growth through training and educating them to develop the capability, talent and skills of existing entrepreneur.

(2) Optimum use of available resources : Another important objective is to use available resources to optimum level which result into minimisation of wastages and reduction in the overall cost of production. It also saves the invaluable resources for the future generation.

(3) Development of backward regions and improve economic status of socially disadvantage group : Its main objective is to establish different types of industries and business enterprise in the backward regions of the country. This leads to more employment opportunities and more income and savings of the people in backward group. By providing employment and other benefits to socially disadvantaged groups, EDP helps to improve their economic status.

(4) Generation of Employment opportunities : One of the important objectives of EDP is to generate employment opportunities for jobless people in the country by developing industries and business for them.

(5) Widening base for small and medium industries : The EDP helps to create, develop and widen the base for small and medium industries by strengthening them and create more and more entrepreneurs in the country. It helps in making country a job creator and not job seeker.

7. Answer the following

Question 1.
Define entrepreneur. Explain characteristics of entrepreneur.
Answer:
[A] Definition : According to Webster dictionary, “An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money.” The entrepreneurs are passionate to innovate, lend, invent or pioneer with a disruptive product or technology. A small businessman, a plumber or a founder of huge company are entrepreneurs.

[B] Characteristics : The characteristics of entrepreneur are as follows:
(1) Intellectual capabilities : An entrepreneur is a creative thinker. He always thinks more creatively and better than others. He always give innovative ideas which is the sign of his intellectual capabilities. He has ability to analyse any situation and take proper decision.

(2) Future vision : The entrepreneurs have the ability of foreseeing the future market conditions. He can take appropriate decision by considering recent market situations and changes in market conditions. He must have knowledge of external business environment. This enables them to take timely actions.

(3) Hard work : An entrepreneur is ready to work hard. Hard work is necessary in any type of venture or business activity to make it more successful. He is required to work more tediously, sincerely and seriously for long terms.

(4) Technical knowledge : The entrepreneur should have advance technical knowledge about the products and service, plans of production, etc. Entrepreneur should also update his technical knowledge from time to time to understand latest changes take place in technology.

(5) Communication skills : An entrepreneur needs to communicate effectively with different people like customers, suppliers, creditors, employees, etc. from time to time. He should have good communication skill and command over language he speaks, to be able to express his ideas and strategies effectively. Good communication skills mean proper understanding between sender and the receiver of the message.

(6) Highly optimistic : He should have positive thinking and positive approach in all the activities he undertakes. He is always hopeful and confident about the market situations even in failure or difficult times. It helps him to take the business out of difficulties and make it successful.

(7) Risk-bearing capacity : This is one of the main characteristics of an entrepreneur. He should be calculative in taking risk. He should be prepared to face challenges and look for opportunities in every adverse situation of business.

(8) Self confidence : He should be self confident to achieve his organisational goals. He I should always keep himself confident and motivated to face various obstacles and come out victorious every time in every challenge he faces.

Maharashtra Board OCM 12th Commerce Solutions Chapter 3 Entrepreneurship Development

Question 2.
Define entrepreneur. Explain its functions.
Answer:
[A] Definition : According to Webster dictionary, “An entrepreneur is a person who starts a business and is willing to risk loss in order to make money.” The entrepreneurs are passionate to innovate, lend, invent or pioneer with a disruptive product or technology. A small businessman, a plumber or a founder of huge company are entrepreneurs.

[B] Functions : The functions of an entrepreneur are:
(1) Innovation : Usually, an entrepreneur has an innovative mind. He introduces new combination of means of production. He introduces something new or something different that would give his business a competitive advantage. Innovation sometimes involves problem solving and entrepreneur gets pleasure by using his talents to solve those problems.

(2) Determination of objectives : An entrepreneur is required to decide the aims and objectives of the business enterprise he intends to establish. He has to change those aims and ; objectives as per changing conditions or accept those which are beneficial to the enterprise as per the market situation.

(3) Development of market: An entrepreneur has to find new, different and innovative ways to market his products and services. As the markets are developing constantly, he has to conduct surveys, research to understand customer’s demand.

(4) New technology : Entrepreneur has to install new, advanced and efficient technology, new machinery, new and scientific methods of production to save overall cost and to improve the methods of production.

(5) Good relations : Prosperity, growth and development of enterprise mostly depend on the cordial and efficient relations of the superiors, subordinates and all employees. In this respect, co-ordination among the employees plays a significant role to make business enterprise successful.

(6) Organising funds : Finance is required to meet working capital and fixed capital needs of business. The entrepreneur has to raise adequate financial resources to keep enterprise in living condition. For this purpose, he has to keep good relation with the existing as well as potential investors.

(7) Taking decisions : Timely, correct and wise decisions are most important to run a successful business. An entrepreneur has to evaluate pros and cons of every business decision.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

1. Choose the correct option.

i) Which of the following phenomenon proves that light is a transverse wave?
(A) reflection
(B) interference
(C) diffraction
(D) polarization
Answer:
(D) polarization

ii) Which property of light does not change when it travels from one medium to another?
(A) velocity
(B) wavelength
(C) amplitude
(D) frequency
Answer:
(D) frequency

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

iii) When unpolarized light is passed through a polarizer, its intensity
(A) increases
(B) decreases
(C) remains unchanged
(D) depends on the orientation of the polarizer
Answer:
(B) decreases

iv) In Young’s double slit experiment, the two coherent sources have different intensities. If the ratio of maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in the interference pattern produced is 25:1. What was the ratio of intensities of the two sources?
(A) 5:1
(B) 25:1
(C) 3:2
(D) 9:4
Answer:
(D) 9:4

v) In Young’s double slit experiment, a thin uniform sheet of glass is kept in front of the two slits, parallel to the screen having the slits. The resulting interference pattern will satisfy
(A) The interference pattern will remain unchanged
(B) The fringe width will decrease
(C) The fringe width will increase
(D) The fringes will shift.
Answer:
(A) The interference pattern will remain unchanged

2. Answer in brief.

i) What are primary and secondary sources of light?
Answer:
(1) Primary sources of light: The sources that emit light on their own are called primary sources. This emission of light may be due to
(a) the high temperature of the source, e.g., the Sun, the stars, objects heated to high temperature, a flame, etc.
(b) the effect of current being passed through the source, e.g., tubelight, TV, etc.
(c) chemical or nuclear reactions taking place in the source, e.g., firecrackers, nuclear energy generators, etc.

(2) Secondary sources of light: Some sources are not self luminous, i.e., they do not emit light on their own, but reflect or scatter the light incident on them. Such sources of light are called secondary sources, e.g. the moon, the planets, objects such as humans, animals, plants, etc. These objects are visible due to reflected light.
Many of the sources that we see around are secondary sources and most of them are extended sources.

ii) What is a wavefront? How is it related to rays of light? What is the shape of the wavefront at a point far away from the source of light?
Answer:
Wavefront or wave surface : The locus of all points where waves starting simultaneously from a source reach at the same instant of time and hence the particles at the points oscillate with the same phase, is called a wavefront or wave surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 25
Consider a point source of light O in a homogeneous isotropic medium in which the speed of light is v. The source emits light in all directions. In time t, the disturbance (light energy) from the source, covers a distance vt in all directions, i.e., it reaches out to all points which are at a distance vt from the point source. The locus of these points which are in the same phase is the surface of a sphere with the centre O and radius vt. It is a spherical wavefront.

In a given medium, a set of straight lines can be drawn which are perpendicular to the wavefront. According to Huygens, these straight lines are the rays of light. Thus, rays are always normal to the wavefront. In the case of a spherical wavefront, the rays are radial.

If a wavefront has travelled a large distance away from the source, a small portion of this wavefront appears to be plane. This part is a plane wavefront.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

iii) Why are multiple colours observed over a thin film of oil floating on water? Explain with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Several phenomena that we come across in our day to day life are caused by interference and diffraction of light. These are the vigorous colours of soap bubbles as well as those seen in a thin oil film on the surface of water, the bright colours of butterflies and peacocks etc. Most of these colours are not due to pigments which absorb specific colours but are due to interference of light waves that are reflected by different layers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 30

Interference due to a thin film:

The brilliant colours of soap bubbles and thin films on the surface of water are due to the interference of light waves reflected from the upper and lower surfaces of the film. The two rays have a path difference which depends on the point on the film that is being viewed. This is shown in above figure.

The incident wave gets partially reflected from upper surface as shown by ray AE. The rest of the light gets refracted and travels along AB. At B it again gets partially reflected and travels along BC. At C it refracts into air and travels along CF. The parallel rays AE and CF have a phase difference due to their different path lengths in different media. As can be seen from the figure, the phase difference depends on the angle of incidence θ1, i.e., the angle of incidence at the top surface which is the angle of viewing, and also on the wavelength of the light as the refractive index of the material of the thin film depends on it. The two waves propagating along AE and CF interfere producing maxima and minima for different colours at different angles of viewing. One sees different colours when the film is viewed at different angles.

As the reflection is from the denser boundary, there is an additional phase difference of π radians (or an
additional path difference λ). This should be taken into account for mathematical analysis.

iv) In Young’s double slit experiment what will we observe on the screen when white light is incident on the slits but one slit is covered with a red filter and the other with a violet filter? Give reasons for your answer.
Answer:
In Young’s double-slit experiment, when white light is incident on the slits and one of the slit is covered with a red filter, the light passing through this slit will emerge as the light having red colour. The other slit which is covered with a violet filter, will give light having violet colour as emergent light. The interference fringes will involve mixing of red and violet colours. At some points, fringes will be red if constructive interference occurs for red colour and destructive interference occurs for violet colour. At some points, fringes will be violet if constructive interference occurs for violet colour and destructive interference occurs for red colour. The central fringe will be bright with mixing of red and violet colours.

v) Explain what is optical path length. How is it different from actual path length?
Answer:
Consider, a light wave of angular frequency ω and wave vector k travelling through vacuum along the x-direction. The phase of this wave is (kx-ωt). The speed of light in vacuum is c and that in medium is v.
k = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{2 \pi v}{v \lambda}\) = \(\frac{\omega}{v}\) as ω = 2πv and v = vλ, where v is the frequency of light.

If the wave travels a distance ∆x, its phase changes by ∆φ = k∆x = ω∆x/v.
Similarly, if the wave is travelling in vacuum, k = ω/c and ∆φ = ω∆x/c
Now, consider a wave travelling a distance ∆x in the medium, the phase difference generated is,
∆φ’ = k’∆x = ωn∆x/c = ω∆x’/c … (1)
where ∆x’ = n∆x … (2)
The distance n∆x is called the optical path length of the light in the medium; it is the distance the light would have travelled in the same time t in vacuum (with the speed c).

The optical path length in a medium is the corresonding path in vacuum that the light travels in the same time as it takes in the given medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 31
Thus, a distance d travelled in a medium of refractive index n introduces a path difference = nd – d = d(n – 1) over a ray travelling equal distance through vacuum.

Question 3.
Derive the laws of reflection of light using Huygens’ principle.
Answer:
Consider a plane wavefront AB of monochromatic light propagating in the direction A’A incident obliquely at an angle i on a plane refracting surface MN. This plane refracting surface MN separates two uniform and optically transparent mediums.
Let v1 and v2 be the speeds of light in medium 1 (say, a rarer medium) and medium 2 (a denser medium) respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 35
When the wavefront reaches MN at point A at t = 0, A becomes a secondary source and emits secondary waves in the second medium, while ray B’B reaches the surface MN at C at time t = T. Thus, BC = v1T. During the time T, the secondary wavelet originating at A covers a distance AE in the denser medium with radius v2T.

As all the points on CE are in the same phase of wave motion, CE represents the refracted wavefront in the denser medium. CE is the tangent to the secondary wavelet starting from A. It is also a common tangent to all the secondary wavelets emitted by points between A and C. PP’ is the normal to the boundary at A.
∠A’AP = ∠BAC = the angle of incidence (i) and ∠P’AE = ∠ACE = the angle of refraction (r).
From ∆ABC and ∆AEC,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 36
By definition, the refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 37
Here, n1 and n2 are the absolute refractive indices of medium 1 and medium 2 respectively. Eq. (1) is Snell’s law of refraction. Also, it can be seen from the figure, that the incident ray and the refracted ray lie on the opposite sides of the normal and all three of them lie in the same plane.

Thus, the laws of refraction of light can be deduced by Huygens’ construction of a plane wavefront.
If v1 > v2, i.e. n1 < n2, then r < i (bending of the refracted ray towards the normal).
[Notes :
(1) Quite often, the terms vacuum and free space are used in the same sense. Absolute vacuum or a perfect vacuum-a region of space devoid of material, particles – does not exist. The term vacuum is also used to mean a region of space occupied by a gas at very low pressure. Free space means a region of space devoid of matter and fields. Its refractive index is 1 (by definition). Its temperature is 0 K. ε0 and μ0 are defined for free space. The refractive index of a medium with respect to air is very close to the absolute refractive index of the medium as the speed of light in air is very close to that in free space.
(2) There is no lateral inversion in refraction.
(3) There is no bending of light when the angle of incidence is zero (normal incidence), r = 0 for i = 0.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 4.
Derive the laws of refraction of light using Huygens’ principle.
Answer:
Consider a plane wavefront AB of monochromatic light propagating in the direction A’A incident obliquely at an angle i on a plane refracting surface MN. This plane refracting surface MN separates two uniform and optically transparent mediums.
Let v1 and v2 be the speeds of light in medium 1 (say, a rarer medium) and medium 2 (a denser
medium) respectively.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 35
When the wavefront reaches MN at point A at t = 0, A becomes a secondary source and emits secondary waves in the second medium, while ray B’B reaches the surface MN at C at time t = T. Thus, BC = v1T. During the time T, the secondary wavelet originating at A covers a distance AE in the denser medium with radius v2T.

As all the points on CE are in the same phase of wave motion, CE represents the refracted wavefront in the denser medium. CE is the tangent to the secondary wavelet starting from A. It is also a common tangent to all the secondary wavelets emitted by points between A and C. PP’ is the normal to the boundary at A.
∠A’AP = ∠BAC = the angle of incidence (i) and ∠P’AE = ∠ACE = the angle of refraction (r).
From ∆ABC and ∆AEC,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 36
By definition, the refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 37
Here, n1 and n2 are the absolute refractive indices of medium 1 and medium 2 respectively. Eq. (1) is Snell’s law of refraction. Also, it can be seen from the figure, that the incident ray and the refracted ray lie on the opposite sides of the normal and all three of them lie in the same plane.

Thus, the laws of refraction of light can be deduced by Huygens’ construction of a plane wavefront.
If v1 > v2, i.e. n1 < n2, then r < i (bending of the refracted ray towards the normal).
[Notes :

  1. Quite often, the terms vacuum and free space are used in the same sense. Absolute vacuum or a perfect vacuum-a region of space devoid of material, particles – does not exist. The term vacuum is also used to mean a region of space occupied by a gas at very low pressure. Free space means a region of space devoid of matter and fields. Its refractive index is 1 (by definition). Its temperature is 0 K. ε0 and μ0 are defined for free space. The refractive index of a medium with respect to air is very close to the absolute refractive index of the medium as the speed of light in air is very close to that in free space.
  2. There is no lateral inversion in refraction.
  3. There is no bending of light when the angle of incidence is zero (normal incidence), r = 0 for i = 0.]

Question 5.
Explain what is meant by polarization and derive Malus’ law.
Answer:
According to the electromagnetic theory of light, a light wave consists of electric and magnetic fields vibrating at right angles to each other and to the direction of propagation of the wave. If the vibrations of \(\vec{E}\) in a light wave are in all directions perpendicular to the direction of propagation of light, the wave is said to be unpolarized.

If the vibrations of the electric field \(\vec{E}\) in a light wave are confined to a single plane containing the direction of propagation of the wave so that its electric field is restricted along one particular direction at right angles to the direction of propagation of the wave, the wave is said to be plane-polarized or linearly polarized.

This phenomenon of restricting the vibrations of light, i.e., of the electric field vector in a particular direction, which is perpendicular to the direction of the propagation of the wave is called polarization of light.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 39
Consider an unpolarized light wave travelling along the x-direction. Let c, v and λ be the speed, frequency and wavelength, respectively, of the wave. The magnitude of its electric field (\(\vec{E}\)) is,
E = E0 sin (kx – ωt), where E0 = Emax = amplitude of the wave, ω = 2πv = angular frequency of the wave and k = \(\frac{2 \pi}{\lambda}\) = magnitude of the wave vector or propagation vector.

The intensity of the wave is proportional to \(\left|E_{0}\right|^{2}\). The direction of the electric field can be anywhere in the y-z plane. This wave is passed through two identical polarizers as shown in below figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 40
When a wave with its electric field inclined at an angle φ to the axis of the first polarizer is passed through the polarizer, the component E0 cos φ will pass through it. The other component E0 sin φ which is perpendicular to it will be blocked.

Now, after passing through this polarizer, the intensity of this wave will be proportional to the square of its amplitude, i.e., proportional to |E0 cos φ|2.

The intensity of the plane-polarized wave emerging from the first polarizer can be obtained by averaging | E0 cos φ|2 over all values of φ between 0 and 180°. The intensity of the wave will be
proportional to \(\frac{1}{2}\)|E0|2 as the average value of cos2 φ over this range is \(\frac{1}{2}\). Thus the intensity of an unpolarized wave reduces by half after passing through a polarizer.

When the plane-polarized wave emerges from the first polarizer, let us assume that its electric field (\(\overrightarrow{E_{1}}\)) is along the y-direction. Thus, this electric field is,
\(\overrightarrow{E_{1}}\) = \(\hat{\mathrm{j}}\) E10 sin (kx – ωt) …. (1)
where, E10 is the amplitude of this polarized wave. The intensity of the polarized wave,
I1 ∝ |E10|2 …(2)

Now this wave passes through the second polarizer whose polarization axis (transmission axis) makes an angle θ with the y-direction. This allows only the component E10 cos θ to pass through it. Thus, the amplitude of the wave which passes through the second polarizer is E20 = E10 cos θ and its intensity,
I2 ∝ | E20|2
∴ I2 ∝ | E10|2 cos2θ
∴ I2 = I1 cos2θ … (3)

Thus, when plane-polarized light of intensity I1 is incident on the second identical polarizer, the intensity of light transmitted by the second polarizer varies as cos2θ, i.e., I2 = I1 cos2θ, where θ is the angle between the transmission axes of the two polarizers. This is known as Malus’ law

[Note : Etienne Louis Malus (1775-1812), French military engineer and physicist, discovered in 1809 that light can be polarized by reflection. He was the first to use the word polarization, but his arguments were based on Newton’s corpuscular theory.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 6.
What is Brewster’s law? Derive the formula for Brewster angle.
Answer:
Brewster’s law : The tangent of the polarizing angle is equal to the refractive index of the reflecting medium with respect to the surrounding (1n2). If θB is the polarizing angle,
tan θB = 1n2 = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
Here n1 is the absolute refractive index of the surrounding and n2 is that of the reflecting medium.
The angle θB is called the Brewster angle.

Consider a ray of unpolarized monochromatic light incident at an angle θB on a boundary between two transparent media as shown in below figure. Medium 1 is a rarer medium with refractive index n1 and medium 2 is a denser medium with refractive index n2. Part of incident light gets refracted and the rest
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 41
gets reflected. The degree of polarization of the reflected ray varies with the angle of incidence.
The electric field of the incident wave is in the plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation of incident light. This electric field can be resolved into a component parallel to the plane of the paper, shown by double arrows, and a component perpendicular to the plane of the paper shown by dots, both having equal magnitude. Generally, the reflected and refracted rays are partially polarized, i.e., the two components do not have equal magnitude.

In 1812, Sir David Brewster discovered that for a particular angle of incidence. θB, the reflected wave is completely plane-polarized with its electric field perpendicular to the plane of the paper while the refracted wave is partially polarized. This particular angle of incidence (θB) is called the Brewster angle.

For this angle of incidence, the refracted and reflected rays are perpendicular to each other.
For angle of refraction θr,
θB + θr = 90° …… (1)
From Snell’s law of refraction,
∴ n1 sin θB = n2 sin θr … (2)
From Eqs. (1) and (2), we have,
n1 sin θB = n2 sin (90° – θB) = n2 cos θB
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 42
This is called Brewster’s law.

Question 7.
Describe Young’s double slit interference experiment and derive conditions for occurrence of dark and bright fringes on the screen. Define fringe width and derive a formula for it.
Answer:
Description of Young’s double-slit interference experiment:

  1. A plane wavefront is obtained by placing a linear source S of monochromatic light at the focus of a convex lens. It is then made to pass through an opaque screen AB having two narrow and similar slits S1 and S2. S1 and S2 are equidistant from S so that the wavefronts starting simultaneously from S and reaching S1 and S2 at the same time are in phase. A screen PQ is placed at some distance from screen AB as shown in below figure
    Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 43
  2. S1 and S2 act as secondary sources. The crests/-troughs of the secondary wavelets superpose and interfere constructively along straight lines joining the black dots shown in above figure. The point where these lines meet the screen have high intensity and are bright.
  3. Similarly, there are points shown with red dots where the crest of one wave coincides with the trough of the other. The corresponding points on the screen are dark due to destructive interference.
  4. These dark and bright regions are called fringes or bands and the whole pattern is called interference pattern.

Conditions for occurence of dark and bright fringes on the screen :

Consider Young’s double-slit experimental set up. Two narrow coherent light sources are obtained by wavefront splitting as monochromatic light of wavelength λ emerges out of two narrow and closely spaced, parallel slits S1 and S2 of equal widths. The separation S1S2 = d is very small. The interference pattern is observed on a screen placed parallel to the plane of and at considerable distance D (D » d) from the slits. OO’ is the perpendicular bisector of segment S1S2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 44
Consider, a point P on the screen at a distance y from O’ (y « D). The two light waves from S1 and S2 reach P along paths S1P and S2P, respectively. If the path difference (∆l) between S1P and S2P is an integral multiple of λ, the two waves arriving there will interfere constructively producing a bright fringe at P. On the contrary, if the path difference between S1P and S2P is half integral multiple of λ, there will be destructive interference and a dark fringe will be produced at P.
From above figure,
(S2P)2 = (S2S2)2 + (PS2‘)2
= (S2S2‘)2 + (PO’ + O’S2‘)2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 45
Expression for the fringe width (or band width) : The distance between consecutive bright (or dark) fringes is called the fringe width (or band width) W. Point P will be bright (maximum intensity), if the path difference, ∆l = yn\(\frac{d}{D}\) = nλ where n = 0,1, 2, 3…, Point P will be dark (minimum intensity equal to zero), if ym\(\frac{d}{D}\) = (2m – 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\), where, m = 1, 2, 3…,
Thus, for bright fringes (or bands),
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 46
These conditions show that the bright and dark fringes (or bands) occur alternately and are equally – spaced. For Point O’, the path difference (S2O’ – S1O’) = 0. Hence, point O’ will be bright. It corresponds to the centre of the central bright fringe (or band). On both sides of O’, the interference pattern consists of alternate dark and bright fringes (or band) parallel to the slit.

Let yn and yn + 1, be the distances of the nth and (n + 1)th bright fringes from the central bright fringe.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 47
Alternately, let ym and ym + 1 be the distances of the m th and (m + 1)th dark fringes respectively from the central bright fringe.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 48
Eqs. (7) and (11) show that the fringe width is the same for bright and dark fringes.

[Note : In the first approximation, the path difference is d sin θ.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 8.
What are the conditions for obtaining good interference pattern? Give reasons.
Answer:
The conditions necessary for obtaining well defined and steady interference pattern :

  1. The two sources of light should be coherent:
    The two sources must maintain their phase relation during the time required for observation. If the phases and phase difference vary with time, the positions of maxima and minima will also change with time and consequently the interference pattern will change randomly and rapidly, and steady interference pattern would not be observed. For coherence, the two secondary sources must be derived from a single original source.
  2. The light should be monochromatic :
    Otherwise, interference will result in complex coloured bands (fringes) because the separation of successive bright bands (fringes) is different for different colours. It also may produce overlapping bands.
  3. The two light sources should be of equal brightness, i.e., the waves must have the same amplitude.
    The interfering light waves should have the same amplitude. Then, the points where the waves meet in opposite phase will be completely dark (zero intensity). This will increase the contrast of the interference pattern and make it more distinct.
  4. The two light sources should be narrow :
    If the source apertures are wide in comparison with the light wavelength, each source will be equivalent to multiple narrow sources and the superimposed pattern will consist of bright and less bright fringes. That is, the interference pattern will not be well defined.
  5. The interfering light waves should be in the same state of polarization :
    Otherwise, the points where the waves meet in opposite phase will not be completely dark and the interference pattern will not be distinct.
  6. The two light sources should be closely spaced and the distance between the screen and the sources should be large : Both these conditions are desirable for appreciable fringe separation. The separation of successive bright or dark fringes is inversely proportional to the closeness of the slits and directly proportional to the screen distance.

Question 9.
What is meant by coherent sources? What are the two methods for obtaining coherent sources in the laboratory?
Answer:
Coherent sources : Two sources of light are said to be coherent if the phase difference between the emitted waves remains constant.

It is not possible to observe interference pattern with light from any two different sources. This is because, no observable interference phenomenon occurs by superposing light from two different sources. This happens due to the fact that different sources emit waves of different frequencies. Even if the two sources emit light of the same frequency, the phase difference between the wave trains from them fluctuates randomly and rapidly, i.e., they are not coherent.
Consequently, the interference pattern will change randomly and rapidly, and steady interference pattern would not be observed.

In the laboratory, coherent sources can be obtained by using
(1) Lloyd’s mirror and
(2) Fresnel’s biprism.

(1) Lloyd’s mirror : A plane polished mirror is kept at some distance from the source of monochromatic light and light is made incident on the mirror at a grazing angle.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 49
Some light falls directly on the screen as shown by the black lines in above figure, while some light falls on the screen after reflection from the mirror as shown by red lines. The reflected light appears to come from a virtual source and thus two sources can be obtained. These two sources are coherent as they are derived from a single source. Superposition of the waves coming from these coherent sources, under appropriate conditions, gives rise to interference pattern consisting of alternate bright and dark bands on the screen as shown in the figure.

(2) Fresnel’s biprism : It is a single prism having an obtuse angle of about 178° and the other two angles of about 1° each. The biprism can be considered as made of two thin prisms of very small refracting angle of about 1°. The source, in the form of an illuminated narrow slit, is aligned parallel to the refracting edge of the biprism. Monochromatic light from the source is made to pass through that narrow slit and fall on the biprism.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 50
Two virtual images S1 and S2 are formed by the two halves of the biprism. These are coherent sources which are obtained from a single secondary source S. The two waves coming from S1 and S2 interfere under appropriate conditions and form interference fringes, like those obtained in Young’s double-slit experiment, as shown in the figure in the shaded region. The formula for y is the same as in Young’s experiment.

Question 10.
What is diffraction of light? How does it differ from interference? What are Fraunhoffer and Fresnel diffractions?
Answer:
1. Phenomenon of diffraction of light: When light passes by the edge of an obstacle or through a small opening or a narrow slit and falls on a screen, the principle of rectilinear propagation of light from geometrical optics predicts a sharp shadow. However, it is found that some of the light deviates from its rectilinear path and penetrates into the region of the geometrical shadow. This is a general characteristic of wave phenomena, which occurs whenever a portion of the wavefront is obstructed in some way. This bending of light waves at an edge into the region of geometrical shadow is called diffraction of light.

2. Differences between interference and diffraction :

  1. The term interference is used to characterise the superposition of a few coherent waves (say, two). But when the superposition at a point involves a large number of waves coming from different parts of the same wavefront, the effect is referred to as diffraction.
  2. Double-slit interference fringes are all of equal width. In single-slit diffraction pattern, only the non-central maxima are of equal width which is half of that of the central maximum.
  3. In double-slit interference, the bright and dark fringes are equally spaced. In diffraction, only the non-central maxima lie approximately halfway between the minima.
  4. In double-slit interference, bright fringes are of equal intensity. In diffraction, successive non-central maxima decrease rapidly in intensity.

[Note : Interference and diffraction both have their origin in the principle of superposition of waves. There is no physical difference between them. It is just a question of usage. When there are only a few sources, say two, the phenomenon is usually called interference. But, if there is a large number of sources the word diffraction is used.]

3. Diffraction can be classified into two types depending on the distances involved in the experimental setup :

(A) Fraunhofer diffraction : In this class of diffraction, both the source and the screen are at infinite distances from the aperture. This is achieved by placing the source at the focus of a convex lens and the screen at the focal plane of another convex lens.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 51
(B) Fresnel diffraction : In this class of diffraction, either the source of light or the screen or both are at finite distances from the diffracting aperture. The incident wavefront is either cylindrical or spherical depending on the source. A lens is not needed to observe the diffraction pattern on the screen.

Question 11.
Derive the conditions for bright and dark fringes produced due to diffraction by a single slit.
Answer:
When a parallel beam of monochromatic light of wavelength λ illuminates a single slit of finite width a, we observe on a screen some distance from the slit, a broad pattern of alternate dark and bright fringes. The pattern consists of a central bright fringe, with successive dark and bright fringes of diminishing intensity on both sides. This is called ‘ the diffraction pattern of a single slit.

Consider a single slit illuminated with a parallel beam of monochromatic light perpendicular to the plane of the slit. The diffraction pattern is obtained on a screen at a distance D (» a) from the slit and at the focal plane of the convex lens, Fig. 7.33.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 52
We can imagine the single slit as being made up of a large number of Huygens’ sources evenly distributed over the width of the slit. Then the maxima and minima of the pattern arise from the interference of the various Huygens’ wavelets.

Now, imagine the single slit as made up of two adjacent slits, each of width a/2. Since, the incident plane wavefronts are parallel to the plane of the slit, all the Huygens sources at the slit will be in phase. They will therefore also in phase at the point P0 on the screen, where P0 is equidistant from all the Huygens sources. At P0, then, we get the central maximum.

For the first minimum of intensity on the screen, the path difference between the waves from the Huygens sources A and O (or O and B) is λ/2, which is the condition for destructive interference. Suppose, the nodal line OP for the first minimum subtends an angle θ at the slit; θ is very small. With P as the centre and PA as radius, strike an arc intersecting PB at C. Since, D » a, the arc AC can be considered a straight line at right angles to PB. Then, ∆ABC is a right-angled triangle similar to ∆OP0P.
This means that, ∠BAC = θ
∴ BC = a sinθ
∴ Difference in path length,
BC = PB – PA = (PB – PO) + (PO – PA)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 53
(∵ θ is very small and in radian)
The other nodal lines of intensity minima can be understood in a similar way. In general, then, for the with minimum (m = ±1, ±2, ±3, …).
θm = \(\frac{m \lambda}{a}\) (mth minimum) … (2)
as θm is very small and in radian.
Between the successive minima, the intensity rises to secondary maxima when the path difference is an odd-integral multiple of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) :
a sin θm = (2m + 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = (m + \(\frac{1}{2}\))λ
i.e., at angles given by,
θm \(\simeq\) sin θm = (m + \(\frac{1}{2}\))\(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
(with secondary maximum) … (3)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 12.
Describe what is Rayleigh’s criterion for resolution. Explain it for a telescope and a microscope.
Answer:
Rayleigh’s criterion for minimum resolution : Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are acceptably or just resolved if the centre of the central peak of one diffraction pattern is as far as the first minimum of the other pattern.

The ‘sharpness’ of the central maximum of a diffraction pattern is measured by the angular separation between the centre of the peak and the first minimum. It gives the limit of resolution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 54
Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are not resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is less than the limit of resolution. They are said to be just separate, or resolved, if the angular separation between the central peaks is equal to the limit of resolution. They are said to be well resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is more than the limit of resolution.

Resolving power of an optical instrument:
The primary aim of using an optical instrument is to see fine details, whether observing a star system through a telescope or a living cell through a microscope. After passing through an optical system, light from two adjacent parts of the object should produce sharp, distinct (separate) images of those parts. The objective lens or mirror of a telescope or microscope acts like a circular aperture. The diffraction pattern of a circular aperture consists of a central bright spot (called the Airy disc and corresponds to the central maximum) and concentric dark and bright rings.

Light from two close objects or parts of an object after passing through the aperture of an optical system produces overlapping diffraction patterns that tend to obscure the image. If these diffraction patterns are so broad that their central maxima overlap substantially, it is difficult to decide if the intensity distribution is produced by two separate objects or by one.

The resolving power of an optical instrument, e.g., a telescope or microscope, is a measure of its ability to produce detectably separate images of objects that are close together.

Definition : The smallest linear or angular separation between two point objects which appear just resolved when viewed through an optical instrument is called the limit of resolution of the instrument and its reciprocal is called the resolving power of the instrument.

Rayleigh’s criterion for minimum resolution : Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are acceptably or just resolved if the centre of the central peak of one diffraction pattern is as far as the first minimum of the other pattern.

The ‘sharpness’ of the central maximum of a diffraction pattern is measured by the angular separation between the centre of the peak and the first minimum. It gives the limit of resolution.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 54
Two overlapping diffraction patterns due to two point sources are not resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is less than the limit of resolution. They are said to be just separate, or resolved, if the angular separation between the central peaks is equal to the limit of resolution. They are said to be well resolved if the angular separation between the central peaks is more than the limit of resolution.

The resolving power of a telescope is defined as the reciprocal of the angular limit of resolution between two closely-spaced distant objects so that they are just resolved when seen through the telescope.

Consider two stars seen through a telescope. The diameter (D) of the objective lens or mirror corresponds to the diffracting aperture. For a distant point source, the first diffraction minimum is at an angle θ away from the centre such that
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 60
Dsinθ = 1.22 λ
where λ is the wavelength of light. The angle θ is usually so small that we can substitute sin θ \(\approx\) θ (θ in radian). Thus, the Airy disc for each star will be spread out over an angular half-width θ = 1.22 λ/D about its geometrical image point. The radius of the Airy disc at the focal plane of the objective lens is r = fθ = 1.22fλ/D, where / is the focal length of the objective.

When observing two closely-spaced stars, the Rayleigh criterion for just resolving the images as that of two point sources (instead of one) is met when the centre of one Airy disc falls on the first minimum of the other pattern. Thus, the angular limit (or angular separation) of resolution is
θ = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\) …. (1)
and the linear separation between the images at the focal plane of the objective lens is
y = fθ …(2)
∴ Resolving power of a telescope,
R = \(\frac{1}{\theta}\) = \(\frac{D}{1.22 \lambda}\) … (3)
It depends

  1. directly on the diameter of the objective lens or mirror,
  2. inversely on the wavelength of the radiation.

Question 13.
Whitelight consists of wavelengths from 400 nm to 700 nm. What will be the wavelength range seen when white light is passed through glass of refractive index 1.55? [Ans: 258.1 – 451.6 nm]
Answer:
Let λ1 and λ2 be the wavelengths of light in water for 400 nm and 700 nm (wavelengths in vacuum) respectively. Let λa be the wavelength of light in vacuum.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 65
The wavelength range seen when white light is passed through the glass would be 258.06 nm to 451.61 nm.

Question 14.
The optical path of a ray of light of a given wavelength travelling a distance of 3 cm in flint glass having refractive index 1.6 is same as that on travelling a distance x cm through a medium having refractive index 1.25. Determine the value of x.
[Ans: 3.84 cm]
Answer:
Let dfg and dm be the distances by the ray of light in the flint glass and the medium respectively. Also, let nfg and nm be the refractive indices of the flint glass and the medium respectively.
Data : dfg = 3 cm, nfg = 1.6, nm = 1.25,
Optical path = nm × dm = nfg × dfg
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 66
Thus, x cm = 3.84 cm
∴ x = 3.84
This is the value of x.

Question 15.
A double-slit arrangement produces interference fringes for sodium light (λ = 589 nm) that are 0.20° apart. What
is the angular fringe separation if the entire arrangement is immersed in water (n = 1.33)? [Ans: 0.15°]
Answer:
Data : θ1 = 0.20°, nw = 1.33
In the first approximation,
D sin θ1 = y1 and D sin θ2 = y2
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 67
∴ θ2 = sin-10.026
= 9′ = 0.15°
This is the required angular fringe separation.
OR
In the first approximation,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 68

Question 16.
In a double-slit arrangement the slits are separated by a distance equal to 100 times the wavelength of the light passing through the slits.
(a) What is the angular separation in radians between the central maximum and an adjacent maximum?
(b) What is the distance between these maxima on a screen 50.0 cm from the slits?
[Ans: 0.01 rad, 0.5 cm]
Answer:
Data : d = 100λ, D = 50.0 cm
(a) The condition for maximum intensity in Young’s experiment is, d sin θ = nλ, n = 0, 1, 2 …,
The angle between the central maximum and its adjacent maximum can be determined by setting n equal to 1,
∴ d sin θ = λ
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 69
(b) The distance between these maxima on the screen is D sin θ = D\(\left(\frac{\lambda}{d}\right)\)
= (50.0 cm)\(\left(\frac{\lambda}{100 \lambda}\right)\)
= 0.50 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 17.
Unpolarized light with intensity I0 is incident on two polaroids. The axis of the first polaroid makes an angle of 50° with the vertical, and the axis of the second polaroid is horizontal. What is the intensity of the light after it has passed through the second polaroid? [Ans: I0/2 × (cos 40°)2]
Answer:
According to Malus’ law, when the unpolarized light with intensity I0 is incident on the first polarizer, the polarizer polarizes this incident light. The intensity of light becomes I1 = I0/2.
Now, I2 = I1 cos2θ
∴ I2 = \(\left(\frac{I_{0}}{2}\right)\) cos2θ
Also, the angle θ between the axes of the two polarizers is θ2 – θ1.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 70
The intensity of light after it has passed through the second polaroid = \(\left(\frac{\boldsymbol{I}_{0}}{\mathbf{2}}\right)\)cos240° = \(\frac{I_{0}}{2}\)(0.7660)2
= 0.2934 I0

Question 18.
In a biprism experiment, the fringes are observed in the focal plane of the eyepiece at a distance of 1.2 m from the slits. The distance between the central bright band and the 20th bright band is 0.4 cm. When a convex lens is placed between the biprism and the eyepiece, 90 cm from the eyepiece, the distance between the two virtual magnified images is found to be 0.9 cm. Determine the wavelength of light used. [Ans: 5000 Å]
Answer:
Data : D = 1.2 m
The distance between the central bright band and the 20th bright band is 0.4 cm.
∴ y20 = 0.4 cm = 0.4 × 10-2 m
W = \(\frac{y_{20}}{20}\) = \(\frac{0.4}{20}\) × 10-2 m = 2 × 10-4 m,
d1 = 0.9 cm = 0.9 × 10-2m, v1 = 90 cm = 0.9 m
∴ u1 = D – v1 = 1.2m – 0.9m = 0.3 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 71

Question 19.
In Fraunhoffer diffraction by a narrow slit, a screen is placed at a distance of 2 m from the lens to obtain the diffraction pattern. If the slit width is 0.2 mm and the first minimum is 5 mm on either side of the central maximum, find the wavelength of light. [Ans: 5000 Å]
Answer:
Data : D = 2 m, y1d = 5 mm = 5 × 10-3 m, a = 0.2 mm = 0.2 × 10-3 m = 2 × 10-4 m
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 72
This is the wavelength of light.

Question 20.
The intensity of the light coming from one of the slits in Young’s experiment is twice the intensity of the light coming from the other slit. What will be the approximate ratio of the intensities of the bright and dark fringes in the resulting interference pattern? [Ans: 34]
Answer:
Data : I1 : I2 = 2 : 1
If E10 and E20 are the amplitudes of the interfering waves, the ratio of the maximum intensity to the minimum intensity in the fringe system is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 75
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 76
The ratio of the intensities of the bright and dark fringes in the resulting interference pattern is 34 : 1.

Question 21.
A parallel beam of green light of wavelength 550 nm passes through a slit of width 0.4 mm. The intensity pattern of the transmitted light is seen on a screen which is 40 cm away. What is the distance between the two first order minima? [Ans: 1.1 mm]
Answer:
Data : λ = 550 nm = 546 × 10-9 m, a = 0.4 mm = 4 × 10-4 m, D = 40 cm = 40 × 10-2 m
ymd = m\(\frac{\lambda D}{a}\)
∴ y1d = 1\(\frac{\lambda D}{a}\) and
2y1d = \(\frac{2 \lambda D}{a}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 550 \times 10^{-9} \times 40 \times 10^{-2}}{4 \times 10^{-4}}\)
= 2 × 550 × 10-6 = 1092 × 10-6
= 1.100 × 10-3m = 1.100 mm
This is the distance between the two first order minima.

Question 22.
What must be the ratio of the slit width to the wavelength for a single slit to have the first diffraction minimum at 45.0°? [Ans: 1.274]
Answer:
Data : θ = 45°, m = 1
a sin θ = mλ for (m = 1, 2, 3… minima)
Here, m = 1 (First minimum)
∴ a sin 45° = (1) λ
∴ \(\frac{a}{\lambda}\) = \(\frac{1}{\sin 45^{\circ}}\) = 1.414
This is the required ratio.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 23.
Monochromatic electromagnetic radiation from a distant source passes through a slit. The diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2.50 m from the slit. If the width of the central maximum is 6.00 mm, what is the slit width if the wavelength is
(a) 500 nm (visible light);
(b) 50 µm (infrared radiation);
(c) 0.500 nm (X-rays)?
[Ans: 0.4167 mm, 41.67 mm, 4.167 × 10-4 mm]
Answer:
Data:2W = 6mm ∴ W= 3 mm = 3 × 10-3 m, y = 2.5 m,
(a) λ1 = 500 nm = 5 × 10-7 m
(b) λ2 = 50 μm = 5 × 10-5 m
(c) λ3 = 0.500 nm = 5 × 10-10 m
Let a be the slit width.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 80
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 81

Question 24.
A star is emitting light at the wavelength of 5000 Å. Determine the limit of resolution of a telescope having an objective of diameter of 200 inch. [Ans: 1.2 × 10-7 rad]
Answer:
Data : λ = 5000 Å = 5 × 10-7 m,
D = 200 × 2.54 cm = 5.08 m
θ = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{D}\)
= \(\frac{1.22 \times 5 \times 10^{-7}}{5.08}\)
= 1.2 × 10-7 rad
This is the required quantity.

Question 25.
The distance between two consecutive bright fringes in a biprism experiment using light of wavelength 6000 Å is 0.32 mm by how much will the distance change if light of wavelength 4800 Å is used? [Ans: 0.064 mm]
Answer:
Data : λ1 = 6000 Å = 6 × 10-7m, λ2 = 4800 Å = 4.8 × 10-7m, W1 = 0.32 mm = 3.2 × 10-4m
Distance between consecutive bright fringes,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 82
∴ ∆W = W1 – W2
= 3.2 × 10-4m – 2.56 × 10-4m
= 0.64 × 10-4m
= 6.4 × 10-5
= 0.064 mm
This is the required change in distance.

12th Physics Digest Chapter 7 Wave Optics Intext Questions and Answers

Use your brain power (Textbook Page No. 167)

What will you observe if

Question 1.
you look at a source of unpolarized light through a polarizer ?
Answer:
When a source of unpolarized light is viewed through a polarizer, the intensity of the light transmitted by the polarizer is reduced and hence the source appears less bright.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Question 2.
you look at the source through two polarizers and rotate one of them around the path of light for one full rotation?
Answer:
When a source of unpolarized light is viewed through two polarizers and the second polarizer is rotated gradually, the intensity of the light transmitted by the second polarizer goes on decreasing. When the axes of polarization of the two polarizers are at 90° to each other, light almost disappears depending on the quality of the polarizers. (Ideally the intensity of the transmitted light should be zero.) The light reappears, i.e., its intensity increases, when the second polarizer is rotated further, and the intensity of the light becomes maximum when the axes of polarization are parallel again.

Question 3.
instead of rotating only one of the polaroids, you rotate both polaroids simultaneously in the same direction?
Answer:
If both the polaroids are rotated simultaneously in the same direction with the same angular velocity, then there would be no change in the intensity of the transmitted light observed.

Can you tell? (Textbook Page No. 168)

Question 1.
If you look at the sky in a particular direction through a polaroid and rotate the polaroid around that direction what will you see ?
Answer:
As the scattered light is polarized, the sky appears bright and dim alternately.

Question 2.
Why does the sky appear to be blue while the clouds appear white ?
Answer:
The blue colour of the sky is because of the scattering of light by air molecules and dust particles in the atmosphere. As the wavelength of blue light is less than that of red light, the blue light is preferentially scattered than the light corresponding to other colours in the visible region. Clouds are seen due to scattering of light from lower parts of the atmosphere. The clouds contain the dust particles and water droplets which are sometimes large enough to scatter light of all the wavelengths such that the combined effect makes the clouds appear white.

Remember this (Textbook Page No. 171)

Question 1.
For the interference pattern to be clearly visible on the screen, the distance (D) between the slits and the screen should be much larger than the distance (d) between the two slits (S1 and S2), i.e., D » d.
Answer:
The condition for constructive interference at P is,
∆l = yn\(\frac{d}{D}\) = nλ …. (1)
yn being the position (y-coordinate) of nth bright fringe (n = 0, ±1, ±2, …).
∴ yn = nλ\(\frac{D}{d}\) ….. (2)
Similarly, the position of mth (m = +1, ±2,…) dark fringe (destructive interference) is given by,
∆l = ym\(\frac{d}{D}\) = (2m – 1)λ giving
ym = (2m – 1)λ\(\frac{D}{d}\) …(3)
The distance between any two consecutive bright or dark fringes, i.e., the fringe width
= W = ∆y = yn + 1 – yn = λ\(\frac{D}{d}\) …(4)
Conditions given by Eqs. (1) to (4) and hence the location of the fringes are derived assuming that the two sources S1 and S2 are in phase. If there is a non-zero phase difference between them it should be added appropriately. This will shift the entire fringe pattern but will not change the fringe width.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics

Do you know (Textbook Page No. 172 & 173)

Several phenomena that we come across in our day to day life are caused by interference and diffraction of light. These are the vigorous colours of soap bubbles as well as those seen in a thin oil film on the surface of water, the bright colours of butterflies and peacocks etc. Most of these colours are not due to pigments which absorb specific colours but are due to interference of light waves that are reflected by different layers.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 7 Wave Optics 90

Interference due to a thin film :
The brilliant colours of soap bubbles and thin films on the surface of water are due to the interference of light waves reflected from the upper and lower surfaces of the film. The two rays have a path difference which depends on the point on the film that is being viewed. This is shown in above figure.

The incident wave gets partially reflected from upper surface as shown by ray AE. The rest of the light gets refracted and travels along AB. At B it again gets partially reflected and travels along BC. At C it refracts into air and travels along CF. The parallel rays AE and CF have a phase difference due to their different path lengths in different media. As can be seen from the figure, the phase difference depends on the angle of incidence θ1 i.e., the angle of incidence at the top surface which is the angle of viewing, and also on the wavelength of the light as the refractive index of the material of the thin film depends on it. The two waves propagating along AE and CF interfere producing maxima and minima for different colours at different angles of viewing. One sees different colours when the film is viewed at different angles.

As the reflection is from the denser boundary, there is an additional phase difference of π radians (or an additional path difference λ). This should be taken into account for mathematical analysis.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

1. Choose the correct option

i) A parallel plate capacitor is charged and then isolated. The effect of increasing the plate separation on charge, potential, capacitance respectively are
(A) Constant, decreases, decreases
(B) Increases, decreases, decreases
(C) Constant, decreases, increases
(D) Constant, increases, decreases
Answer:
(A) Constant, decreases, decreases

ii) A slab of material of dielectric constant k has the same area A as the plates of a parallel plate capacitor and has thickness (3/4d), where d is the separation of the plates. The change in capacitance when the slab is inserted between the plates is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 1
Answer:
(D) C = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\left(\frac{4 k}{k+3}\right)\)

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

iii) Energy stored in a capacitor and dissipated during charging a capacitor bear a ratio.
(A) 1 : 1
(B) 1 : 2
(C) 2 : 1
(D) 1 : 3
Answer:
(A) 1 : 1

iv) Charge + q and -q are placed at points A and B respectively which are distance 2L apart. C is the mid point of A and B. The work done in moving a charge +Q along the semicircle CRD as shown in the figure below is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 2
(C) \(\frac{q Q}{6 \pi \varepsilon_{0} L}\)
(D) \(\frac{-q Q}{6 \pi \varepsilon_{0} L}\)
Answer:
(A) \(-\frac{Q q_{1}}{6 \pi \varepsilon_{0} L}\)

v) A parallel plate capacitor has circular plates of radius 8 cm and plate separation 1mm. What will be the charge on the plates if a potential difference of 100 V is applied?
(A) 1.78 × 10-8 C
(B) 1.78 × 10-5 C
(C) 4.3 × 104 C
(D) 2 × 10-9 C
Answer:
(A) 1.78 × 10-8 C

2. Answer in brief.

i) A charge q is moved from a point A above a dipole of dipole moment p to a point B below the dipole in equitorial plane without acceleration. Find the work done in this process.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 3
Answer:
The equatorial plane of an electric dipole is an equipotential with V = 0. Therefore, the no work is done in moving a charge between two points in the equatorial plane of a dipole.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

ii) If the difference between the radii of the two spheres of a spherical capacitor is increased, state whether the capacitance will increase or decrease.
Answer:
The capacitance of a spherical capacitor is C = 4πε0\(\left(\frac{a b}{b-a}\right)\) where a and b are the radii of the concentric inner and outer conducting shells. Hence, the capacitance decreases if the difference b – a is increased.

iii) A metal plate is introduced between the plates of a charged parallel plate capacitor. What is its effect on the capacitance of the capacitor?
Answer:
Suppose the parallel-plate capacitor has capacitance C0, plates of area A and separation d. Assume the metal sheet introduced has the same area A.

Case (1) : Finite thickness t. Free electrons in the sheet will migrate towards the positive plate of the capacitor. Then, the metal sheet is attracted towards whichever capacitor plate is closest and gets stuck to it, so that its potential is the same as that of that plate. The gap between the capacitor plates is reduced to d – t, so that the capacitance increases.

Case (2) : Negligible thickness. The thin metal sheet divides the gap into two of thicknesses d1 and d1 of capacitances C1 = ε0A/d1 and C2 = ε0A/d2 in series.
Their effective capacitance is
C = \(\frac{C_{1} C_{2}}{C_{1}+C_{2}}=\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d_{1}+d_{2}}=\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) = C0
i.e., the capacitance remains unchanged.

iv) The safest way to protect yourself from lightening is to be inside a car. Justify.
Answer:
There is danger of lightning strikes during a thunderstorm. Because trees are taller than people and therefore closer to the clouds above, they are more likely to get hit by lightnings. Similarly, a person standing in open ground is the tallest object and more likely to get hit by a lightning. But car with a metal body is an almost ideal Faraday cage. When a car is struck by lightning, the charge flows on the outside surface of the car to the ground but the electric field inside remains zero. This leaves the passengers inside unharmed.

v) A spherical shell of radius b with charge Q is expanded to a radius a. Find the work done by the electrical forces in the process.
Answer:
Consider a spherical conducting shell of radius r placed in a medium of permittivity ε. The mechanical force per unit area on the charged conductor is
f = \(\frac{F}{d S}=\frac{\sigma^{2}}{2 \varepsilon}\)
where a is the surface charge density on the conductor. Given the charge on the spherical shell is Q, (σ = Q/πr2. The force acts outward, normal to the surface.

Suppose the force displaces a charged area element adS through a small distance dx, then the work done by the force is
dW = Fdx = (\(\frac{\sigma^{2}}{2 \varepsilon}\) dS) dx
During the displacement, the area element sweeps out a volume dV = dS ∙ dx.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 6
Therefore, the work done by the force in expanding the shell from radius r = b to r = a is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 7
This gives the required expression for the work done.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Question 3.
A dipole with its charges, -q and + q located at the points (0, -b, 0) and (0 +b, 0) is present in a uniform electric field E whose equipotential surfaces are planes parallel to the YZ planes.
(a) What is the direction of the electric field E?
(b) How much torque would the dipole experience in this field?
Answer:
(a) Given, the equipotentials of the external uniform electric field are planes parallel to the yz plane, the electric field \(\vec{E}=\pm E \hat{\mathrm{i}}\) that is, \(\overrightarrow{E}\) is parallel to the x-axis.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 12

(b) From above figure, the dipole moment, \(\vec{p}=q(2 b) \hat{\mathrm{j}}\)
The torque on this dipole,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 13
So that the magnitude of the torque is τ = 2qbE.
If \(\vec{E}\) is in the direction of the + x-axis, the torque \(\vec{\tau}\) is in the direction of – z-axis, while if \(\vec{E}\) is in the direction of the -x-axis, the torque \(\vec{\tau}\) is in the direction of + z-axis.

Question 4.
Three charges – q, + Q and – q are placed at equal distance on straight line. If the potential energy of the system of the three charges is zero, then what is the ratio of Q : q?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 10
In the above figure, the line joining the charges is shown as the x-axis with the origin at the + Q charge. Let q1 = +Q, and q2 = q3 = – q. Let the two – q charges be at (- a, 0) and (a, 0), since the charges are given to be equidistant.
∴ r21 = r31 = a and r32 = 2a
The total potential energy of the system of three charges is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 11
This gives the required ratio.

Question 5.
A capacitor has some dielectric between its plates and the capacitor is connected to a DC source. The battery is now disconnected and then the dielectric is removed. State whether the capacitance, the energy stored in it, the electric field, charge stored and voltage will increase, decrease or remain constant.
Answer:
Assume a parallel-plate capacitor, of plate area A and plate separation d is filled with a dielectric of relative permittivity (dielectric constant) k. Its capacitance is C = \(\frac{k \varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\) …………. (1)
If it is charged to a voltage (potential) V, the charge on its plates is Q = CV.

Since the battery is disconnected after it is charged, the charge Q on its plates, and consequently the product CV, remain unchanged.

On removing the dielectric completely, its capacitance becomes from Eq. (1),
C’ = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}=\frac{1}{k} C\) ……………. (2)
that is, its capacitance decreases by the factor k. Since C’V’ = CV, its new voltage is
V’ = \(\frac{C}{C^{\prime}}\) V = kV …………… (3)

so that its voltage increases by the factor k. The stored potential energy, U = \(\frac{1}{2}\) QV, so that Q remaining constant, U increases by the factor k. The electric field, E = V/ d, so that E also increases by a factor k.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Question 6.
Find the ratio of the potential differences that must be applied across the parallel and series combination of two capacitors C1 and C2 with their capacitances in the ratio 1 : 2, so that the energy stored in these two cases becomes the same.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 19
This gives the required ratio.

Question 7.
Two charges of magnitudes -4Q and +2Q are located at points (2a, 0) and (5a, 0) respectively. What is the electric flux due to these charges through a sphere of radius 4a with its centre at the origin?
Answer:
The sphere of radius 4a encloses only the negative charge Q1 = -4Q. The positive charge Q2 = +2Q being located at a distance of 5a from the origin is outside the sphere. Only a part of the electric flux lines originating at Q2 enters the sphere and exits entirely at other points. Hence, the electric flux through the sphere is only due to Q1.
Therefore, the net electric flux through the sphere = \(\frac{Q_{1}}{\varepsilon_{0}}=\frac{-4 Q}{\varepsilon_{0}}\) . The minus sign shows that the flux is directed into the sphere, but not radially since the sphere is not centred on Q1.

Question 8.
A 6 µF capacitor is charged by a 300 V supply. It is then disconnected from the supply and is connected to another uncharged 3µF capacitor. How much electrostatic energy of the first capacitor is lost in the form of heat and electromagnetic radiation ?
Answer:
Data: C = 6 µF = 6 × 10-6 F = C1, V = 300 V
C2 = 3 µF
The electrostatic energy in the capacitor
= \(\frac{1}{2}\)Cv2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\)(6 × 10-6)(300)2
= 3 × 10-6 × 9 × 104 = 0.27J
The charge on this capacitor,
Q = CV = (6 × 10-6)(300) = 1.8 mC
When two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are connected in parallel, the equivalent capacitance C
= C1 + C2 = 6 + 3 = 9 µF
= 9 × 10-6F
By conservation of charge, Q = 1.8 C.
∴ The energy of the system = \(\frac{Q^{2}}{2 C}\)
= \(\frac{\left(1.8 \times 10^{-3}\right)^{2}}{2\left(9 \times 10^{-6}\right)}=\frac{18 \times 10^{-8}}{10^{-6}}\) = 0.18 J
The energy lost = 0.27 – 0.18 = 0.09 J

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Question 9.
One hundred twenty five small liquid drops, each carrying a charge of 0.5 µC and each of diameter 0.1 m form a bigger drop. Calculate the potential at the surface of the bigger drop.
Answer:
Data : n = 125, q = 0.5 × 10-6 C, d = 0.1 m
The radius of each small drop, r = d/2 = 0.05 m
The volume of the larger drop being equal to the volume of the n smaller drops, the radius of the larger drop is
R = \(\sqrt[3]{n} r\) = \(\sqrt[3]{125}\) (0.05) = 5 × 0.05 = 0.25 m
The charge on the larger drop,
Q = nq = 125 × (0.5 × 10-6) C
∴ The electric potential of the surface of the larger drop,
V = \(\frac{1}{4 \pi \varepsilon_{0}} \frac{Q}{R}\) = (9 × 109) × \(\frac{125 \times\left(0.5 \times 10^{-6}\right)}{0.25}\)
= 9 × 125 × 2 × 103 = 2.25 × 106 V

Question 10.
The dipole moment of a water molecule is 6.3 × 10-30 Cm. A sample of water contains 1021 molecules, whose dipole moments are all oriented in an electric field of strength 2.5 × 105 N /C. Calculate the work to be done to rotate the dipoles from their initial orientation θ1 = 0 to one in which all the dipoles are perpendicular to the field, θ2 = 90°.
Answer:
Data: p = 6.3 × 10-30 C∙m, N = 1021 molecules,
E = 2.5 × 105 N/C, θ0 = θ1 = 0°, θ = θ2 = 90°
W = pE(cos θ0 – cos θ)
The total work required to orient N dipoles is
W = NpE(cos θ1 – cos θ2)
=(1021)(6.3 × 10-30)(2.5 × 105)
= 15.75 × 10-4 J = 1.575 mJ

Question 11.
A charge 6 µC is placed at the origin and another charge -5 µC is placed on the y axis at a position A (0, 6.0) m.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 4
(a) Calculate the total electric potential at the point P whose coordinates are (8.0, 0) m
(b) Calculate the work done to bring a proton from infinity to the point P. What is the significance of the sign of the work done ?
Answer:
Data : q1 = 6 × 10-6 C, q2 = -5 × 10-6 C,
A ≡ (0, 6.0 m), P ≡ (8.0 m, 0), r1 = OP = 8 m, q = e = 1.6 × 10-19C, 1/4πε0 = 9 × 109 N∙m2/C2
r2 = AP = \(\sqrt{(8-0)^{2}+(0-6)^{2}}\) = \(\sqrt{64+36}\) = 10 m

(a) The net electric potential at P due to the system of two charges is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 9

(b) The electric potential V at the point P is the negative of the work done per unit charge, by the electric field of the system of the charges q1 and q2, in bringing a test charge from infinity to that point.
V = \(-\frac{W}{q_{0}}\)
∴ W = -qV= -(1.6 × 10-19)(2.25 × 103)
= -3.6 × 10-16 J= -2.25 keV
That is, in bringing the positively charged proton from a point of lower potential to a point of higher potential, the work done by the electric field on it is negative, which means that an external agent must bring the proton against the electric field of the system of the two source charges.

[Note : The potential V at a point is the work done per unit charge (Wext) by an external agent in bringing a test charge from infinity to that point. In the above case, the work done by an external agent will be positive. The question does not specify this.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Question 12.
In a parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates, each plate has an area of 6 × 10-3 m2 and the separation between the plates is 2 mm.
i) Calculate the capacitance of the capacitor.
ii) If this capacitor is connected to 100 V supply, what would be the charge on each plate?
iii) How would charge on the plates be affected if a 2 mm thick mica sheet of k = 6 is inserted between the plates while the voltage supply remains connected ?
Answer:
Data: k = 1(air), A = 6 × 10-3 m2, d = 2
mm = 2 × 10-3 m,V = 100V, t = 2 mm = d, k1 = 6,
ε0 = 8.85 × 10-12 F/m
(i) The capacitance of the air capacitor, C0 = \(\frac{\varepsilon_{0} A}{d}\)
= \(\frac{\left(8.85 \times 10^{-12}\right)\left(6 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{2 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 26.55 × 10-12 F = 26.55 pF

(ii) Q0 = C0V = (26.55 × 10-12)(100)
= 26.55 × 10-10 C = 2.655 nC

(iii) The dielectric of relative permittivity k1 completely fills the space between the plates (∵t = d), so that the new capacitance is C = k1C0.
With the supply still connected, V remains the same.
∴ Q = CV = kC0V = kQ0 =6(2.655 nF) = 15.93 nC
Therefore, the charge on the plates increases.
[Note: Ck1C0 = 6(26.55 pF)= 159.3 pF.]

Question 13.
Find the equivalent capacitance between P and Q. Given, area of each plate = A and separation between plates = d.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 5
Answer:
(i) The capacitor in figure is a series combination of three capacitors of plate separations d/3 and plate areas A, with C1 filled with air (k1 = 1), C2 filled with dielectric of k2 = 3 and C3 filled with dielectric of k3 = 6
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 16

(ii) In figure, a series combination of two capacitors C2(k2 = 3) and C3(k3 = 6), of plate areas A/2 and plate separations d/2, is in parallel with a capacitor C1 (k1 = 4) of plate area A/2 and plate separation d.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 17
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 18

12th Physics Digest Chapter 8 Electrostatics Intext Questions and Answers

Can you recall (Textbook Page No. 188)

Question 1.
What is gravitational Potential ?
Answer:
We measure the gravitational potential energy U of a body (1) by assigning U = 0 for a reference configuration (such as the body at a reference level) (2) then equating U to the work W done by an external force to move the body up or down from that level to a point. We then define gravitational potential of the point as gravitational potential energy per unit mass of the body.

We follow the same procedure with the electric force, which is also a conservative force with the only difference that while the gravitational force is always attractive, electric force can be attractive (for unlike charges) or repulsive (for like charges).

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Remember this (Textbook Page No. 191)

Question 1.
Due to a single charge at a distance r, Force (F ) α 1/r2, Electric field (E ) α 1/r2 but Potential (V) α 1/ r.
Answer:
At a point a distance r from an isolated point charge, the force F on a point charge and the electric field E both vary as 1/r2, while the potential energy U of a point charge and the electric potential V at the point both vary as 1/r.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 8

Use your brain power (Textbook Page No.194)

Question 1.
Is electrostatic potential necessarily zero at a point where electric field strength is zero? Justify.
Answer:
Electric potential is a scalar quantity while electric field intensity is a vector quantity. When we add potentials at a point due two or more point charges, the operation is simple scalar addition along with the sign of V, determined by the sign of the q that produces V. At a point, the net field is the vector sum of the fields due to the individual charges. Midway between the two charges of an electric dipole, the potentials due to the two charges are equal in magnitude but opposite in sign, and thus add up to zero. But the electric fields due to the charges are equal in magnitude and direction-towards the negative charge-so that the net field there is not zero. But midway between two like charges of equal magnitudes, the potentials are equal in magnitude and have the same sign, so that the net potential is nonzero. However, the fields due to the two equal like charges are equal in magnitude but opposite in direction, and thus vectorially add up to zero.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Do you know (Textbook Page No. 203)

Question 1.
If we apply a large enough electric field, we can ionize the atoms and create a condition for electric charge to flow like a conductor. The fields required for the breakdown of dielectric is called dielectric strength.
Answer:
In a sufficiently strong electric field, the molecules of a dielectric material become ionized, allowing flow of charge. The insulating properties of the dielectric breaks down, permanently or temporarily, and the phenomenon is called dielectric breakdown. During dielectric breakdown, electrical discharge through the dielectric follows random-path patterns like tree branches, called a Lichtenberg figure. Dielectric strength is the voltage that an insulating material can withstand before breakdown occurs. It usually depends on the thickness of the material. It is expressed in kV/mm. For example, the dielectric strengths of air, polystyrene and mica in kV/mm are 3, 20 and 118. Higher dielectric strength corresponds to better insulation properties.

Remember this (Textbook Page No. 205)

Question 1.
Series combination is used when a high voltage is to be divided on several capacitors. Capacitor with minimum capacitance has the maximum potential difference between the plates.
Answer:
Series combination of capacitors

  1. Equivalent capacitance is less than the smallest capacitance in series. For several capacitors of given capacitances, the equivalent capacitance of their series combination is minimum.
  2. All capacitors in the combination have the same charge but their potential differences are in the inverse ratio of their capacitances.
  3. Series combination of capacitors is sometimes used when a high voltage, which exceeds the breakdown voltage of a single capacitor, is to be divided on more than one capacitors. Capacitive voltage dividers are only useful in AC circuits, since capacitors do not pass DC signals.

Parallel combination of capacitors

  1. For several capacitors of given capacitances, the equivalent capacitance of their parallel combination is maximum.
  2. The same voltage is applied to all capacitors in the combination, but the charge stored in the combination is distributed in proportion to their capacitances. The maximum rated voltage of a parallel combination is only as high as the lowest voltage rating of all the capacitors used. That is, if several capacitors rated at 500 V are connected in parallel to a capacitor rated at 100 V, the maximum voltage rating of the capacitor bank is only 100 V.
  3. Parallel combination of capacitors is used when a large capacitance is required, i.e., a large charge is to be stored, at a small potential difference.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics

Remember this (Textbook Page No. 207)

Question 1.
(1) If there are n parallel plates then there will be (n-1) capacitors, hence
C = (n – 1) \(\frac{A \varepsilon_{0}}{d}\)
(2) For a spherical capacitor, consisting of two concentric spherical conducting shells with inner and outer radii as a and b respectively, the capacitance C is given by
C = 4πε0\(\left(\frac{a b}{b-a}\right)\)
(3) For a cylindrical capacitor, consisting of two coaxial cylindrical shells with radii of the inner and outer cylinders as a and b, and length l, the capacitance C is given by
C = \(\frac{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0} \ell}{\log _{e} \frac{b}{a}}\)
Answer:
1. Stacking together n identical conducting plates equally spaced and with alternate plates connected to two points P and Q, forms a parallel combination of n -1 identical capacitors between P and Q. Then, the capacitance between the points is (n – 1) times the capacitance between any two adjacent plates.

2. A cylindrical capacitor consists of a solid cylindrical conductor of radius a is surrounded by coaxial cylindrical shell of inner radius b. The length of both cylinders is L, such that L is much larger than b – a, the separation of the cylinders, so that edge effects can be ignored. The capacitance of the capacitor is C = \(\frac{2 \pi \varepsilon_{0} L}{\log _{e}(b / a)}\).
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 14
The capacitance depends only on the geometrical factors, L, a and b, as for a parallel-plate capacitor.

3. A spherical capacitor which consists of two concentric spherical shells of radii a and b. The capacitance of the capacitor is C = 4πε0\(\left(\frac{a b}{b-a}\right)\)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 8 Electrostatics 15
Again, the capacitance depends only on the geometrical factors, a and b.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Textbook Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity Textbook Exercise Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board 12th Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

1. Choose the correct option.

i) Kirchhoff’s first law, i.e., ΣI = 0 at a junction, deals with the conservation of
(A) charge
(B) energy
(C) momentum
(D) mass
Answer:
(A) charge

ii) When the balance point is obtained in the potentiometer, a current is drawn from
(A) both the cells and auxiliary battery
(B) cell only
(C) auxiliary battery only
(D) neither cell nor auxiliary battery
Answer:
(D) neither cell nor auxiliary battery

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

iii) In the following circuit diagram, an infinite series of resistances is shown. Equivalent resistance between points A and B is
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 1
(A) infinite
(B) zero
(C) 2 Ω
(D) 1.5 Ω
Answer:
(C) 2 Ω

iv) Four resistances 10 Ω, 10 Ω, 10 Ω and 15 Ω form a Wheatstone’s network. What shunt is required across 15 Ω resistor to balance the bridge
(A) 10 Ω
(B) 15 Ω
(C) 20 Ω
(D) 30 Ω
Answer:
(D) 30 Ω

v) A circular loop has a resistance of 40 Ω. Two points P and Q of the loop, which are one quarter of the circumference apart are connected to a 24 V battery, having an internal resistance of 0.5 Ω. What is the current flowing through the battery.
(A) 0.5 A
(B) 1A
(C) 2A
(D) 3A
Answer:
(D) 3A

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

vi) To find the resistance of a gold bangle, two diametrically opposite points of the bangle are connected to the two terminals of the left gap of a metre bridge. A resistance of 4 Ω is introduced in the right gap. What is the resistance of the bangle if the null point is at 20 cm from the left end?
(A) 2 Ω
(B) 4 Ω
(C) 8 Ω
(D) 16 Ω
Answer:
(A) 2 Ω

2. Answer in brief.

i) Define or describe a Potentiometer.
Answer:
The potentiometer is a device used for accurate measurement of potential difference as well as the emf of a cell. It does not draw any current from the circuit at the null point. Thus, it acts as an ideal voltmeter and it can be used to determine the internal resistance of a cell. It consist of a long uniform wire AB of length L, stretched on a wooden board. A cell of stable emf (E), with a plug key K in series, is connected across AB as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 8

ii) Define Potential Gradient.
Answer:
Potential gradient is defined as the potential difference (the fall of potential from the high potential end) per unit length of the wire.

iii) Why should not the jockey be slided along the potentiometer wire?
Answer:
Sliding the jockey on the potentiometer wire decreases the cross sectional area of the wire and thereby affects the fall of potential along the wire. This affects the potentiometer readings. Flence, the jockey should not be slided along the potentiometer wire.

iv) Are Kirchhoff’s laws applicable for both AC and DC currents?
Answer:
Kirchhoff’s laws are applicable to both AC and DC ’ circuits (networks). For AC circuits with different loads, (e.g. a combination of a resistor and a capacitor, the instantaneous values for current and voltage are considered for addition.

[Note : Gustav Robert Kirchhoff (1824-87), German physicist, devised laws of electrical network and, with Robert Wilhelm Bunsen, (1811-99), German chemist, did pioneering work in chemical spectroscopy. He also con-tributed to radiation.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

v) In a Wheatstone’s meter-bridge experiment, the null point is obtained in middle one third portion of wire. Why is it recommended?
Answer:

  1. The value of unknown resistance X, may not be accurate due to non-uniformity of the bridge wire and development of contact resistance at the ends of the wire.
  2. To minimise these errors, the value of R is so adjusted that the null point is obtained in the middle one-third of the wire (between 34 cm and 66 cm) so that the percentage errors in the measurement of IX and IR are minimum and nearly the same.

vi) State any two sources of errors in meterbridge experiment. Explain how they can be minimized.
Answer:
The chief sources of error in the metre bridge experiment are as follows :

  1. The bridge wire may not be uniform in cross section. Then the wire will not have a uniform resistance per unit length and hence its resistance will not be proportional to its length.
  2. End resistances at the two ends of the wire may be introduced due to
    1. the resistance of the metal strips
    2. the contact resistance of the bridge wire with the metal strips
    3. unmeasured lengths of the wire at the ends because the contact points of the wire with the metal strips do not coincide with the two ends of the metre scale attached.

Such errors are almost unavoidable but can be minimized considerably as follows :

  1. Readings must be taken by adjusting the standard known resistance such that the null point is obtained close to the centre of the wire. When several readings are to be taken, the null points should lie in the middle one-third of the wire.
  2. The measurements must be repeated with the standard resistance (resistance box) and the unknown resistance interchanged in the gaps of the bridge, obtaining the averages of the two results.

vii) What is potential gradient? How is it measured? Explain.
Answer:
Consider a potentiometer consisting of a long uniform wire AB of length L and resistance R, stretched on a wooden board and connected in series with a cell of stable emf E and internal resistance r and a plug key K as shown in below figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 9
Let I be the current flowing through the wire when the circuit is closed.
Current through AB, I = \(\frac{E}{R+r}\)
Potential difference across AB. VAB = IR
∴ VAB = \(\frac{E R}{(R+r)}\)
The potential difference (the fall of potential from the high potential end) per unit length of the wire,
\(\frac{V_{\mathrm{AB}}}{L}=\frac{E R}{(R+r) L}\)
As long as E and r remain constant, \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{AB}}}{L}\) will remain constant, \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{AB}}}{L}\) is known as potential gradient along

AB and is denoted by K. Thus the potential gradient is calculated by measuring the potential difference between ends of the potentiometer wire and dividing it by the length of the wire.
Let P be any point on the wire between A and B and AP = l = length of the wire between A and P.
Then VAP = Kl
∴ VAP ∝ l as K is constant in a particular case. Thus, the potential difference across any length of the potentiometer wire is directly proportional to that length. This is the principle of the potentiometer.

viii) On what factors does the potential gradient of the wire depend?
Answer:
The potential gradient depends upon the potential difference between the ends of the wire and the length of the wire.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

ix) Why is potentiometer preferred over a voltmeter for measuring emf?
Answer:
A voltmeter should ideally have an infinite resistance so that it does not draw any current from the circuit. However a voltmeter cannot be designed to have infinite resistance. A potentiometer does not draw any current from the circuit at the null point. Therefore, it gives more accurate measurement. Thus, it acts as an ideal voltmeter.

x) State the uses of a potentiometer.
Answer:
The applications (uses) of the potentiometer :

  1. Voltage divider :
    The potentiometer can be used as a voltage divider to change the output voltage of a voltage supply.
  2. Audio control:
    Sliding potentiometers are commonly used in modern low-power audio systems as audio control devices. Both sliding (faders) and rotary potentiometers (knobs) are regularly used for frequency attenuation, loudness control and for controlling different characteristics of audio signals.
  3. Potentiometer as a sensor:
    If the slider of the potentiometer is connected to the moving part of a machine, it can work as a motion sensor. A small displacement of the moving part causes a change in potential which is further amplified using an amplifier circuit. The potential difference is calibrated in terms of displacement of the moving part.
  4. To measure the emf (for this, the emf of the standard cell and potential gradient must be known).
  5. To compare the emf’s of two cells.
  6. To determine the internal resistance of a cell.

xi) What are the disadvantages of a potentiometer?
Answer:
Disadvantages of a potentiometer over a voltmeter :

  1. The use of a potentiometer is an indirect measurement method while a voltmeter is a direct reading instrument.
  2. A potentiometer is unwieldy while a voltmeter is portable.
  3. Unlike a voltmeter, the use of a potentiometer in measuring an unknown emf requires a standard . source of emf and calibration.

xii) Distinguish between a potentiometer and a voltmeter.
Answer:

Potentiometer Voltmeter
1. A potentiometer is used to determine the emf of a cell, potential difference and internal resistance. 1. A voltmeter can be used to measure the potential difference and terminal voltage of a cell. But it cannot be used to measure the emf of a cell.
2. Its accuracy and sensitivity are very high. 2. Its accuracy and sensitivity are less as compared to a potentiometer.
3. It is not a portable instrument. 3. It is a portable instrument.
4. It does not give a direct reading. 4. It gives a direct reading.

xiii) What will be the effect on the position of zero deflection if only the current flowing through the potentiometer wire is
(i) increased (ii) decreased.
Answer:
(1) On increasing the current through the potentiometer wire, the potential gradient along the wire will increase. Hence, the position of zero deflection will occur at a shorter length.

(2) On decreasing the current through the potentiometer wire, the potential gradient along the wire will decrease. Hence, the position of zero deflection will occur at a longer length.
[Note : In the usual notation,
E1 = (\(\frac{I R}{L}\)) l1 = constant
Hence, (i) E, decreases when I is increased (ii) l1 increases when I is decreased.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 3.
Obtain the balancing condition in case of a Wheatstone’s network.
Answer:
Wheatstone’s network or bridge is a circuit for indirect measurement of resistance by null com-parison method by comparing it with a standard known resistance. It consists of four resistors with resistances P, Q, R and S arranged in the form of a quadrilateral ABCD. A cell (E) with a plug key (K) in series is connected across one diagonal AC and a galvanometer (G) across the other diagonal BD as shown in the following figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 15
With the key K dosed, currents pass through the resistors and the galvanometer. One or more of the resistances is adjusted until no deflection in the galvanometer can be detected. The bridge is then said to be balanced.

Let I be the current drawn from the cell. At junction A, it divides into a current I1 through P and a current I2 through S.
I = I1 + I2 (by Kirchhoff’s first law).
At junction B, current Ig flows through the galvanometer and current I1 – Ig flows through Q. At junction D, I2 and Ig combine. Hence, current I2 + Ig flows through R from D to C. At junction C, I1 – Ig and I2 + Ig combine. Hence, current I1 + I2(= I) leaves junction C.

Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop ABDA in a clockwise sense, we get,
– I1P – IgG + I2S = 0 …………… (1)
where G is the resistance of the galvanometer.
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop BCDB in a clockwise sense, we get,
– (I1 – Ig)Q + (I2 + Ig)R + IgG = 0 ………….. (2)
When Ig = 0, the bridge (network) is said to be balanced. In that case, from Eqs. (1) and (2), we get,
I1P = I2S …………… (3)
and I1Q = I2R ………….. (4)
From Eqs. (3) and (4), we get,
\(\frac{P}{Q}=\frac{S}{R}\)
This is the condition of balance.
Alternative Method: When no current flows through the galvanometer, points B and D must be at the same potential.
∴ VB = VD
∴ VA – VB = VA – VD …………. (1)
and VB – VC = VD – VC ………… (2)
Now, VA – VB = I1P and VA – VD = I2S ………….. (3)
Also, VB – VC = I1Q and VD – VC = I2R …………. (4)
Substituting Eqs. (3) and (4) in Eqs. (1) and (2), we get,
I1P = I2S . ………… (5)
and I1Q = I2R …(6)
Dividing Eq. (5) by Eq. (6), we get,
\(\frac{P}{Q}=\frac{S}{R}\)
This is the condition of balance.

[ Note : In the determination of an unknown resistance using Wheatstone’s network, the unknown resistance is connected in one arm of the network (say, AB), and a standard known variable resistance is connected in an adjacent arm. Then, the other two arms are called the ratio arms. Also, because the positions of the cell and galvanometer can be interchanged, without a change in the condition of balance, the branches AC and BD in figure are called the conjugate arms. ]

Question 4.
Explain with neat circuit diagram, how you will determine the unknown resistance by using a meter-bridge.
Answer:
A metre bridge consists of a rectangular wooden board with two L-shaped thick metallic strips fixed along its three edges. A single thick metallic strip separates two L-shaped strips. A wire of length one metre and uniform cross section is stretched on a metre scale fixed on the wooden board. The ends of the wire are fixed to the L-shaped metallic strips.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 16
An unknown resistance X is connected in the left gap and a resistance box R is connected in the right gap as shown in above figure. One end of a centre-zero galvanometer (G) is connected to terminal C and the other end is connected to a pencil jockey (J). A cell (E) of emf E, plug key (K) and rheostat (Rh) are connected in series between points A and B.

Working : Keeping a suitable resistance (R) in the resistance box, key K is closed to pass a current through the circuit. The jockey is tapped along the wire to locate the equipotential point D when the galvanometer shows zero deflection. The bridge is then balanced and point D is called the null point and the method is called as null deflection method. The distances lX and lR of the null point from the two ends of the wire are measured.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 17
As R, lX and lR are known, the unknown resistance X can be calculated.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 5.
Describe Kelvin’s method to determine the resistance of a galvanometer by using a meter bridge.
Answer:
Kelvin’s method :
Circuit: The metre bridge circuit for Kelvin’s method of determination of the resistance of a galvanometer is shown in below figure. The galvanometer whose resistance G is to be determined, is connected in one gap of the metre bridge. A resistance box providing a variable known resistance R is connected in the other gap. The junction B of the galvanometer and the resistance box is con-nected directly to a pencil jockey. A cell of emf E, a key (K) and a rheostat (Rh) are connected across AC.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 6
Working : Keeping a suitable resistance R in the resistance box and maximum resistance in the rheostat, key K is closed to pass the current. The rheostat resistance is slowly reduced such that the galvanometer shows about 2 / 3rd of the full-scale deflection.

On tapping the jockey at end-points A and C, the galvanometer deflection should change to opposite sides of the initial deflection. Only then will there be a point D on the wire which is equipotential with point B. The jockey is tapped along the wire to locate the equipotential point D when the galvanometer shows no change in deflection. Point D is now called the balance point and Kelvin’s method is thus an equal deflection method. At this balanced condition,
\(\frac{G}{R}=\frac{\text { resistance of the wire of length } l_{G}}{\text { resistance of the wire of length } l_{R}}\)
where IG = the length of the wire opposite to the galvanometer, IR = the length of the wire opposite to the resistance box.
If λ = the resistance per unit length of the wire,
\(\frac{G}{R}=\frac{\lambda l_{G}}{\lambda l_{R}}=\frac{l_{G}}{l_{R}}\)
∴ G = R\(\frac{l_{G}}{l_{R}}\)
The quantities on the right hand side are known, so that G can be calculated.
[Note : The method was devised by William Thom-son (Lord Kelvin, 1824-1907), British physicist.]

Question 6.
Describe how a potentiometer is used to compare the emfs of two cells by connecting the cells individually.
Answer:
A battery of stable emf E is used to set up a potential gradient V/L along a potentiometer wire, where V = potential difference across the length L of the wire. The positive terminals of the cells, whose emf’s (E1 and E2) are to be compared, are connected to the high potential terminal A. The negative terminals of the cells are connected to a galvanometer G through a two-way key. The other terminal of the galvanometer is connected to a pencil jockey. The emf E should be greater than both the emf’s E1 and E2.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 10
Connecting point P to C, the cell with emf E1 is brought into the circuit. The jockey is tapped along the wire to locate the null point D at a distance l1 from A. Then,
E1 = Z1(V/L)
Now, without changing the potential gradient (i.e., without changing the rheostat setting) point Q (instead of P) is connected to C, bringing the cell with emf E2 into the circuit. Let its null point D’ be at a distance l2 from A, so that
E2 = l2(V/L)
∴ \(\frac{E_{1}}{E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}\)
Hence, by measuring the corresponding null lengths l1 and l2, E1/E2 can be calculated. The experiment is repeated for different potential gradients using the rheostat.
[Note : This method is used when the two emf’s have comparable magnitudes. Then, the errors of measurement of their balancing lengths will also be of comparable magnitudes.]

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 7.
Describe how a potentiometer is used to compare the emfs of two cells by combination method.
Answer:
A battery of stable emf E is used to set up a potential gradient V/L, along the potentiometer wire, where V = potential difference across length L of the wire. The positive terminal of the cell 1 is connected to the higher potential terminal A of the potentiometer; the negative terminal is connected to the galvanometer G through the reversing key. The other terminal of the galvanometer is connected to a pencil jockey. The cell 2 is connected across the remaining two opposite terminals of the reversing key. The other terminal of the galvanometer is connected to a pencil jockey. The emf E1 should be greater than the emf E2; this can be adjusted by trial and error.

Two plugs are inserted in the reversing key in positions 1 – 1. Here, the two cells assist each other so that the net emf is E1 + E2. The jockey is tapped along the wire to locate the null point D. If the null point is a distance l1 from A,
E1 + E2 = l1 (V/L)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 11
For the same potential gradient (without changing the rheostat setting), the plugs are now inserted into position 2 – 2. (instead of 1 – 1). The emf E2 then opposes E1 and the net emf is E1 – E2. The new null point D’ is, say, a distance l2 from A and
E1 – E2 = l2 (V/L)
∴ \(\frac{E_{1}+E_{2}}{E_{1}-E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}}{l_{2}}\) ∴ \(\frac{E_{1}}{E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}-l_{2}}{l_{1}-l_{2}}\)
Here, the emf E should be greater than E1 + E2. The experiment is repeated for different potential gradients using the rheostat.
[Note : This method is used when E1 » E2, so that E1 + E2 and E1 – E2 have comparable magnitudes. Then, the errors of measurement of l1 and l2 will also be of comparable magnitudes.]

Question 8.
Describe with the help of a neat circuit diagram how you will determine the internal resistance of a cell by using a potentiometer. Derive the necessary formula.
Answer:
Principle : A cell of emf £ and internal resistance r, which is connected to an external resistance R, has its terminal potential difference V less than its emf E. If I is the corresponding current,
\(\frac{E}{V}=\frac{I(R+r)}{I R}=\frac{R+r}{R}\) = 1 + \(\frac{r}{R}\) (when R → ∞, V → E)
∴ r = \(\frac{E-V}{V}\) R
Working : A battery of stable emf E’ is used to set up a potential gradient V/L, along the potentiometer wire, where V = potential difference across the length L of the wire. The negative terminal is connected through a centre-zero galvanometer G to a pencil jockey. A resistance box R with a plug key K in series is connected across the cell.

Firstly, key K is kept open; then, effectively, R = ∞. The jockey is tapped on the potentiometer wire to locate the null point D. Let the null length
AD = l1, so that
E = (VAB/L)l1
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 12
With the same potential gradient, and a small resistance R in the resistance box, key K is closed. The new null length AD’ = l2 for the terminal potential difference V is found :
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 13
R, l1, and l2 being known, r can be calculated. The experiment is repeated with different potential gradients using the rheostat or with different values of R.

Question 9.
On what factors does the internal resistance of a cell depend?
Answer:
The internal resistance of a cell depends on :

  1. Nature of the electrolyte :
    The greater the conductivity of the electrolyte, the lower is the internal resistance of the cell.
  2. Separation between the electrodes :
    The larger the seperation between the electrodes of the cell, the higher is the internal resistance of the cell. This is because the ions have to cover a greater distance before reaching an electrode.
  3. Nature of the electrodes.
  4. The internal resistance is inversly proportional to the common area of the electrodes dipping in the electrolyte.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 10.
A battery of emf 4 volt and internal resistance 1 Ω is connected in parallel with
another battery of emf 1 V and internal resistance 1 Ω (with their like poles connected together). The combination is used to send current through an external resistance of 2 Ω. Calculate the current through the external resistance.
Answer:
Let I1 and I2 be the currents through the two branches as shown in below figure. The current through the 2 Q resistance will be (I1 + I2) [Kirchhoff’s current law].
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop ABCDEFA, we get,
-2(I1 + I2) – 1(I1) + 4 = 0
∴ 3I1 + 2I1 = 4 …………… (1)
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 3
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop BCDEB, we get,
-2(I1 + I2) – 1(I2) + 1 = 0
2I1 + 3I2 = 1 ………… (2)
Multiplying Eq. (1) by 2 and Eq. (2) by 3, we get,
6I1 + 4I2 = 8 ………….(3)
and 6I1 + 9I2 = 3 ……………. (4)
Subtracting Eq. (4) from Eq. (3), we get,
– 5I2 =5
∴ I2 = -1A
The minus sign shows that the direction of current I2 is opposite to that assumed. Substituting this value of 12 in Eq. (1), we get,
3I1 + 2(-1) = 4
∴3I1 = 4 + 2 = 6
∴ I1 = 2A
Current through the 2 0 resistance = I1 + I2 = 2 – 1
= 1 A. It is in the direction as shown in the figure.
[Note : We may as well consider loop ABEFA and write the corresponding equation. But it does not provide any additional information.]

Question 11.
Two cells of emf 1.5 Volt and 2 Volt having respective internal resistances of 1 Ω and 2 Ω are connected in parallel so as to send current in same direction through an external resistance of 5 Ω. Find the current through the external resistance.
Answer:
Let I1 and I2 be the currents through the two branches as shown in below figure. The current through the 5 Q resistor will be I1 + I2 [Kirchhoff’s current law].
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 4
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop w ABCDEFA, we get,
– 5(I1 + I2) – I1 + 1.5 = 0
∴ 6I1 + 5I2 = 1.5 ……………. (1)
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop BCDEB, we get,
– 5(I1 + I2) – 2I2 + 2 = 0
∴ 5I1 + 7I2 = 2 ……………(2)
Multiplying Eq. (1) by 5 and Eq. (2) by 6, we get,
30I1 + 25I2 = 7.5 …………… (3)
and 30I1 + 42I2 = 12 …………. (4)
Subtracting Eq. (3) from Eq. (4), we get,
17I2 = 4.5
∴ I2 = \(\frac{4.5}{17}\) A
Substituting this value of I2 in Eq. (1), we get,
6I1 + 5(\(\frac{4.5}{17}\)) = 1.5
∴ 6I1 + \(\frac{22.5}{17}\) = 1.5
∴ 6I1 = 1.5 – \(\frac{22.5}{17}\) = \(\frac{28.5-22.5}{17}\)
= \(\frac{3}{17}\)
∴ I1 = \(\frac{3}{17 \times 6}=\frac{0.5}{17}\) A
Current through the 5 Q resistance (external resistance)
= I1 + I2 = \(\frac{0.5}{17}+\frac{4.5}{17}=\frac{5}{17}\) A

Question 12.
A voltmeter has a resistance 30 Ω. What will be its reading, when it is connected across a cell of emf 2 V having internal resistance 10 Ω?
Answer:
Data: E = 2V, r = 10 Ω, R = 30 Ω
The voltmeter reading, V = IR
= (\(\frac{E}{R+r}\)) R
= (\(\frac{2}{30+10}\)) 30
= (\(\frac{2}{40}\)) 30
= 1.5 V

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 13.
A set of three coils having resistances 10 Ω, 12 Ω and 15 Ω are connected in parallel. This combination is connected in series with series combination of three coils of the same resistances. Calculate the total resistance and current through the circuit, if a battery of emf 4.1 Volt is used for drawing current.
Answer:
Below figure shows the electrical network. For resistances 10 Ω, 12 Ω and 15 Ω connected in parallel the equivalent resistance (Rp) is given by,
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 5
For resistance Rp, 10 Ω, 12 Ω and 15 Ω connected in series, the equivalent resistance,
Rs = 4 + 10 + 12 + 15 = 41 Ω
Thus, the total resistance = Rs = 41 Ω
Now, V = IRs
∴ 4.1 = 1 × 41
∴ I = 0.1A
The total resistance and current through the circuit are 41 Ω and 0.1 A respectively.

Question 14.
A potentiometer wire has a length of 1.5 m and resistance of 10 Ω. It is connected in series with the cell of emf 4 Volt and internal resistance 5 Ω. Calculate the potential drop per centimeter of the wire.
Answer:
Data : L = 1.5 m, R = 10 Ω, E = 4 V, r = 5 Ω
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 14
The potential drop per centimeter of the wire is 0.0178 \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{cm}}\)

Question 15.
When two cells of emfs. E1 and E2 are connected in series so as to assist each other, their balancing length on a potentiometer is found to be 2.7 m. When the cells are connected in series so as to oppose each other, the balancing length is found to be 0.3 m. Compare the emfs of the two cells.
Answer:
Data : l1 = 2.7m (cells assisting),
l2 = 0.3 m (cells opposing)
E1 + E2 = Kl1 and E1 – E2 = Kl2
∴\(\frac{E_{1}+E_{2}}{E_{1}-E_{2}}=\frac{K l_{1}}{K l_{2}}\)
∴ \(\frac{E_{1}}{E_{2}}=\frac{l_{1}+l_{2}}{l_{1}-l_{2}}=\frac{2.7+0.3}{2.7-0.3}=\frac{3}{2.4}=\frac{30}{24}\) = 1.25
The ratio of the emf’s of the two cells is 1.25.

Question 16.
The emf of a cell is balanced by a length of 120 cm of potentiometer wire. When the cell is shunted by a resistance of 10 Ω, the balancing length is reduced by 20 cm. Find the internal resistance of the cell.
Answer:
Data :R = 10 Ω, l1 = 120 cm, l2 = 120 – 20 = 100 cm
r = R(\(\frac{l_{1}-l_{2}}{l_{2}}\))
= 10 (\(\frac{120-100}{100}\))
= 2 Ω
The internal resistance of the cell is 2 Ω.

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 17.
A potential drop per unit length along a wire is 5 × 10-3 V/m. If the emf of a cell balances against length 216 cm of this potentiometer wire, find the emf of the cell.
Answer:
Data: K = 5 × 10-3 \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{m}}\), L = 216 cm = 216 × 10-2 m
E = KL
∴ E = 5 × 10-3 × 216 × 10-2
= 1080 × 10-5
= 0.01080V
The emf of the cell is 0.01080 volt.
(Note: For K = 0.5 V/m, we get, E = 1.08V (reasonable value)]

Question 18.
The resistance of a potentiometer wire is 8 Ω and its length is 8 m. A resistance box and a 2 V battery are connected in series with it. What should be the resistance in the box, if it is desired to have a potential drop of 1 µV/mm?
Answer:
Data: R = 8 Ω, L = 8 m, E = 2 V, K = 1 µV/mm
= 1 × \(\frac{10^{-6} \mathrm{~V}}{10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}}\) = 10-3 \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{m}}\)
K = \(\frac{V}{L}=\frac{E R}{\left(R+R_{\mathrm{B}}\right) L^{\prime}}\) where RB is the resistance in the box.
∴ 10-3 = \(\frac{2 \times 8}{\left(8+R_{B}\right) 8}\)
∴ 8 + RB = \(\frac{2}{10^{-3}}\)
= 2 × 103
∴ RB = 2000 – 8
= 1992 Ω

Question 19.
Find the equivalent resistance between the terminals F and B in the network shown in the figure below given that the resistance of each resistor is 10 ohm.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 2
Answer:
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop FGHF, we get,
– 10I1 – 10(I1 – I2) + 10(I – I1) + 10(I – I1) = 0
∴ – 10I1 – 10I1 + 10I2 + 10I – 10I1 + 10I – 10I1 = 0
∴ 201 – 40I1 + 10I2 = 0
∴ 2I – 4I1 + I2 = 0 …………….. (1)
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop GABHG, we get,
– 10I2 – 10I2 + 10(I – I2) + 10(I1 – I2) = 0
∴ – 20I2 + 10I – 10I2 + 10I1 – 10I2 = 0
∴ 10I + 10I1 – 40I2 = 0 .
∴ I + I1 – 4I2 = 0 ……………… (2)
Applying Kirchhoff’s voltage law to loop EFHBCDE, we get,
– 10(I – I1) – 10(I – I1) – 10(I – I2) + E = 0
∴ -10I + 10I1 – 10I + 10I1 – 10I + 10I2 + E = 0
∴E = 30I – 20I1 – 10I2 ………….. (3)
From Eq. (1), we get, I2 = 4I1 – 2I …………. (4)
From Eqs. (2) and (4), we get,
I + I1 – 4(4I1 – 2I) = 0
∴ I + I1 – 16I1 + 8I = 0 .
∴ 9I = 15I1 ∴ I1 = \(\frac{9}{15}\)I = \(\frac{3}{5}\)I …………. (5)
From Eqs. (4) and (5), we get,
I2 = 4(\(\frac{3}{5}\)I) – 2I = \(\frac{12}{5}\)I – 2I
= \(\frac{12 I-10 I}{5}\) = \(\frac{2}{5}\) I
From Eqs. (3), (5) and (6), we get
E = 30I – 20(\(\frac{3}{5}\) I) – 10(\(\frac{2}{5}\) I)
= 30I – 12I – 4I = 30I – 16I
∴ E = 14I
If R is the equivalent resistance between E and C,
E = RI
∴ R = 14 Ω

Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity

Question 20.
A voltmeter has a resistance of 100 Ω. What will be its reading when it is connected across a cell of emf 2 V and internal resistance 20 Ω?
Answer:
Data: E = 2V, r = 20 Ω, R = 100 Ω
The voltmeter reading, V = IR
V = (\(\frac{2}{100+20}\))100 = \(\frac{200}{120}=\frac{10}{6}\) = 1.667 V.

12th Physics Digest Chapter 9 Current Electricity Intext Questions and Answers

Observe and Discuss (Textbook Page No. 220)

Question 1.
Post Office Box
A post office box (PO Box) is a practical form of Wheatstone bridge as shown in the figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 12 Physics Solutions Chapter 9 Current Electricity 7
It consists of three arms P, Q and R. The resistances in these three arms are adjustable. The two ratio arms P and Q contain resistances of 10 ohm, 100 ohm and 1000 ohm each. The third arm R contains resistances from 1 ohm to 5000 ohm. The unknown resistance X (usually, in the form of a wire) forms the fourth arm of the Wheatstone’s bridge. There are two tap keys K1 and K2 .
Answer:
The resistances in the arms P and Q are fixed to a desired ratio. The resistance in the arm R is adjusted so that the galvanometer shows no deflection. Now the bridge is balanced. The unknown resistance X = RQ/P, where P and Q are the fixed resistances in the ratio arms and R is the adjustable known resistance.

If L is the length of the wire used to prepare the resistor with resistance X and r is its radius, then the specific resistance (resistivity) of the material of the wire is given by
ρ = \(\frac{X \pi r^{2}}{L}\)